|
/* $Header: /cvsroot/esrg/sfesrg/esrgpcpj/shared/tk_base/tktextdisp.c,v 1.1.1.1 2001/06/13 05:10:16 dtashley Exp $ */ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* tkTextDisp.c -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This module provides facilities to display text widgets. It is |
|
|
* the only place where information is kept about the screen layout |
|
|
* of text widgets. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California. |
|
|
* Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution |
|
|
* of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* RCS: @(#) $Id: tktextdisp.c,v 1.1.1.1 2001/06/13 05:10:16 dtashley Exp $ |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
#include "tkPort.h" |
|
|
#include "tkInt.h" |
|
|
#include "tkText.h" |
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef __WIN32__ |
|
|
#include "tkWinInt.h" |
|
|
#endif |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The following structure describes how to display a range of characters. |
|
|
* The information is generated by scanning all of the tags associated |
|
|
* with the characters and combining that with default information for |
|
|
* the overall widget. These structures form the hash keys for |
|
|
* dInfoPtr->styleTable. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
typedef struct StyleValues { |
|
|
Tk_3DBorder border; /* Used for drawing background under text. |
|
|
* NULL means use widget background. */ |
|
|
int borderWidth; /* Width of 3-D border for background. */ |
|
|
int relief; /* 3-D relief for background. */ |
|
|
Pixmap bgStipple; /* Stipple bitmap for background. None |
|
|
* means draw solid. */ |
|
|
XColor *fgColor; /* Foreground color for text. */ |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font for displaying text. */ |
|
|
Pixmap fgStipple; /* Stipple bitmap for text and other |
|
|
* foreground stuff. None means draw |
|
|
* solid.*/ |
|
|
int justify; /* Justification style for text. */ |
|
|
int lMargin1; /* Left margin, in pixels, for first display |
|
|
* line of each text line. */ |
|
|
int lMargin2; /* Left margin, in pixels, for second and |
|
|
* later display lines of each text line. */ |
|
|
int offset; /* Offset in pixels of baseline, relative to |
|
|
* baseline of line. */ |
|
|
int overstrike; /* Non-zero means draw overstrike through |
|
|
* text. */ |
|
|
int rMargin; /* Right margin, in pixels. */ |
|
|
int spacing1; /* Spacing above first dline in text line. */ |
|
|
int spacing2; /* Spacing between lines of dline. */ |
|
|
int spacing3; /* Spacing below last dline in text line. */ |
|
|
TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr;/* Locations and types of tab stops (may |
|
|
* be NULL). */ |
|
|
int underline; /* Non-zero means draw underline underneath |
|
|
* text. */ |
|
|
int elide; /* Non-zero means draw text */ |
|
|
TkWrapMode wrapMode; /* How to handle wrap-around for this tag. |
|
|
* One of TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR, |
|
|
* TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE or TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD.*/ |
|
|
} StyleValues; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The following structure extends the StyleValues structure above with |
|
|
* graphics contexts used to actually draw the characters. The entries |
|
|
* in dInfoPtr->styleTable point to structures of this type. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
typedef struct TextStyle { |
|
|
int refCount; /* Number of times this structure is |
|
|
* referenced in Chunks. */ |
|
|
GC bgGC; /* Graphics context for background. None |
|
|
* means use widget background. */ |
|
|
GC fgGC; /* Graphics context for foreground. */ |
|
|
StyleValues *sValuePtr; /* Raw information from which GCs were |
|
|
* derived. */ |
|
|
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr; /* Pointer to entry in styleTable. Used |
|
|
* to delete entry. */ |
|
|
} TextStyle; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The following macro determines whether two styles have the same |
|
|
* background so that, for example, no beveled border should be drawn |
|
|
* between them. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
#define SAME_BACKGROUND(s1, s2) \ |
|
|
(((s1)->sValuePtr->border == (s2)->sValuePtr->border) \ |
|
|
&& ((s1)->sValuePtr->borderWidth == (s2)->sValuePtr->borderWidth) \ |
|
|
&& ((s1)->sValuePtr->relief == (s2)->sValuePtr->relief) \ |
|
|
&& ((s1)->sValuePtr->bgStipple == (s2)->sValuePtr->bgStipple)) |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The following structure describes one line of the display, which may |
|
|
* be either part or all of one line of the text. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
typedef struct DLine { |
|
|
TkTextIndex index; /* Identifies first character in text |
|
|
* that is displayed on this line. */ |
|
|
int byteCount; /* Number of bytes accounted for by this |
|
|
* display line, including a trailing space |
|
|
* or newline that isn't actually displayed. */ |
|
|
int y; /* Y-position at which line is supposed to |
|
|
* be drawn (topmost pixel of rectangular |
|
|
* area occupied by line). */ |
|
|
int oldY; /* Y-position at which line currently |
|
|
* appears on display. -1 means line isn't |
|
|
* currently visible on display and must be |
|
|
* redrawn. This is used to move lines by |
|
|
* scrolling rather than re-drawing. */ |
|
|
int height; /* Height of line, in pixels. */ |
|
|
int baseline; /* Offset of text baseline from y, in |
|
|
* pixels. */ |
|
|
int spaceAbove; /* How much extra space was added to the |
|
|
* top of the line because of spacing |
|
|
* options. This is included in height |
|
|
* and baseline. */ |
|
|
int spaceBelow; /* How much extra space was added to the |
|
|
* bottom of the line because of spacing |
|
|
* options. This is included in height. */ |
|
|
int length; /* Total length of line, in pixels. */ |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Pointer to first chunk in list of all |
|
|
* of those that are displayed on this |
|
|
* line of the screen. */ |
|
|
struct DLine *nextPtr; /* Next in list of all display lines for |
|
|
* this window. The list is sorted in |
|
|
* order from top to bottom. Note: the |
|
|
* next DLine doesn't always correspond |
|
|
* to the next line of text: (a) can have |
|
|
* multiple DLines for one text line, and |
|
|
* (b) can have gaps where DLine's have been |
|
|
* deleted because they're out of date. */ |
|
|
int flags; /* Various flag bits: see below for values. */ |
|
|
} DLine; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Flag bits for DLine structures: |
|
|
* |
|
|
* HAS_3D_BORDER - Non-zero means that at least one of the |
|
|
* chunks in this line has a 3D border, so |
|
|
* it potentially interacts with 3D borders |
|
|
* in neighboring lines (see |
|
|
* DisplayLineBackground). |
|
|
* NEW_LAYOUT - Non-zero means that the line has been |
|
|
* re-layed out since the last time the |
|
|
* display was updated. |
|
|
* TOP_LINE - Non-zero means that this was the top line |
|
|
* in the window the last time that the window |
|
|
* was laid out. This is important because |
|
|
* a line may be displayed differently if its |
|
|
* at the top or bottom than if it's in the |
|
|
* middle (e.g. beveled edges aren't displayed |
|
|
* for middle lines if the adjacent line has |
|
|
* a similar background). |
|
|
* BOTTOM_LINE - Non-zero means that this was the bottom line |
|
|
* in the window the last time that the window |
|
|
* was laid out. |
|
|
* IS_DISABLED - This Dline cannot be edited. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
#define HAS_3D_BORDER 1 |
|
|
#define NEW_LAYOUT 2 |
|
|
#define TOP_LINE 4 |
|
|
#define BOTTOM_LINE 8 |
|
|
#define IS_DISABLED 16 |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Overall display information for a text widget: |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
typedef struct TextDInfo { |
|
|
Tcl_HashTable styleTable; /* Hash table that maps from StyleValues |
|
|
* to TextStyles for this widget. */ |
|
|
DLine *dLinePtr; /* First in list of all display lines for |
|
|
* this widget, in order from top to bottom. */ |
|
|
GC copyGC; /* Graphics context for copying from off- |
|
|
* screen pixmaps onto screen. */ |
|
|
GC scrollGC; /* Graphics context for copying from one place |
|
|
* in the window to another (scrolling): |
|
|
* differs from copyGC in that we need to get |
|
|
* GraphicsExpose events. */ |
|
|
int x; /* First x-coordinate that may be used for |
|
|
* actually displaying line information. |
|
|
* Leaves space for border, etc. */ |
|
|
int y; /* First y-coordinate that may be used for |
|
|
* actually displaying line information. |
|
|
* Leaves space for border, etc. */ |
|
|
int maxX; /* First x-coordinate to right of available |
|
|
* space for displaying lines. */ |
|
|
int maxY; /* First y-coordinate below available |
|
|
* space for displaying lines. */ |
|
|
int topOfEof; /* Top-most pixel (lowest y-value) that has |
|
|
* been drawn in the appropriate fashion for |
|
|
* the portion of the window after the last |
|
|
* line of the text. This field is used to |
|
|
* figure out when to redraw part or all of |
|
|
* the eof field. */ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Information used for scrolling: |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int newByteOffset; /* Desired x scroll position, measured as the |
|
|
* number of average-size characters off-screen |
|
|
* to the left for a line with no left |
|
|
* margin. */ |
|
|
int curPixelOffset; /* Actual x scroll position, measured as the |
|
|
* number of pixels off-screen to the left. */ |
|
|
int maxLength; /* Length in pixels of longest line that's |
|
|
* visible in window (length may exceed window |
|
|
* size). If there's no wrapping, this will |
|
|
* be zero. */ |
|
|
double xScrollFirst, xScrollLast; |
|
|
/* Most recent values reported to horizontal |
|
|
* scrollbar; used to eliminate unnecessary |
|
|
* reports. */ |
|
|
double yScrollFirst, yScrollLast; |
|
|
/* Most recent values reported to vertical |
|
|
* scrollbar; used to eliminate unnecessary |
|
|
* reports. */ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The following information is used to implement scanning: |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int scanMarkIndex; /* Byte index of character that was at the |
|
|
* left edge of the window when the scan |
|
|
* started. */ |
|
|
int scanMarkX; /* X-position of mouse at time scan started. */ |
|
|
int scanTotalScroll; /* Total scrolling (in screen lines) that has |
|
|
* occurred since scanMarkY was set. */ |
|
|
int scanMarkY; /* Y-position of mouse at time scan started. */ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Miscellaneous information: |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int dLinesInvalidated; /* This value is set to 1 whenever something |
|
|
* happens that invalidates information in |
|
|
* DLine structures; if a redisplay |
|
|
* is in progress, it will see this and |
|
|
* abort the redisplay. This is needed |
|
|
* because, for example, an embedded window |
|
|
* could change its size when it is first |
|
|
* displayed, invalidating the DLine that |
|
|
* is currently being displayed. If redisplay |
|
|
* continues, it will use freed memory and |
|
|
* could dump core. */ |
|
|
int flags; /* Various flag values: see below for |
|
|
* definitions. */ |
|
|
} TextDInfo; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* In TkTextDispChunk structures for character segments, the clientData |
|
|
* field points to one of the following structures: |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
typedef struct CharInfo { |
|
|
int numBytes; /* Number of bytes to display. */ |
|
|
char chars[4]; /* UTF characters to display. Actual size |
|
|
* will be numBytes, not 4. THIS MUST BE |
|
|
* THE LAST FIELD IN THE STRUCTURE. */ |
|
|
} CharInfo; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Flag values for TextDInfo structures: |
|
|
* |
|
|
* DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE: Non-zero means that the DLine structures |
|
|
* for this window are partially or completely |
|
|
* out of date and need to be recomputed. |
|
|
* REDRAW_PENDING: Means that a when-idle handler has been |
|
|
* scheduled to update the display. |
|
|
* REDRAW_BORDERS: Means window border or pad area has |
|
|
* potentially been damaged and must be redrawn. |
|
|
* REPICK_NEEDED: 1 means that the widget has been modified |
|
|
* in a way that could change the current |
|
|
* character (a different character might be |
|
|
* under the mouse cursor now). Need to |
|
|
* recompute the current character before |
|
|
* the next redisplay. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
#define DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE 1 |
|
|
#define REDRAW_PENDING 2 |
|
|
#define REDRAW_BORDERS 4 |
|
|
#define REPICK_NEEDED 8 |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The following counters keep statistics about redisplay that can be |
|
|
* checked to see how clever this code is at reducing redisplays. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static int numRedisplays; /* Number of calls to DisplayText. */ |
|
|
static int linesRedrawn; /* Number of calls to DisplayDLine. */ |
|
|
static int numCopies; /* Number of calls to XCopyArea to copy part |
|
|
* of the screen. */ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file: |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void AdjustForTab _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
|
|
TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr, int index, |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr)); |
|
|
static void CharBboxProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, |
|
|
int index, int y, int lineHeight, int baseline, |
|
|
int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, |
|
|
int *heightPtr)); |
|
|
static void CharDisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, |
|
|
int x, int y, int height, int baseline, |
|
|
Display *display, Drawable dst, int screenY)); |
|
|
static int CharMeasureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, |
|
|
int x)); |
|
|
static void CharUndisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr)); |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
Definitions of elided procs. |
|
|
Compiler can't inline these since we use pointers to these functions. |
|
|
ElideDisplayProc, ElideUndisplayProc special-cased for speed, |
|
|
as potentially many elided DLine chunks if large, tag toggle-filled |
|
|
elided region. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
static void ElideBboxProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, |
|
|
int index, int y, int lineHeight, int baseline, |
|
|
int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, |
|
|
int *heightPtr)); |
|
|
static int ElideMeasureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, |
|
|
int x)); |
|
|
|
|
|
static void DisplayDLine _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
|
|
DLine *dlPtr, DLine *prevPtr, Pixmap pixmap)); |
|
|
static void DisplayLineBackground _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
|
|
DLine *dlPtr, DLine *prevPtr, Pixmap pixmap)); |
|
|
static void DisplayText _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData)); |
|
|
static DLine * FindDLine _ANSI_ARGS_((DLine *dlPtr, |
|
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr)); |
|
|
static void FreeDLines _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
|
|
DLine *firstPtr, DLine *lastPtr, int unlink)); |
|
|
static void FreeStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
|
|
TextStyle *stylePtr)); |
|
|
static TextStyle * GetStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
|
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr)); |
|
|
static void GetXView _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
|
|
TkText *textPtr, int report)); |
|
|
static void GetYView _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
|
|
TkText *textPtr, int report)); |
|
|
static DLine * LayoutDLine _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
|
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr)); |
|
|
static int MeasureChars _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font tkfont, |
|
|
CONST char *source, int maxBytes, int startX, |
|
|
int maxX, int tabOrigin, int *nextXPtr)); |
|
|
static void MeasureUp _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
|
|
TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int distance, |
|
|
TkTextIndex *dstPtr)); |
|
|
static int NextTabStop _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font tkfont, int x, |
|
|
int tabOrigin)); |
|
|
static void UpdateDisplayInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr)); |
|
|
static void ScrollByLines _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
|
|
int offset)); |
|
|
static int SizeOfTab _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
|
|
TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr, int index, int x, |
|
|
int maxX)); |
|
|
static void TextInvalidateRegion _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
|
|
TkRegion region)); |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextCreateDInfo -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called when a new text widget is created. |
|
|
* Its job is to set up display-related information for the widget. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* A TextDInfo data structure is allocated and initialized and attached |
|
|
* to textPtr. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
TkTextCreateDInfo(textPtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Overall information for text widget. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
register TextDInfo *dInfoPtr; |
|
|
XGCValues gcValues; |
|
|
|
|
|
dInfoPtr = (TextDInfo *) ckalloc(sizeof(TextDInfo)); |
|
|
Tcl_InitHashTable(&dInfoPtr->styleTable, sizeof(StyleValues)/sizeof(int)); |
|
|
dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = NULL; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->copyGC = None; |
|
|
gcValues.graphics_exposures = True; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scrollGC = Tk_GetGC(textPtr->tkwin, GCGraphicsExposures, |
|
|
&gcValues); |
|
|
dInfoPtr->topOfEof = 0; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = 0; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset = 0; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->maxLength = 0; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->xScrollFirst = -1; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->xScrollLast = -1; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->yScrollFirst = -1; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->yScrollLast = -1; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex = 0; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkX = 0; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll = 0; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkY = 0; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated = 0; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags = DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE; |
|
|
textPtr->dInfoPtr = dInfoPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextFreeDInfo -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called to free up all of the private display |
|
|
* information kept by this file for a text widget. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Lots of resources get freed. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
TkTextFreeDInfo(textPtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Overall information for text widget. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
register TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Be careful to free up styleTable *after* freeing up all the |
|
|
* DLines, so that the hash table is still intact to free up the |
|
|
* style-related information from the lines. Once the lines are |
|
|
* all free then styleTable will be empty. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, (DLine *) NULL, 1); |
|
|
Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&dInfoPtr->styleTable); |
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->copyGC != None) { |
|
|
Tk_FreeGC(textPtr->display, dInfoPtr->copyGC); |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tk_FreeGC(textPtr->display, dInfoPtr->scrollGC); |
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) { |
|
|
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
ckfree((char *) dInfoPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* GetStyle -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure creates all the information needed to display |
|
|
* text at a particular location. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is a pointer to a TextStyle structure that |
|
|
* corresponds to *sValuePtr. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* A new entry may be created in the style table for the widget. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static TextStyle * |
|
|
GetStyle(textPtr, indexPtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Overall information about text widget. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* The character in the text for which |
|
|
* display information is wanted. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkTextTag **tagPtrs; |
|
|
register TkTextTag *tagPtr; |
|
|
StyleValues styleValues; |
|
|
TextStyle *stylePtr; |
|
|
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr; |
|
|
int numTags, new, i; |
|
|
XGCValues gcValues; |
|
|
unsigned long mask; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The variables below keep track of the highest-priority specification |
|
|
* that has occurred for each of the various fields of the StyleValues. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int borderPrio, borderWidthPrio, reliefPrio, bgStipplePrio; |
|
|
int fgPrio, fontPrio, fgStipplePrio; |
|
|
int underlinePrio, elidePrio, justifyPrio, offsetPrio; |
|
|
int lMargin1Prio, lMargin2Prio, rMarginPrio; |
|
|
int spacing1Prio, spacing2Prio, spacing3Prio; |
|
|
int overstrikePrio, tabPrio, wrapPrio; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find out what tags are present for the character, then compute |
|
|
* a StyleValues structure corresponding to those tags (scan |
|
|
* through all of the tags, saving information for the highest- |
|
|
* priority tag). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
tagPtrs = TkBTreeGetTags(indexPtr, &numTags); |
|
|
borderPrio = borderWidthPrio = reliefPrio = bgStipplePrio = -1; |
|
|
fgPrio = fontPrio = fgStipplePrio = -1; |
|
|
underlinePrio = elidePrio = justifyPrio = offsetPrio = -1; |
|
|
lMargin1Prio = lMargin2Prio = rMarginPrio = -1; |
|
|
spacing1Prio = spacing2Prio = spacing3Prio = -1; |
|
|
overstrikePrio = tabPrio = wrapPrio = -1; |
|
|
memset((VOID *) &styleValues, 0, sizeof(StyleValues)); |
|
|
styleValues.relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT; |
|
|
styleValues.fgColor = textPtr->fgColor; |
|
|
styleValues.tkfont = textPtr->tkfont; |
|
|
styleValues.justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT; |
|
|
styleValues.spacing1 = textPtr->spacing1; |
|
|
styleValues.spacing2 = textPtr->spacing2; |
|
|
styleValues.spacing3 = textPtr->spacing3; |
|
|
styleValues.tabArrayPtr = textPtr->tabArrayPtr; |
|
|
styleValues.wrapMode = textPtr->wrapMode; |
|
|
styleValues.elide = 0; |
|
|
for (i = 0 ; i < numTags; i++) { |
|
|
tagPtr = tagPtrs[i]; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* On Windows and Mac, we need to skip the selection tag if |
|
|
* we don't have focus. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef ALWAYS_SHOW_SELECTION |
|
|
if ((tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) && !(textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) { |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
#endif |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((tagPtr->border != NULL) && (tagPtr->priority > borderPrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.border = tagPtr->border; |
|
|
borderPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->bdString != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > borderWidthPrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.borderWidth = tagPtr->borderWidth; |
|
|
borderWidthPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->reliefString != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > reliefPrio)) { |
|
|
if (styleValues.border == NULL) { |
|
|
styleValues.border = textPtr->border; |
|
|
} |
|
|
styleValues.relief = tagPtr->relief; |
|
|
reliefPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->bgStipple != None) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > bgStipplePrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.bgStipple = tagPtr->bgStipple; |
|
|
bgStipplePrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->fgColor != None) && (tagPtr->priority > fgPrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.fgColor = tagPtr->fgColor; |
|
|
fgPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->tkfont != None) && (tagPtr->priority > fontPrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.tkfont = tagPtr->tkfont; |
|
|
fontPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->fgStipple != None) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > fgStipplePrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.fgStipple = tagPtr->fgStipple; |
|
|
fgStipplePrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->justifyString != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > justifyPrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.justify = tagPtr->justify; |
|
|
justifyPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->lMargin1String != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > lMargin1Prio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.lMargin1 = tagPtr->lMargin1; |
|
|
lMargin1Prio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->lMargin2String != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > lMargin2Prio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.lMargin2 = tagPtr->lMargin2; |
|
|
lMargin2Prio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->offsetString != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > offsetPrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.offset = tagPtr->offset; |
|
|
offsetPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->overstrikeString != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > overstrikePrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.overstrike = tagPtr->overstrike; |
|
|
overstrikePrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->rMarginString != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > rMarginPrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.rMargin = tagPtr->rMargin; |
|
|
rMarginPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->spacing1String != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > spacing1Prio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.spacing1 = tagPtr->spacing1; |
|
|
spacing1Prio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->spacing2String != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > spacing2Prio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.spacing2 = tagPtr->spacing2; |
|
|
spacing2Prio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->spacing3String != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > spacing3Prio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.spacing3 = tagPtr->spacing3; |
|
|
spacing3Prio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->tabString != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > tabPrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.tabArrayPtr = tagPtr->tabArrayPtr; |
|
|
tabPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->underlineString != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > underlinePrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.underline = tagPtr->underline; |
|
|
underlinePrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->elideString != NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > elidePrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.elide = tagPtr->elide; |
|
|
elidePrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((tagPtr->wrapMode != TEXT_WRAPMODE_NULL) |
|
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > wrapPrio)) { |
|
|
styleValues.wrapMode = tagPtr->wrapMode; |
|
|
wrapPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (tagPtrs != NULL) { |
|
|
ckfree((char *) tagPtrs); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Use an existing style if there's one around that matches. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->dInfoPtr->styleTable, |
|
|
(char *) &styleValues, &new); |
|
|
if (!new) { |
|
|
stylePtr = (TextStyle *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr); |
|
|
stylePtr->refCount++; |
|
|
return stylePtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* No existing style matched. Make a new one. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
stylePtr = (TextStyle *) ckalloc(sizeof(TextStyle)); |
|
|
stylePtr->refCount = 1; |
|
|
if (styleValues.border != NULL) { |
|
|
gcValues.foreground = Tk_3DBorderColor(styleValues.border)->pixel; |
|
|
mask = GCForeground; |
|
|
if (styleValues.bgStipple != None) { |
|
|
gcValues.stipple = styleValues.bgStipple; |
|
|
gcValues.fill_style = FillStippled; |
|
|
mask |= GCStipple|GCFillStyle; |
|
|
} |
|
|
stylePtr->bgGC = Tk_GetGC(textPtr->tkwin, mask, &gcValues); |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
stylePtr->bgGC = None; |
|
|
} |
|
|
mask = GCFont; |
|
|
gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(styleValues.tkfont); |
|
|
mask |= GCForeground; |
|
|
gcValues.foreground = styleValues.fgColor->pixel; |
|
|
if (styleValues.fgStipple != None) { |
|
|
gcValues.stipple = styleValues.fgStipple; |
|
|
gcValues.fill_style = FillStippled; |
|
|
mask |= GCStipple|GCFillStyle; |
|
|
} |
|
|
stylePtr->fgGC = Tk_GetGC(textPtr->tkwin, mask, &gcValues); |
|
|
stylePtr->sValuePtr = (StyleValues *) |
|
|
Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->dInfoPtr->styleTable, hPtr); |
|
|
stylePtr->hPtr = hPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, stylePtr); |
|
|
return stylePtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* FreeStyle -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called when a TextStyle structure is no longer |
|
|
* needed. It decrements the reference count and frees up the |
|
|
* space for the style structure if the reference count is 0. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The storage and other resources associated with the style |
|
|
* are freed up if no-one's still using it. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
FreeStyle(textPtr, stylePtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about overall widget. */ |
|
|
register TextStyle *stylePtr; /* Information about style to free. */ |
|
|
|
|
|
{ |
|
|
stylePtr->refCount--; |
|
|
if (stylePtr->refCount == 0) { |
|
|
if (stylePtr->bgGC != None) { |
|
|
Tk_FreeGC(textPtr->display, stylePtr->bgGC); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (stylePtr->fgGC != None) { |
|
|
Tk_FreeGC(textPtr->display, stylePtr->fgGC); |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(stylePtr->hPtr); |
|
|
ckfree((char *) stylePtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* LayoutDLine -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure generates a single DLine structure for a display |
|
|
* line whose leftmost character is given by indexPtr. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is a pointer to a DLine structure desribing the |
|
|
* display line. All fields are filled in and correct except for |
|
|
* y and nextPtr. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Storage is allocated for the new DLine. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static DLine * |
|
|
LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Overall information about text widget. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Beginning of display line. May not |
|
|
* necessarily point to a character segment. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
register DLine *dlPtr; /* New display line. */ |
|
|
TkTextSegment *segPtr; /* Current segment in text. */ |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *lastChunkPtr; /* Last chunk allocated so far |
|
|
* for line. */ |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Current chunk. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex curIndex; |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *breakChunkPtr; /* Chunk containing best word break |
|
|
* point, if any. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex breakIndex; /* Index of first character in |
|
|
* breakChunkPtr. */ |
|
|
int breakByteOffset; /* Byte offset of character within |
|
|
* breakChunkPtr just to right of best |
|
|
* break point. */ |
|
|
int noCharsYet; /* Non-zero means that no characters |
|
|
* have been placed on the line yet. */ |
|
|
int justify; /* How to justify line: taken from |
|
|
* style for the first character in |
|
|
* line. */ |
|
|
int jIndent; /* Additional indentation (beyond |
|
|
* margins) due to justification. */ |
|
|
int rMargin; /* Right margin width for line. */ |
|
|
TkWrapMode wrapMode; /* Wrap mode to use for this line. */ |
|
|
int x = 0, maxX = 0; /* Initializations needed only to |
|
|
* stop compiler warnings. */ |
|
|
int wholeLine; /* Non-zero means this display line |
|
|
* runs to the end of the text line. */ |
|
|
int tabIndex; /* Index of the current tab stop. */ |
|
|
int gotTab; /* Non-zero means the current chunk |
|
|
* contains a tab. */ |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *tabChunkPtr; /* Pointer to the chunk containing |
|
|
* the previous tab stop. */ |
|
|
int maxBytes; /* Maximum number of bytes to |
|
|
* include in this chunk. */ |
|
|
TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr; /* Tab stops for line; taken from |
|
|
* style for the first character on |
|
|
* line. */ |
|
|
int tabSize; /* Number of pixels consumed by current |
|
|
* tab stop. */ |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *lastCharChunkPtr; /* Pointer to last chunk in display |
|
|
* lines with numBytes > 0. Used to |
|
|
* drop 0-sized chunks from the end |
|
|
* of the line. */ |
|
|
int byteOffset, ascent, descent, code, elide, elidesize; |
|
|
StyleValues *sValuePtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Create and initialize a new DLine structure. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
dlPtr = (DLine *) ckalloc(sizeof(DLine)); |
|
|
dlPtr->index = *indexPtr; |
|
|
dlPtr->byteCount = 0; |
|
|
dlPtr->y = 0; |
|
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
|
|
dlPtr->height = 0; |
|
|
dlPtr->baseline = 0; |
|
|
dlPtr->chunkPtr = NULL; |
|
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = NULL; |
|
|
dlPtr->flags = NEW_LAYOUT; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Special case entirely elide line as there may be 1000s or more |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
elide = TkTextIsElided(textPtr, indexPtr); /* save a malloc */ |
|
|
if (elide && indexPtr->byteIndex==0) { |
|
|
maxBytes = 0; |
|
|
for (segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr; |
|
|
elide && (segPtr != NULL); |
|
|
segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if ((elidesize = segPtr->size) > 0) { |
|
|
maxBytes += elidesize; |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If have we have a tag toggle, there is a chance |
|
|
* that invisibility state changed, so bail out |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
} else if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) |
|
|
|| (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) { |
|
|
if (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elideString != NULL) { |
|
|
elide = (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) |
|
|
^ segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elide; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (elide) { |
|
|
dlPtr->byteCount = maxBytes; |
|
|
dlPtr->spaceAbove = dlPtr->spaceBelow = dlPtr->length = 0; |
|
|
return dlPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Each iteration of the loop below creates one TkTextDispChunk for |
|
|
* the new display line. The line will always have at least one |
|
|
* chunk (for the newline character at the end, if there's nothing |
|
|
* else available). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
curIndex = *indexPtr; |
|
|
lastChunkPtr = NULL; |
|
|
chunkPtr = NULL; |
|
|
noCharsYet = 1; |
|
|
elide = 0; |
|
|
breakChunkPtr = NULL; |
|
|
breakByteOffset = 0; |
|
|
justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT; |
|
|
tabIndex = -1; |
|
|
tabChunkPtr = NULL; |
|
|
tabArrayPtr = NULL; |
|
|
rMargin = 0; |
|
|
wrapMode = TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR; |
|
|
tabSize = 0; |
|
|
lastCharChunkPtr = NULL; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the first segment to consider for the line. Can't call |
|
|
* TkTextIndexToSeg for this because it won't return a segment |
|
|
* with zero size (such as the insertion cursor's mark). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
for (byteOffset = curIndex.byteIndex, segPtr = curIndex.linePtr->segPtr; |
|
|
(byteOffset > 0) && (byteOffset >= segPtr->size); |
|
|
byteOffset -= segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
/* Empty loop body. */ |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
while (segPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Every line still gets at least one chunk due to expectations |
|
|
* in the rest of the code, but we are able to skip elided portions |
|
|
* of the line quickly. |
|
|
* If current chunk is elided and last chunk was too, coalese |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
if (elide && (lastChunkPtr != NULL) |
|
|
&& (lastChunkPtr->displayProc == NULL /*ElideDisplayProc*/)) { |
|
|
if ((elidesize = segPtr->size - byteOffset) > 0) { |
|
|
curIndex.byteIndex += elidesize; |
|
|
lastChunkPtr->numBytes += elidesize; |
|
|
breakByteOffset = lastChunkPtr->breakIndex = lastChunkPtr->numBytes; |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If have we have a tag toggle, there is a chance |
|
|
* that invisibility state changed, so bail out |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
} else if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) |
|
|
|| (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) { |
|
|
if (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elideString != NULL) { |
|
|
elide = (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) |
|
|
^ segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elide; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
byteOffset = 0; |
|
|
segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
if (segPtr == NULL && chunkPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
ckfree((char *) chunkPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (segPtr->typePtr->layoutProc == NULL) { |
|
|
segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
byteOffset = 0; |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (chunkPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
chunkPtr = (TkTextDispChunk *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextDispChunk)); |
|
|
chunkPtr->nextPtr = NULL; |
|
|
} |
|
|
chunkPtr->stylePtr = GetStyle(textPtr, &curIndex); |
|
|
elide = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->elide; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Save style information such as justification and indentation, |
|
|
* up until the first character is encountered, then retain that |
|
|
* information for the rest of the line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (noCharsYet) { |
|
|
tabArrayPtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tabArrayPtr; |
|
|
justify = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->justify; |
|
|
rMargin = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->rMargin; |
|
|
wrapMode = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->wrapMode; |
|
|
x = ((curIndex.byteIndex == 0) |
|
|
? chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->lMargin1 |
|
|
: chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->lMargin2); |
|
|
if (wrapMode == TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE) { |
|
|
maxX = -1; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
maxX = textPtr->dInfoPtr->maxX - textPtr->dInfoPtr->x |
|
|
- rMargin; |
|
|
if (maxX < x) { |
|
|
maxX = x; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* See if there is a tab in the current chunk; if so, only |
|
|
* layout characters up to (and including) the tab. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
gotTab = 0; |
|
|
maxBytes = segPtr->size - byteOffset; |
|
|
if (!elide && justify == TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT) { |
|
|
if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) { |
|
|
char *p; |
|
|
|
|
|
for (p = segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset; *p != 0; p++) { |
|
|
if (*p == '\t') { |
|
|
maxBytes = (p + 1 - segPtr->body.chars) - byteOffset; |
|
|
gotTab = 1; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
chunkPtr->x = x; |
|
|
if (elide && maxBytes) { |
|
|
/* don't free style here, as other code expects to be able to do that */ |
|
|
/*breakByteOffset =*/ chunkPtr->breakIndex = chunkPtr->numBytes = maxBytes; |
|
|
chunkPtr->width = 0; |
|
|
chunkPtr->minAscent = chunkPtr->minDescent = chunkPtr->minHeight = 0; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* would just like to point to canonical empty chunk */ |
|
|
chunkPtr->displayProc = (Tk_ChunkDisplayProc *) NULL; |
|
|
chunkPtr->undisplayProc = (Tk_ChunkUndisplayProc *) NULL; |
|
|
chunkPtr->measureProc = ElideMeasureProc; |
|
|
chunkPtr->bboxProc = ElideBboxProc; |
|
|
|
|
|
code = 1; |
|
|
} else |
|
|
code = (*segPtr->typePtr->layoutProc)(textPtr, &curIndex, segPtr, |
|
|
byteOffset, maxX-tabSize, maxBytes, noCharsYet, wrapMode, |
|
|
chunkPtr); |
|
|
if (code <= 0) { |
|
|
FreeStyle(textPtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
|
|
if (code < 0) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* This segment doesn't wish to display itself (e.g. most |
|
|
* marks). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
byteOffset = 0; |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* No characters from this segment fit in the window: this |
|
|
* means we're at the end of the display line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (chunkPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
ckfree((char *) chunkPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->numBytes > 0) { |
|
|
noCharsYet = 0; |
|
|
lastCharChunkPtr = chunkPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (lastChunkPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
dlPtr->chunkPtr = chunkPtr; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
lastChunkPtr->nextPtr = chunkPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
lastChunkPtr = chunkPtr; |
|
|
x += chunkPtr->width; |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->breakIndex > 0) { |
|
|
breakByteOffset = chunkPtr->breakIndex; |
|
|
breakIndex = curIndex; |
|
|
breakChunkPtr = chunkPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->numBytes != maxBytes) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If we're at a new tab, adjust the layout for all the chunks |
|
|
* pertaining to the previous tab. Also adjust the amount of |
|
|
* space left in the line to account for space that will be eaten |
|
|
* up by the tab. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (gotTab) { |
|
|
if (tabIndex >= 0) { |
|
|
AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, tabIndex, tabChunkPtr); |
|
|
x = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width; |
|
|
} |
|
|
tabIndex++; |
|
|
tabChunkPtr = chunkPtr; |
|
|
tabSize = SizeOfTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, tabIndex, x, maxX); |
|
|
if ((maxX >= 0) && (tabSize >= maxX - x)) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
curIndex.byteIndex += chunkPtr->numBytes; |
|
|
byteOffset += chunkPtr->numBytes; |
|
|
if (byteOffset >= segPtr->size) { |
|
|
byteOffset = 0; |
|
|
segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
chunkPtr = NULL; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (noCharsYet) { |
|
|
panic("LayoutDLine couldn't place any characters on a line"); |
|
|
} |
|
|
wholeLine = (segPtr == NULL); |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* We're at the end of the display line. Throw away everything |
|
|
* after the most recent word break, if there is one; this may |
|
|
* potentially require the last chunk to be layed out again. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (breakChunkPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* This code makes sure that we don't accidentally display |
|
|
* chunks with no characters at the end of the line (such as |
|
|
* the insertion cursor). These chunks belong on the next |
|
|
* line. So, throw away everything after the last chunk that |
|
|
* has characters in it. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
breakChunkPtr = lastCharChunkPtr; |
|
|
breakByteOffset = breakChunkPtr->numBytes; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((breakChunkPtr != NULL) && ((lastChunkPtr != breakChunkPtr) |
|
|
|| (breakByteOffset != lastChunkPtr->numBytes))) { |
|
|
while (1) { |
|
|
chunkPtr = breakChunkPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
if (chunkPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
FreeStyle(textPtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
|
|
breakChunkPtr->nextPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
(*chunkPtr->undisplayProc)(textPtr, chunkPtr); |
|
|
ckfree((char *) chunkPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (breakByteOffset != breakChunkPtr->numBytes) { |
|
|
(*breakChunkPtr->undisplayProc)(textPtr, breakChunkPtr); |
|
|
segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&breakIndex, &byteOffset); |
|
|
(*segPtr->typePtr->layoutProc)(textPtr, &breakIndex, |
|
|
segPtr, byteOffset, maxX, breakByteOffset, 0, |
|
|
wrapMode, breakChunkPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
lastChunkPtr = breakChunkPtr; |
|
|
wholeLine = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Make tab adjustments for the last tab stop, if there is one. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((tabIndex >= 0) && (tabChunkPtr != NULL)) { |
|
|
AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, tabIndex, tabChunkPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Make one more pass over the line to recompute various things |
|
|
* like its height, length, and total number of bytes. Also |
|
|
* modify the x-locations of chunks to reflect justification. |
|
|
* If we're not wrapping, I'm not sure what is the best way to |
|
|
* handle left and center justification: should the total length, |
|
|
* for purposes of justification, be (a) the window width, (b) |
|
|
* the length of the longest line in the window, or (c) the length |
|
|
* of the longest line in the text? (c) isn't available, (b) seems |
|
|
* weird, since it can change with vertical scrolling, so (a) is |
|
|
* what is implemented below. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (wrapMode == TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE) { |
|
|
maxX = textPtr->dInfoPtr->maxX - textPtr->dInfoPtr->x - rMargin; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dlPtr->length = lastChunkPtr->x + lastChunkPtr->width; |
|
|
if (justify == TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT) { |
|
|
jIndent = 0; |
|
|
} else if (justify == TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT) { |
|
|
jIndent = maxX - dlPtr->length; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
jIndent = (maxX - dlPtr->length)/2; |
|
|
} |
|
|
ascent = descent = 0; |
|
|
for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; chunkPtr != NULL; |
|
|
chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
chunkPtr->x += jIndent; |
|
|
dlPtr->byteCount += chunkPtr->numBytes; |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->minAscent > ascent) { |
|
|
ascent = chunkPtr->minAscent; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->minDescent > descent) { |
|
|
descent = chunkPtr->minDescent; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->minHeight > dlPtr->height) { |
|
|
dlPtr->height = chunkPtr->minHeight; |
|
|
} |
|
|
sValuePtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr; |
|
|
if ((sValuePtr->borderWidth > 0) |
|
|
&& (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)) { |
|
|
dlPtr->flags |= HAS_3D_BORDER; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (dlPtr->height < (ascent + descent)) { |
|
|
dlPtr->height = ascent + descent; |
|
|
dlPtr->baseline = ascent; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
dlPtr->baseline = ascent + (dlPtr->height - ascent - descent)/2; |
|
|
} |
|
|
sValuePtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr; |
|
|
if (dlPtr->index.byteIndex == 0) { |
|
|
dlPtr->spaceAbove = sValuePtr->spacing1; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
dlPtr->spaceAbove = sValuePtr->spacing2 - sValuePtr->spacing2/2; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (wholeLine) { |
|
|
dlPtr->spaceBelow = sValuePtr->spacing3; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
dlPtr->spaceBelow = sValuePtr->spacing2/2; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dlPtr->height += dlPtr->spaceAbove + dlPtr->spaceBelow; |
|
|
dlPtr->baseline += dlPtr->spaceAbove; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Recompute line length: may have changed because of justification. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
dlPtr->length = lastChunkPtr->x + lastChunkPtr->width; |
|
|
return dlPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* UpdateDisplayInfo -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is invoked to recompute some or all of the |
|
|
* DLine structures for a text widget. At the time it is called |
|
|
* the DLine structures still left in the widget are guaranteed |
|
|
* to be correct except that (a) the y-coordinates aren't |
|
|
* necessarily correct, (b) there may be missing structures |
|
|
* (the DLine structures get removed as soon as they are potentially |
|
|
* out-of-date), and (c) DLine structures that don't start at the |
|
|
* beginning of a line may be incorrect if previous information in |
|
|
* the same line changed size in a way that moved a line boundary |
|
|
* (DLines for any info that changed will have been deleted, but |
|
|
* not DLines for unchanged info in the same text line). |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Upon return, the DLine information for textPtr correctly reflects |
|
|
* the positions where characters will be displayed. However, this |
|
|
* procedure doesn't actually bring the display up-to-date. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Text widget to update. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
register TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
register DLine *dlPtr, *prevPtr; |
|
|
TkTextIndex index; |
|
|
TkTextLine *lastLinePtr; |
|
|
int y, maxY, pixelOffset, maxOffset; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE)) { |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags &= ~DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Delete any DLines that are now above the top of the window. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
index = textPtr->topIndex; |
|
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, &index); |
|
|
if ((dlPtr != NULL) && (dlPtr != dInfoPtr->dLinePtr)) { |
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, dlPtr, 1); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* Scan through the contents of the window from top to bottom, |
|
|
* recomputing information for lines that are missing. |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
lastLinePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree, |
|
|
TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree)); |
|
|
dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
|
|
prevPtr = NULL; |
|
|
y = dInfoPtr->y; |
|
|
maxY = dInfoPtr->maxY; |
|
|
while (1) { |
|
|
register DLine *newPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (index.linePtr == lastLinePtr) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* There are three possibilities right now: |
|
|
* (a) the next DLine (dlPtr) corresponds exactly to the next |
|
|
* information we want to display: just use it as-is. |
|
|
* (b) the next DLine corresponds to a different line, or to |
|
|
* a segment that will be coming later in the same line: |
|
|
* leave this DLine alone in the hopes that we'll be able |
|
|
* to use it later, then create a new DLine in front of |
|
|
* it. |
|
|
* (c) the next DLine corresponds to a segment in the line we |
|
|
* want, but it's a segment that has already been processed |
|
|
* or will never be processed. Delete the DLine and try |
|
|
* again. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* One other twist on all this. It's possible for 3D borders |
|
|
* to interact between lines (see DisplayLineBackground) so if |
|
|
* a line is relayed out and has styles with 3D borders, its |
|
|
* neighbors have to be redrawn if they have 3D borders too, |
|
|
* since the interactions could have changed (the neighbors |
|
|
* don't have to be relayed out, just redrawn). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((dlPtr == NULL) || (dlPtr->index.linePtr != index.linePtr)) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Case (b) -- must make new DLine. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
makeNewDLine: |
|
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
|
|
char string[TK_POS_CHARS]; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Debugging is enabled, so keep a log of all the lines |
|
|
* that were re-layed out. The test suite uses this |
|
|
* information. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
TkTextPrintIndex(&index, string); |
|
|
Tcl_SetVar2(textPtr->interp, "tk_textRelayout", (char *) NULL, |
|
|
string, |
|
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); |
|
|
} |
|
|
newPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index); |
|
|
if (prevPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = newPtr; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
prevPtr->nextPtr = newPtr; |
|
|
if (prevPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER) { |
|
|
prevPtr->oldY = -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
newPtr->nextPtr = dlPtr; |
|
|
dlPtr = newPtr; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* DlPtr refers to the line we want. Next check the |
|
|
* index within the line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (index.byteIndex == dlPtr->index.byteIndex) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Case (a) -- can use existing display line as-is. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER) && (prevPtr != NULL) |
|
|
&& (prevPtr->flags & (NEW_LAYOUT))) { |
|
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
goto lineOK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (index.byteIndex < dlPtr->index.byteIndex) { |
|
|
goto makeNewDLine; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Case (c) -- dlPtr is useless. Discard it and start |
|
|
* again with the next display line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
newPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, newPtr, 0); |
|
|
dlPtr = newPtr; |
|
|
if (prevPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
prevPtr->nextPtr = newPtr; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = newPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Advance to the start of the next line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
lineOK: |
|
|
dlPtr->y = y; |
|
|
y += dlPtr->height; |
|
|
TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index); |
|
|
prevPtr = dlPtr; |
|
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If we switched text lines, delete any DLines left for the |
|
|
* old text line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (index.linePtr != prevPtr->index.linePtr) { |
|
|
register DLine *nextPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
nextPtr = dlPtr; |
|
|
while ((nextPtr != NULL) |
|
|
&& (nextPtr->index.linePtr == prevPtr->index.linePtr)) { |
|
|
nextPtr = nextPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (nextPtr != dlPtr) { |
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, nextPtr, 0); |
|
|
prevPtr->nextPtr = nextPtr; |
|
|
dlPtr = nextPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* It's important to have the following check here rather than in |
|
|
* the while statement for the loop, so that there's always at least |
|
|
* one DLine generated, regardless of how small the window is. This |
|
|
* keeps a lot of other code from breaking. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (y >= maxY) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Delete any DLine structures that don't fit on the screen. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 1); |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* If there is extra space at the bottom of the window (because |
|
|
* we've hit the end of the text), then bring in more lines at |
|
|
* the top of the window, if there are any, to fill in the view. |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (y < maxY) { |
|
|
int lineNum, spaceLeft, bytesToCount; |
|
|
DLine *lowestPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Layout an entire text line (potentially > 1 display line), |
|
|
* then link in as many display lines as fit without moving |
|
|
* the bottom line out of the window. Repeat this until |
|
|
* all the extra space has been used up or we've reached the |
|
|
* beginning of the text. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
spaceLeft = maxY - y; |
|
|
lineNum = TkBTreeLineIndex(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->index.linePtr); |
|
|
bytesToCount = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->index.byteIndex; |
|
|
if (bytesToCount == 0) { |
|
|
bytesToCount = INT_MAX; |
|
|
lineNum--; |
|
|
} |
|
|
for ( ; (lineNum >= 0) && (spaceLeft > 0); lineNum--) { |
|
|
index.linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree, lineNum); |
|
|
index.byteIndex = 0; |
|
|
lowestPtr = NULL; |
|
|
|
|
|
do { |
|
|
dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index); |
|
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = lowestPtr; |
|
|
lowestPtr = dlPtr; |
|
|
if (dlPtr->length == 0 && dlPtr->height == 0) { bytesToCount--; break; } /* elide */ |
|
|
TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index); |
|
|
bytesToCount -= dlPtr->byteCount; |
|
|
} while ((bytesToCount > 0) |
|
|
&& (index.linePtr == lowestPtr->index.linePtr)); |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Scan through the display lines from the bottom one up to |
|
|
* the top one. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
while (lowestPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
dlPtr = lowestPtr; |
|
|
spaceLeft -= dlPtr->height; |
|
|
if (spaceLeft < 0) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
lowestPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = dlPtr; |
|
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
|
|
char string[TK_POS_CHARS]; |
|
|
|
|
|
TkTextPrintIndex(&dlPtr->index, string); |
|
|
Tcl_SetVar2(textPtr->interp, "tk_textRelayout", |
|
|
(char *) NULL, string, |
|
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, lowestPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0); |
|
|
bytesToCount = INT_MAX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Now we're all done except that the y-coordinates in all the |
|
|
* DLines are wrong and the top index for the text is wrong. |
|
|
* Update them. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
textPtr->topIndex = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->index; |
|
|
y = dInfoPtr->y; |
|
|
for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; |
|
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if (y > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
|
|
panic("Added too many new lines in UpdateDisplayInfo"); |
|
|
} |
|
|
dlPtr->y = y; |
|
|
y += dlPtr->height; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* If the old top or bottom line has scrolled elsewhere on the |
|
|
* screen, we may not be able to re-use its old contents by |
|
|
* copying bits (e.g., a beveled edge that was drawn when it was |
|
|
* at the top or bottom won't be drawn when the line is in the |
|
|
* middle and its neighbor has a matching background). Similarly, |
|
|
* if the new top or bottom line came from somewhere else on the |
|
|
* screen, we may not be able to copy the old bits. |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
|
|
if ((dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER) && !(dlPtr->flags & TOP_LINE)) { |
|
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
while (1) { |
|
|
if ((dlPtr->flags & TOP_LINE) && (dlPtr != dInfoPtr->dLinePtr) |
|
|
&& (dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER)) { |
|
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((dlPtr->flags & BOTTOM_LINE) && (dlPtr->nextPtr != NULL) |
|
|
&& (dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER)) { |
|
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (dlPtr->nextPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
if ((dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER) |
|
|
&& !(dlPtr->flags & BOTTOM_LINE)) { |
|
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dlPtr->flags &= ~TOP_LINE; |
|
|
dlPtr->flags |= BOTTOM_LINE; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dlPtr->flags &= ~(TOP_LINE|BOTTOM_LINE); |
|
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->flags |= TOP_LINE; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Arrange for scrollbars to be updated. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
textPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBARS; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* Deal with horizontal scrolling: |
|
|
* 1. If there's empty space to the right of the longest line, |
|
|
* shift the screen to the right to fill in the empty space. |
|
|
* 2. If the desired horizontal scroll position has changed, |
|
|
* force a full redisplay of all the lines in the widget. |
|
|
* 3. If the wrap mode isn't "none" then re-scroll to the base |
|
|
* position. |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
dInfoPtr->maxLength = 0; |
|
|
for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; |
|
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if (dlPtr->length > dInfoPtr->maxLength) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->maxLength = dlPtr->length; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
maxOffset = (dInfoPtr->maxLength - (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x) |
|
|
+ textPtr->charWidth - 1)/textPtr->charWidth; |
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->newByteOffset > maxOffset) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = maxOffset; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->newByteOffset < 0) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
pixelOffset = dInfoPtr->newByteOffset * textPtr->charWidth; |
|
|
if (pixelOffset != dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset = pixelOffset; |
|
|
for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; |
|
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* FreeDLines -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called to free up all of the resources |
|
|
* associated with one or more DLine structures. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Memory gets freed and various other resources are released. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr, unlink) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about overall text |
|
|
* widget. */ |
|
|
register DLine *firstPtr; /* Pointer to first DLine to free up. */ |
|
|
DLine *lastPtr; /* Pointer to DLine just after last |
|
|
* one to free (NULL means everything |
|
|
* starting with firstPtr). */ |
|
|
int unlink; /* 1 means DLines are currently linked |
|
|
* into the list rooted at |
|
|
* textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr and |
|
|
* they have to be unlinked. 0 means |
|
|
* just free without unlinking. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, *nextChunkPtr; |
|
|
register DLine *nextDLinePtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (unlink) { |
|
|
if (textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr == firstPtr) { |
|
|
textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = lastPtr; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
register DLine *prevPtr; |
|
|
for (prevPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
|
|
prevPtr->nextPtr != firstPtr; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
/* Empty loop body. */ |
|
|
} |
|
|
prevPtr->nextPtr = lastPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
while (firstPtr != lastPtr) { |
|
|
nextDLinePtr = firstPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
for (chunkPtr = firstPtr->chunkPtr; chunkPtr != NULL; |
|
|
chunkPtr = nextChunkPtr) { |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->undisplayProc != NULL) { |
|
|
(*chunkPtr->undisplayProc)(textPtr, chunkPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
FreeStyle(textPtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
|
|
nextChunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
ckfree((char *) chunkPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
ckfree((char *) firstPtr); |
|
|
firstPtr = nextDLinePtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated = 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* DisplayDLine -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is invoked to draw a single line on the |
|
|
* screen. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The line given by dlPtr is drawn at its correct position in |
|
|
* textPtr's window. Note that this is one *display* line, not |
|
|
* one *text* line. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
DisplayDLine(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Text widget in which to draw line. */ |
|
|
register DLine *dlPtr; /* Information about line to draw. */ |
|
|
DLine *prevPtr; /* Line just before one to draw, or NULL |
|
|
* if dlPtr is the top line. */ |
|
|
Pixmap pixmap; /* Pixmap to use for double-buffering. |
|
|
* Caller must make sure it's large enough |
|
|
* to hold line. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
Display *display; |
|
|
int height, x; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (dlPtr->chunkPtr == NULL) return; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* First, clear the area of the line to the background color for the |
|
|
* text widget. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
display = Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin); |
|
|
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, textPtr->border, 0, 0, |
|
|
Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin), dlPtr->height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Next, draw background information for the whole line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap); |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Make another pass through all of the chunks to redraw the |
|
|
* insertion cursor, if it is visible on this line. Must do |
|
|
* it here rather than in the foreground pass below because |
|
|
* otherwise a wide insertion cursor will obscure the character |
|
|
* to its left. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (textPtr->state == TK_STATE_NORMAL) { |
|
|
for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; (chunkPtr != NULL); |
|
|
chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
x = chunkPtr->x + dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset; |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->displayProc == TkTextInsertDisplayProc) { |
|
|
(*chunkPtr->displayProc)(chunkPtr, x, dlPtr->spaceAbove, |
|
|
dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow, |
|
|
dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, display, pixmap, |
|
|
dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Make yet another pass through all of the chunks to redraw all of |
|
|
* foreground information. Note: we have to call the displayProc |
|
|
* even for chunks that are off-screen. This is needed, for |
|
|
* example, so that embedded windows can be unmapped in this case. |
|
|
* Conve |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; (chunkPtr != NULL); |
|
|
chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->displayProc == TkTextInsertDisplayProc) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Already displayed the insertion cursor above. Don't |
|
|
* do it again here. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
x = chunkPtr->x + dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset; |
|
|
if ((x + chunkPtr->width <= 0) || (x >= dInfoPtr->maxX)) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Note: we have to call the displayProc even for chunks |
|
|
* that are off-screen. This is needed, for example, so |
|
|
* that embedded windows can be unmapped in this case. |
|
|
* Display the chunk at a coordinate that can be clearly |
|
|
* identified by the displayProc as being off-screen to |
|
|
* the left (the displayProc may not be able to tell if |
|
|
* something is off to the right). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (chunkPtr->displayProc != NULL) |
|
|
(*chunkPtr->displayProc)(chunkPtr, -chunkPtr->width, |
|
|
dlPtr->spaceAbove, |
|
|
dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow, |
|
|
dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, display, pixmap, |
|
|
dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove); |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
/* don't call if elide. This tax ok since not very many visible DLine's in |
|
|
an area, but potentially many elide ones */ |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->displayProc != NULL) |
|
|
(*chunkPtr->displayProc)(chunkPtr, x, dlPtr->spaceAbove, |
|
|
dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow, |
|
|
dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, display, pixmap, |
|
|
dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated) { |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Copy the pixmap onto the screen. If this is the last line on |
|
|
* the screen then copy a piece of the line, so that it doesn't |
|
|
* overflow into the border area. Another special trick: copy the |
|
|
* padding area to the left of the line; this is because the |
|
|
* insertion cursor sometimes overflows onto that area and we want |
|
|
* to get as much of the cursor as possible. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
height = dlPtr->height; |
|
|
if ((height + dlPtr->y) > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
|
|
height = dInfoPtr->maxY - dlPtr->y; |
|
|
} |
|
|
XCopyArea(display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), dInfoPtr->copyGC, |
|
|
dInfoPtr->x, 0, (unsigned) (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x), |
|
|
(unsigned) height, dInfoPtr->x, dlPtr->y); |
|
|
linesRedrawn++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* DisplayLineBackground -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called to fill in the background for |
|
|
* a display line. It draws 3D borders cleverly so that |
|
|
* adjacent chunks with the same style (whether on the same |
|
|
* line or different lines) have a single 3D border around |
|
|
* the whole region. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* There is no return value. Pixmap is filled in with background |
|
|
* information for dlPtr. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Text widget containing line. */ |
|
|
register DLine *dlPtr; /* Information about line to draw. */ |
|
|
DLine *prevPtr; /* Line just above dlPtr, or NULL if dlPtr |
|
|
* is the top-most line in the window. */ |
|
|
Pixmap pixmap; /* Pixmap to use for double-buffering. |
|
|
* Caller must make sure it's large enough |
|
|
* to hold line. Caller must also have |
|
|
* filled it with the background color for |
|
|
* the widget. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Pointer to chunk in the current line. */ |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr2; /* Pointer to chunk in the line above or |
|
|
* below the current one. NULL if we're to |
|
|
* the left of or to the right of the chunks |
|
|
* in the line. */ |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *nextPtr2; /* Next chunk after chunkPtr2 (it's not the |
|
|
* same as chunkPtr2->nextPtr in the case |
|
|
* where chunkPtr2 is NULL because the line |
|
|
* is indented). */ |
|
|
int leftX; /* The left edge of the region we're |
|
|
* currently working on. */ |
|
|
int leftXIn; /* 1 means beveled edge at leftX slopes right |
|
|
* as it goes down, 0 means it slopes left |
|
|
* as it goes down. */ |
|
|
int rightX; /* Right edge of chunkPtr. */ |
|
|
int rightX2; /* Right edge of chunkPtr2. */ |
|
|
int matchLeft; /* Does the style of this line match that |
|
|
* of its neighbor just to the left of |
|
|
* the current x coordinate? */ |
|
|
int matchRight; /* Does line's style match its neighbor |
|
|
* just to the right of the current x-coord? */ |
|
|
int minX, maxX, xOffset; |
|
|
StyleValues *sValuePtr; |
|
|
Display *display; |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Pass 1: scan through dlPtr from left to right. For each range of |
|
|
* chunks with the same style, draw the main background for the style |
|
|
* plus the vertical parts of the 3D borders (the left and right |
|
|
* edges). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
display = Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin); |
|
|
minX = dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset; |
|
|
xOffset = dInfoPtr->x - minX; |
|
|
maxX = minX + dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x; |
|
|
chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Note A: in the following statement, and a few others later in |
|
|
* this file marked with "See Note A above", the right side of the |
|
|
* assignment was replaced with 0 on 6/18/97. This has the effect |
|
|
* of highlighting the empty space to the left of a line whenever |
|
|
* the leftmost character of the line is highlighted. This way, |
|
|
* multi-line highlights always line up along their left edges. |
|
|
* However, this may look funny in the case where a single word is |
|
|
* highlighted. To undo the change, replace "leftX = 0" with "leftX |
|
|
* = chunkPtr->x" and "rightX2 = 0" with "rightX2 = nextPtr2->x" |
|
|
* here and at all the marked points below. This restores the old |
|
|
* behavior where empty space to the left of a line is not |
|
|
* highlighted, leaving a ragged left edge for multi-line |
|
|
* highlights. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
leftX = 0; |
|
|
for (; leftX < maxX; chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr != NULL) |
|
|
&& SAME_BACKGROUND(chunkPtr->nextPtr->stylePtr, |
|
|
chunkPtr->stylePtr)) { |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
sValuePtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr; |
|
|
rightX = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width; |
|
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) && (rightX < maxX)) { |
|
|
rightX = maxX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->stylePtr->bgGC != None) { |
|
|
XFillRectangle(display, pixmap, chunkPtr->stylePtr->bgGC, |
|
|
leftX + xOffset, 0, (unsigned int) (rightX - leftX), |
|
|
(unsigned int) dlPtr->height); |
|
|
if (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { |
|
|
Tk_3DVerticalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
|
|
leftX + xOffset, 0, sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
|
|
dlPtr->height, 1, sValuePtr->relief); |
|
|
Tk_3DVerticalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
|
|
rightX - sValuePtr->borderWidth + xOffset, |
|
|
0, sValuePtr->borderWidth, dlPtr->height, 0, |
|
|
sValuePtr->relief); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
leftX = rightX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Pass 2: draw the horizontal bevels along the top of the line. To |
|
|
* do this, scan through dlPtr from left to right while simultaneously |
|
|
* scanning through the line just above dlPtr. ChunkPtr2 and nextPtr2 |
|
|
* refer to two adjacent chunks in the line above. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; |
|
|
leftX = 0; /* See Note A above. */ |
|
|
leftXIn = 1; |
|
|
rightX = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width; |
|
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) && (rightX < maxX)) { |
|
|
rightX = maxX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
chunkPtr2 = NULL; |
|
|
if (prevPtr != NULL && prevPtr->chunkPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the chunk in the previous line that covers leftX. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
nextPtr2 = prevPtr->chunkPtr; |
|
|
rightX2 = 0; /* See Note A above. */ |
|
|
while (rightX2 <= leftX) { |
|
|
chunkPtr2 = nextPtr2; |
|
|
if (chunkPtr2 == NULL) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
nextPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr; |
|
|
rightX2 = chunkPtr2->x + chunkPtr2->width; |
|
|
if (nextPtr2 == NULL) { |
|
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
nextPtr2 = NULL; |
|
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
while (leftX < maxX) { |
|
|
matchLeft = (chunkPtr2 != NULL) |
|
|
&& SAME_BACKGROUND(chunkPtr2->stylePtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
|
|
sValuePtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr; |
|
|
if (rightX <= rightX2) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The chunk in our line is about to end. If its style |
|
|
* changes then draw the bevel for the current style. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) |
|
|
|| !SAME_BACKGROUND(chunkPtr->stylePtr, |
|
|
chunkPtr->nextPtr->stylePtr)) { |
|
|
if (!matchLeft && (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)) { |
|
|
Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, |
|
|
sValuePtr->border, leftX + xOffset, 0, |
|
|
rightX - leftX, sValuePtr->borderWidth, leftXIn, |
|
|
1, 1, sValuePtr->relief); |
|
|
} |
|
|
leftX = rightX; |
|
|
leftXIn = 1; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If the chunk in the line above is also ending at |
|
|
* the same point then advance to the next chunk in |
|
|
* that line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((rightX == rightX2) && (chunkPtr2 != NULL)) { |
|
|
goto nextChunk2; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
if (chunkPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
rightX = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width; |
|
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) && (rightX < maxX)) { |
|
|
rightX = maxX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The chunk in the line above is ending at an x-position where |
|
|
* there is no change in the style of the current line. If the |
|
|
* style above matches the current line on one side of the change |
|
|
* but not on the other, we have to draw an L-shaped piece of |
|
|
* bevel. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
matchRight = (nextPtr2 != NULL) |
|
|
&& SAME_BACKGROUND(nextPtr2->stylePtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
|
|
if (matchLeft && !matchRight) { |
|
|
if (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { |
|
|
Tk_3DVerticalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
|
|
rightX2 - sValuePtr->borderWidth + xOffset, 0, |
|
|
sValuePtr->borderWidth, sValuePtr->borderWidth, 0, |
|
|
sValuePtr->relief); |
|
|
} |
|
|
leftX = rightX2 - sValuePtr->borderWidth; |
|
|
leftXIn = 0; |
|
|
} else if (!matchLeft && matchRight |
|
|
&& (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)) { |
|
|
Tk_3DVerticalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
|
|
rightX2 + xOffset, 0, sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
|
|
sValuePtr->borderWidth, 1, sValuePtr->relief); |
|
|
Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
|
|
leftX + xOffset, 0, rightX2 + sValuePtr->borderWidth -leftX, |
|
|
sValuePtr->borderWidth, leftXIn, 0, 1, |
|
|
sValuePtr->relief); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
nextChunk2: |
|
|
chunkPtr2 = nextPtr2; |
|
|
if (chunkPtr2 == NULL) { |
|
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
nextPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr; |
|
|
rightX2 = chunkPtr2->x + chunkPtr2->width; |
|
|
if (nextPtr2 == NULL) { |
|
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Pass 3: draw the horizontal bevels along the bottom of the line. |
|
|
* This uses the same approach as pass 2. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; |
|
|
leftX = 0; /* See Note A above. */ |
|
|
leftXIn = 0; |
|
|
rightX = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width; |
|
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) && (rightX < maxX)) { |
|
|
rightX = maxX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
chunkPtr2 = NULL; |
|
|
if (dlPtr->nextPtr != NULL && dlPtr->nextPtr->chunkPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the chunk in the previous line that covers leftX. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
nextPtr2 = dlPtr->nextPtr->chunkPtr; |
|
|
rightX2 = 0; /* See Note A above. */ |
|
|
while (rightX2 <= leftX) { |
|
|
chunkPtr2 = nextPtr2; |
|
|
if (chunkPtr2 == NULL) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
nextPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr; |
|
|
rightX2 = chunkPtr2->x + chunkPtr2->width; |
|
|
if (nextPtr2 == NULL) { |
|
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
nextPtr2 = NULL; |
|
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
while (leftX < maxX) { |
|
|
matchLeft = (chunkPtr2 != NULL) |
|
|
&& SAME_BACKGROUND(chunkPtr2->stylePtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
|
|
sValuePtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr; |
|
|
if (rightX <= rightX2) { |
|
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) |
|
|
|| !SAME_BACKGROUND(chunkPtr->stylePtr, |
|
|
chunkPtr->nextPtr->stylePtr)) { |
|
|
if (!matchLeft && (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)) { |
|
|
Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, |
|
|
sValuePtr->border, leftX + xOffset, |
|
|
dlPtr->height - sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
|
|
rightX - leftX, sValuePtr->borderWidth, leftXIn, |
|
|
0, 0, sValuePtr->relief); |
|
|
} |
|
|
leftX = rightX; |
|
|
leftXIn = 0; |
|
|
if ((rightX == rightX2) && (chunkPtr2 != NULL)) { |
|
|
goto nextChunk2b; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
if (chunkPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
rightX = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width; |
|
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) && (rightX < maxX)) { |
|
|
rightX = maxX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
matchRight = (nextPtr2 != NULL) |
|
|
&& SAME_BACKGROUND(nextPtr2->stylePtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
|
|
if (matchLeft && !matchRight) { |
|
|
if (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { |
|
|
Tk_3DVerticalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
|
|
rightX2 - sValuePtr->borderWidth + xOffset, |
|
|
dlPtr->height - sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
|
|
sValuePtr->borderWidth, sValuePtr->borderWidth, 0, |
|
|
sValuePtr->relief); |
|
|
} |
|
|
leftX = rightX2 - sValuePtr->borderWidth; |
|
|
leftXIn = 1; |
|
|
} else if (!matchLeft && matchRight |
|
|
&& (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)) { |
|
|
Tk_3DVerticalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
|
|
rightX2 + xOffset, dlPtr->height - sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
|
|
sValuePtr->borderWidth, sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
|
|
1, sValuePtr->relief); |
|
|
Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
|
|
leftX + xOffset, dlPtr->height - sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
|
|
rightX2 + sValuePtr->borderWidth - leftX, |
|
|
sValuePtr->borderWidth, leftXIn, 1, 0, sValuePtr->relief); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
nextChunk2b: |
|
|
chunkPtr2 = nextPtr2; |
|
|
if (chunkPtr2 == NULL) { |
|
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
nextPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr; |
|
|
rightX2 = chunkPtr2->x + chunkPtr2->width; |
|
|
if (nextPtr2 == NULL) { |
|
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* DisplayText -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is invoked as a when-idle handler to update the |
|
|
* display. It only redisplays the parts of the text widget that |
|
|
* are out of date. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Information is redrawn on the screen. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
DisplayText(clientData) |
|
|
ClientData clientData; /* Information about widget. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData; |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin; |
|
|
register DLine *dlPtr; |
|
|
DLine *prevPtr; |
|
|
Pixmap pixmap; |
|
|
int maxHeight, borders; |
|
|
int bottomY = 0; /* Initialization needed only to stop |
|
|
* compiler warnings. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) { |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
interp = textPtr->interp; |
|
|
Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp); |
|
|
|
|
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
|
|
Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "tk_textRelayout", (char *) NULL, "", |
|
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) { |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
goto end; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (!Tk_IsMapped(textPtr->tkwin) || (dInfoPtr->maxX <= dInfoPtr->x) |
|
|
|| (dInfoPtr->maxY <= dInfoPtr->y)) { |
|
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; |
|
|
goto doScrollbars; |
|
|
} |
|
|
numRedisplays++; |
|
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
|
|
Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "tk_textRedraw", (char *) NULL, "", |
|
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) { |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
goto end; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Choose a new current item if that is needed (this could cause |
|
|
* event handlers to be invoked, hence the preserve/release calls |
|
|
* and the loop, since the handlers could conceivably necessitate |
|
|
* yet another current item calculation). The tkwin check is because |
|
|
* the whole window could go away in the Tcl_Release call. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
while (dInfoPtr->flags & REPICK_NEEDED) { |
|
|
Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags &= ~REPICK_NEEDED; |
|
|
TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, &textPtr->pickEvent); |
|
|
tkwin = textPtr->tkwin; |
|
|
Tcl_Release((ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
if (tkwin == NULL) { |
|
|
goto end; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* First recompute what's supposed to be displayed. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
|
|
dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated = 0; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* See if it's possible to bring some parts of the screen up-to-date |
|
|
* by scrolling (copying from other parts of the screen). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
register DLine *dlPtr2; |
|
|
int offset, height, y, oldY; |
|
|
TkRegion damageRgn; |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((dlPtr->oldY == -1) || (dlPtr->y == dlPtr->oldY) |
|
|
|| ((dlPtr->oldY + dlPtr->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY)) { |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* This line is already drawn somewhere in the window so it only |
|
|
* needs to be copied to its new location. See if there's a group |
|
|
* of lines that can all be copied together. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
offset = dlPtr->y - dlPtr->oldY; |
|
|
height = dlPtr->height; |
|
|
y = dlPtr->y; |
|
|
for (dlPtr2 = dlPtr->nextPtr; dlPtr2 != NULL; |
|
|
dlPtr2 = dlPtr2->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if ((dlPtr2->oldY == -1) |
|
|
|| ((dlPtr2->oldY + offset) != dlPtr2->y) |
|
|
|| ((dlPtr2->oldY + dlPtr2->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY)) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
height += dlPtr2->height; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Reduce the height of the area being copied if necessary to |
|
|
* avoid overwriting the border area. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((y + height) > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
|
|
height = dInfoPtr->maxY -y; |
|
|
} |
|
|
oldY = dlPtr->oldY; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Update the lines we are going to scroll to show that they |
|
|
* have been copied. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
while (1) { |
|
|
dlPtr->oldY = dlPtr->y; |
|
|
if (dlPtr->nextPtr == dlPtr2) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Scan through the lines following the copied ones to see if |
|
|
* we are going to overwrite them with the copy operation. |
|
|
* If so, mark them for redisplay. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
for ( ; dlPtr2 != NULL; dlPtr2 = dlPtr2->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if ((dlPtr2->oldY != -1) |
|
|
&& ((dlPtr2->oldY + dlPtr2->height) > y) |
|
|
&& (dlPtr2->oldY < (y + height))) { |
|
|
dlPtr2->oldY = -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Now scroll the lines. This may generate damage which we |
|
|
* handle by calling TextInvalidateRegion to mark the display |
|
|
* blocks as stale. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
damageRgn = TkCreateRegion(); |
|
|
if (TkScrollWindow(textPtr->tkwin, dInfoPtr->scrollGC, |
|
|
dInfoPtr->x, oldY, |
|
|
(dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x), height, |
|
|
0, y - oldY, damageRgn)) { |
|
|
TextInvalidateRegion(textPtr, damageRgn); |
|
|
} |
|
|
numCopies++; |
|
|
TkDestroyRegion(damageRgn); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Clear the REDRAW_PENDING flag here. This is actually pretty |
|
|
* tricky. We want to wait until *after* doing the scrolling, |
|
|
* since that could generate more areas to redraw and don't |
|
|
* want to reschedule a redisplay for them. On the other hand, |
|
|
* we can't wait until after all the redisplaying, because the |
|
|
* act of redisplaying could actually generate more redisplays |
|
|
* (e.g. in the case of a nested window with event bindings triggered |
|
|
* by redisplay). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Redraw the borders if that's needed. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_BORDERS) { |
|
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
|
|
Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "tk_textRedraw", (char *) NULL, "borders", |
|
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) { |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
goto end; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
Tk_Draw3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), |
|
|
textPtr->border, textPtr->highlightWidth, |
|
|
textPtr->highlightWidth, |
|
|
Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - 2*textPtr->highlightWidth, |
|
|
Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - 2*textPtr->highlightWidth, |
|
|
textPtr->borderWidth, textPtr->relief); |
|
|
if (textPtr->highlightWidth != 0) { |
|
|
GC fgGC, bgGC; |
|
|
|
|
|
bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(textPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, |
|
|
Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin)); |
|
|
if (textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { |
|
|
fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(textPtr->highlightColorPtr, |
|
|
Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin)); |
|
|
TkpDrawHighlightBorder(textPtr->tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, |
|
|
textPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin)); |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
TkpDrawHighlightBorder(textPtr->tkwin, bgGC, bgGC, |
|
|
textPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin)); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
borders = textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->highlightWidth; |
|
|
if (textPtr->padY > 0) { |
|
|
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), |
|
|
textPtr->border, borders, borders, |
|
|
Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - 2*borders, textPtr->padY, |
|
|
0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); |
|
|
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), |
|
|
textPtr->border, borders, |
|
|
Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - borders - textPtr->padY, |
|
|
Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - 2*borders, |
|
|
textPtr->padY, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (textPtr->padX > 0) { |
|
|
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), |
|
|
textPtr->border, borders, borders + textPtr->padY, |
|
|
textPtr->padX, |
|
|
Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - 2*borders -2*textPtr->padY, |
|
|
0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); |
|
|
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), |
|
|
textPtr->border, |
|
|
Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - borders - textPtr->padX, |
|
|
borders + textPtr->padY, textPtr->padX, |
|
|
Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - 2*borders -2*textPtr->padY, |
|
|
0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_BORDERS; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Now we have to redraw the lines that couldn't be updated by |
|
|
* scrolling. First, compute the height of the largest line and |
|
|
* allocate an off-screen pixmap to use for double-buffered |
|
|
* displays. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
maxHeight = -1; |
|
|
for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; |
|
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if ((dlPtr->height > maxHeight) && (dlPtr->oldY != dlPtr->y)) { |
|
|
maxHeight = dlPtr->height; |
|
|
} |
|
|
bottomY = dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (maxHeight > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
|
|
maxHeight = dInfoPtr->maxY; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (maxHeight > 0) { |
|
|
pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin), |
|
|
Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin), |
|
|
maxHeight, Tk_Depth(textPtr->tkwin)); |
|
|
for (prevPtr = NULL, dlPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
|
|
(dlPtr != NULL) && (dlPtr->y < dInfoPtr->maxY); |
|
|
prevPtr = dlPtr, dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if (dlPtr->chunkPtr == NULL) continue; |
|
|
if (dlPtr->oldY != dlPtr->y) { |
|
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
|
|
char string[TK_POS_CHARS]; |
|
|
TkTextPrintIndex(&dlPtr->index, string); |
|
|
Tcl_SetVar2(textPtr->interp, "tk_textRedraw", |
|
|
(char *) NULL, string, |
|
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); |
|
|
} |
|
|
DisplayDLine(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap); |
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated) { |
|
|
Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin), pixmap); |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dlPtr->oldY = dlPtr->y; |
|
|
dlPtr->flags &= ~NEW_LAYOUT; |
|
|
} |
|
|
/*prevPtr = dlPtr;*/ |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin), pixmap); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* See if we need to refresh the part of the window below the |
|
|
* last line of text (if there is any such area). Refresh the |
|
|
* padding area on the left too, since the insertion cursor might |
|
|
* have been displayed there previously). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->topOfEof > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->topOfEof = dInfoPtr->maxY; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (bottomY < dInfoPtr->topOfEof) { |
|
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
|
|
Tcl_SetVar2(textPtr->interp, "tk_textRedraw", |
|
|
(char *) NULL, "eof", |
|
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) { |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
goto end; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), |
|
|
textPtr->border, dInfoPtr->x - textPtr->padX, bottomY, |
|
|
dInfoPtr->maxX - (dInfoPtr->x - textPtr->padX), |
|
|
dInfoPtr->topOfEof-bottomY, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->topOfEof = bottomY; |
|
|
|
|
|
doScrollbars: |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Update the vertical scrollbar, if there is one. Note: it's |
|
|
* important to clear REDRAW_PENDING here, just in case the |
|
|
* scroll procedure does something that requires redisplay. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (textPtr->flags & UPDATE_SCROLLBARS) { |
|
|
textPtr->flags &= ~UPDATE_SCROLLBARS; |
|
|
if (textPtr->yScrollCmd != NULL) { |
|
|
GetYView(textPtr->interp, textPtr, 1); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) { |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
goto end; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Update the horizontal scrollbar, if any. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (textPtr->xScrollCmd != NULL) { |
|
|
GetXView(textPtr->interp, textPtr, 1); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
end: |
|
|
Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextEventuallyRepick -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is invoked whenever something happens that |
|
|
* could change the current character or the tags associated |
|
|
* with it. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* A repick is scheduled as an idle handler. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* ARGSUSED */ |
|
|
void |
|
|
TkTextEventuallyRepick(textPtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REPICK_NEEDED; |
|
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING; |
|
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextRedrawRegion -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is invoked to schedule a redisplay for a given |
|
|
* region of a text widget. The redisplay itself may not occur |
|
|
* immediately: it's scheduled as a when-idle handler. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Information will eventually be redrawn on the screen. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* ARGSUSED */ |
|
|
void |
|
|
TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, x, y, width, height) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
|
|
int x, y; /* Coordinates of upper-left corner of area |
|
|
* to be redrawn, in pixels relative to |
|
|
* textPtr's window. */ |
|
|
int width, height; /* Width and height of area to be redrawn. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
TkRegion damageRgn = TkCreateRegion(); |
|
|
XRectangle rect; |
|
|
|
|
|
rect.x = x; |
|
|
rect.y = y; |
|
|
rect.width = width; |
|
|
rect.height = height; |
|
|
TkUnionRectWithRegion(&rect, damageRgn, damageRgn); |
|
|
|
|
|
TextInvalidateRegion(textPtr, damageRgn); |
|
|
|
|
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING; |
|
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
TkDestroyRegion(damageRgn); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TextInvalidateRegion -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Mark a region of text as invalid. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Updates the display information for the text widget. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
TextInvalidateRegion(textPtr, region) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
|
|
TkRegion region; /* Region of area to redraw. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
register DLine *dlPtr; |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
int maxY, inset; |
|
|
XRectangle rect; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find all lines that overlap the given region and mark them for |
|
|
* redisplay. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
TkClipBox(region, &rect); |
|
|
maxY = rect.y + rect.height; |
|
|
for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; |
|
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if ((dlPtr->oldY != -1) && (TkRectInRegion(region, rect.x, dlPtr->y, |
|
|
rect.width, (unsigned int) dlPtr->height) != RectangleOut)) { |
|
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->topOfEof < maxY) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->topOfEof = maxY; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Schedule the redisplay operation if there isn't one already |
|
|
* scheduled. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
inset = textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->highlightWidth; |
|
|
if ((rect.x < (inset + textPtr->padX)) |
|
|
|| (rect.y < (inset + textPtr->padY)) |
|
|
|| ((int) (rect.x + rect.width) > (Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) |
|
|
- inset - textPtr->padX)) |
|
|
|| (maxY > (Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - inset - textPtr->padY))) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_BORDERS; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextChanged -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is invoked when info in a text widget is about |
|
|
* to be modified in a way that changes how it is displayed (e.g. |
|
|
* characters were inserted or deleted, or tag information was |
|
|
* changed). This procedure must be called *before* a change is |
|
|
* made, so that indexes in the display information are still |
|
|
* valid. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The range of character between index1Ptr (inclusive) and |
|
|
* index2Ptr (exclusive) will be redisplayed at some point in the |
|
|
* future (the actual redisplay is scheduled as a when-idle handler). |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
TkTextChanged(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *index1Ptr; /* Index of first character to redisplay. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *index2Ptr; /* Index of character just after last one |
|
|
* to redisplay. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
DLine *firstPtr, *lastPtr; |
|
|
TkTextIndex rounded; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Schedule both a redisplay and a recomputation of display information. |
|
|
* It's done here rather than the end of the procedure for two reasons: |
|
|
* |
|
|
* 1. If there are no display lines to update we'll want to return |
|
|
* immediately, well before the end of the procedure. |
|
|
* 2. It's important to arrange for the redisplay BEFORE calling |
|
|
* FreeDLines. The reason for this is subtle and has to do with |
|
|
* embedded windows. The chunk delete procedure for an embedded |
|
|
* window will schedule an idle handler to unmap the window. |
|
|
* However, we want the idle handler for redisplay to be called |
|
|
* first, so that it can put the embedded window back on the screen |
|
|
* again (if appropriate). This will prevent the window from ever |
|
|
* being unmapped, and thereby avoid flashing. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
|
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the DLines corresponding to index1Ptr and index2Ptr. There |
|
|
* is one tricky thing here, which is that we have to relayout in |
|
|
* units of whole text lines: round index1Ptr back to the beginning |
|
|
* of its text line, and include all the display lines after index2, |
|
|
* up to the end of its text line. This is necessary because the |
|
|
* indices stored in the display lines will no longer be valid. It's |
|
|
* also needed because any edit could change the way lines wrap. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
rounded = *index1Ptr; |
|
|
rounded.byteIndex = 0; |
|
|
firstPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, &rounded); |
|
|
if (firstPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
lastPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, index2Ptr); |
|
|
while ((lastPtr != NULL) |
|
|
&& (lastPtr->index.linePtr == index2Ptr->linePtr)) { |
|
|
lastPtr = lastPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Delete all the DLines from firstPtr up to but not including lastPtr. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr, 1); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextRedrawTag -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is invoked to request a redraw of all characters |
|
|
* in a given range that have a particular tag on or off. It's |
|
|
* called, for example, when tag options change. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Information on the screen may be redrawn, and the layout of |
|
|
* the screen may change. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, withTag) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *index1Ptr; /* First character in range to consider |
|
|
* for redisplay. NULL means start at |
|
|
* beginning of text. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *index2Ptr; /* Character just after last one to consider |
|
|
* for redisplay. NULL means process all |
|
|
* the characters in the text. */ |
|
|
TkTextTag *tagPtr; /* Information about tag. */ |
|
|
int withTag; /* 1 means redraw characters that have the |
|
|
* tag, 0 means redraw those without. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
register DLine *dlPtr; |
|
|
DLine *endPtr; |
|
|
int tagOn; |
|
|
TkTextSearch search; |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
TkTextIndex *curIndexPtr; |
|
|
TkTextIndex endOfText, *endIndexPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Round up the starting position if it's before the first line |
|
|
* visible on the screen (we only care about what's on the screen). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
|
|
if (dlPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((index1Ptr == NULL) || (TkTextIndexCmp(&dlPtr->index, index1Ptr) > 0)) { |
|
|
index1Ptr = &dlPtr->index; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Set the stopping position if it wasn't specified. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (index2Ptr == NULL) { |
|
|
index2Ptr = TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, |
|
|
TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree), 0, &endOfText); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Initialize a search through all transitions on the tag, starting |
|
|
* with the first transition where the tag's current state is different |
|
|
* from what it will eventually be. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
TkBTreeStartSearch(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, &search); |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Make our own curIndex because at this point search.curIndex |
|
|
* may not equal index1Ptr->curIndex in the case the first tag toggle |
|
|
* comes after index1Ptr (See the use of FindTagStart in TkBTreeStartSearch) |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
curIndexPtr = index1Ptr; |
|
|
tagOn = TkBTreeCharTagged(index1Ptr, tagPtr); |
|
|
if (tagOn != withTag) { |
|
|
if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) { |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
curIndexPtr = &search.curIndex; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Schedule a redisplay and layout recalculation if they aren't |
|
|
* already pending. This has to be done before calling FreeDLines, |
|
|
* for the reason given in TkTextChanged. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
|
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Each loop through the loop below is for one range of characters |
|
|
* where the tag's current state is different than its eventual |
|
|
* state. At the top of the loop, search contains information about |
|
|
* the first character in the range. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
while (1) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the first DLine structure in the range. Note: if the |
|
|
* desired character isn't the first in its text line, then look |
|
|
* for the character just before it instead. This is needed to |
|
|
* handle the case where the first character of a wrapped |
|
|
* display line just got smaller, so that it now fits on the |
|
|
* line before: need to relayout the line containing the |
|
|
* previous character. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (curIndexPtr->byteIndex == 0) { |
|
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dlPtr, curIndexPtr); |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
TkTextIndex tmp; |
|
|
|
|
|
tmp = *curIndexPtr; |
|
|
tmp.byteIndex -= 1; |
|
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dlPtr, &tmp); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (dlPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the first DLine structure that's past the end of the range. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) { |
|
|
endIndexPtr = index2Ptr; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
curIndexPtr = &search.curIndex; |
|
|
endIndexPtr = curIndexPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
endPtr = FindDLine(dlPtr, endIndexPtr); |
|
|
if ((endPtr != NULL) && (endPtr->index.linePtr == endIndexPtr->linePtr) |
|
|
&& (endPtr->index.byteIndex < endIndexPtr->byteIndex)) { |
|
|
endPtr = endPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Delete all of the display lines in the range, so that they'll |
|
|
* be re-layed out and redrawn. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, endPtr, 1); |
|
|
dlPtr = endPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the first text line in the next range. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextRelayoutWindow -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called when something has happened that |
|
|
* invalidates the whole layout of characters on the screen, such |
|
|
* as a change in a configuration option for the overall text |
|
|
* widget or a change in the window size. It causes all display |
|
|
* information to be recomputed and the window to be redrawn. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* All the display information will be recomputed for the window |
|
|
* and the window will be redrawn. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
TkTextRelayoutWindow(textPtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
GC new; |
|
|
XGCValues gcValues; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Schedule the window redisplay. See TkTextChanged for the |
|
|
* reason why this has to be done before any calls to FreeDLines. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
|
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|REDRAW_BORDERS|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE |
|
|
|REPICK_NEEDED; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* (Re-)create the graphics context for drawing the traversal |
|
|
* highlight. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
gcValues.graphics_exposures = False; |
|
|
new = Tk_GetGC(textPtr->tkwin, GCGraphicsExposures, &gcValues); |
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->copyGC != None) { |
|
|
Tk_FreeGC(textPtr->display, dInfoPtr->copyGC); |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->copyGC = new; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Throw away all the current layout information. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, (DLine *) NULL, 1); |
|
|
dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = NULL; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Recompute some overall things for the layout. Even if the |
|
|
* window gets very small, pretend that there's at least one |
|
|
* pixel of drawing space in it. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (textPtr->highlightWidth < 0) { |
|
|
textPtr->highlightWidth = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->x = textPtr->highlightWidth + textPtr->borderWidth |
|
|
+ textPtr->padX; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->y = textPtr->highlightWidth + textPtr->borderWidth |
|
|
+ textPtr->padY; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->maxX = Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - textPtr->highlightWidth |
|
|
- textPtr->borderWidth - textPtr->padX; |
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->maxX <= dInfoPtr->x) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->maxX = dInfoPtr->x + 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->maxY = Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - textPtr->highlightWidth |
|
|
- textPtr->borderWidth - textPtr->padY; |
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->maxY <= dInfoPtr->y) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->maxY = dInfoPtr->y + 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->topOfEof = dInfoPtr->maxY; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If the upper-left character isn't the first in a line, recompute |
|
|
* it. This is necessary because a change in the window's size |
|
|
* or options could change the way lines wrap. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex != 0) { |
|
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, 0, &textPtr->topIndex); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Invalidate cached scrollbar positions, so that scrollbars |
|
|
* sliders will be udpated. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
dInfoPtr->xScrollFirst = dInfoPtr->xScrollLast = -1; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->yScrollFirst = dInfoPtr->yScrollLast = -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextSetYView -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called to specify what lines are to be |
|
|
* displayed in a text widget. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The display will (eventually) be updated so that the position |
|
|
* given by "indexPtr" is visible on the screen at the position |
|
|
* determined by "pickPlace". |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
TkTextSetYView(textPtr, indexPtr, pickPlace) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Position that is to appear somewhere |
|
|
* in the view. */ |
|
|
int pickPlace; /* 0 means topLine must appear at top of |
|
|
* screen. 1 means we get to pick where it |
|
|
* appears: minimize screen motion or else |
|
|
* display line at center of screen. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
register DLine *dlPtr; |
|
|
int bottomY, close, lineIndex; |
|
|
TkTextIndex tmpIndex, rounded; |
|
|
Tk_FontMetrics fm; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If the specified position is the extra line at the end of the |
|
|
* text, round it back to the last real line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
lineIndex = TkBTreeLineIndex(indexPtr->linePtr); |
|
|
if (lineIndex == TkBTreeNumLines(indexPtr->tree)) { |
|
|
TkTextIndexBackChars(indexPtr, 1, &rounded); |
|
|
indexPtr = &rounded; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (!pickPlace) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The specified position must go at the top of the screen. |
|
|
* Just leave all the DLine's alone: we may be able to reuse |
|
|
* some of the information that's currently on the screen |
|
|
* without redisplaying it all. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (indexPtr->byteIndex == 0) { |
|
|
textPtr->topIndex = *indexPtr; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, &textPtr->topIndex); |
|
|
} |
|
|
goto scheduleUpdate; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* We have to pick where to display the index. First, bring |
|
|
* the display information up to date and see if the index will be |
|
|
* completely visible in the current screen configuration. If so |
|
|
* then there's nothing to do. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
|
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, indexPtr); |
|
|
if (dlPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
if ((dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Part of the line hangs off the bottom of the screen; |
|
|
* pretend the whole line is off-screen. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
dlPtr = NULL; |
|
|
} else if ((dlPtr->index.linePtr == indexPtr->linePtr) |
|
|
&& (dlPtr->index.byteIndex <= indexPtr->byteIndex)) { |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The desired line isn't already on-screen. Figure out what |
|
|
* it means to be "close" to the top or bottom of the screen. |
|
|
* Close means within 1/3 of the screen height or within three |
|
|
* lines, whichever is greater. Add one extra line also, to |
|
|
* account for the way MeasureUp rounds. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Tk_GetFontMetrics(textPtr->tkfont, &fm); |
|
|
bottomY = (dInfoPtr->y + dInfoPtr->maxY + fm.linespace)/2; |
|
|
close = (dInfoPtr->maxY - dInfoPtr->y)/3; |
|
|
if (close < 3*fm.linespace) { |
|
|
close = 3*fm.linespace; |
|
|
} |
|
|
close += fm.linespace; |
|
|
if (dlPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The desired line is above the top of screen. If it is |
|
|
* "close" to the top of the window then make it the top |
|
|
* line on the screen. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, close, &tmpIndex); |
|
|
if (TkTextIndexCmp(&tmpIndex, indexPtr) <= 0) { |
|
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, &textPtr->topIndex); |
|
|
goto scheduleUpdate; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The desired line is below the bottom of the screen. If it is |
|
|
* "close" to the bottom of the screen then position it at the |
|
|
* bottom of the screen. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, close, &tmpIndex); |
|
|
if (FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, &tmpIndex) != NULL) { |
|
|
bottomY = dInfoPtr->maxY - dInfoPtr->y; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Our job now is to arrange the display so that indexPtr appears |
|
|
* as low on the screen as possible but with its bottom no lower |
|
|
* than bottomY. BottomY is the bottom of the window if the |
|
|
* desired line is just below the current screen, otherwise it |
|
|
* is a half-line lower than the center of the window. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, bottomY, &textPtr->topIndex); |
|
|
|
|
|
scheduleUpdate: |
|
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
|
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* MeasureUp -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Given one index, find the index of the first character |
|
|
* on the highest display line that would be displayed no more |
|
|
* than "distance" pixels above the given index. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* *dstPtr is filled in with the index of the first character |
|
|
* on a display line. The display line is found by measuring |
|
|
* up "distance" pixels above the pixel just below an imaginary |
|
|
* display line that contains srcPtr. If the display line |
|
|
* that covers this coordinate actually extends above the |
|
|
* coordinate, then return the index of the next lower line |
|
|
* instead (i.e. the returned index will be completely visible |
|
|
* at or below the given y-coordinate). |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, srcPtr, distance, dstPtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Text widget in which to measure. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *srcPtr; /* Index of character from which to start |
|
|
* measuring. */ |
|
|
int distance; /* Vertical distance in pixels measured |
|
|
* from the pixel just below the lowest |
|
|
* one in srcPtr's line. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *dstPtr; /* Index to fill in with result. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
int lineNum; /* Number of current line. */ |
|
|
int bytesToCount; /* Maximum number of bytes to measure in |
|
|
* current line. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex bestIndex; /* Best candidate seen so far for result. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex index; |
|
|
DLine *dlPtr, *lowestPtr; |
|
|
int noBestYet; /* 1 means bestIndex hasn't been set. */ |
|
|
|
|
|
noBestYet = 1; |
|
|
bytesToCount = srcPtr->byteIndex + 1; |
|
|
index.tree = srcPtr->tree; |
|
|
for (lineNum = TkBTreeLineIndex(srcPtr->linePtr); lineNum >= 0; |
|
|
lineNum--) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Layout an entire text line (potentially > 1 display line). |
|
|
* For the first line, which contains srcPtr, only layout the |
|
|
* part up through srcPtr (bytesToCount is non-infinite to |
|
|
* accomplish this). Make a list of all the display lines |
|
|
* in backwards order (the lowest DLine on the screen is first |
|
|
* in the list). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
index.linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(srcPtr->tree, lineNum); |
|
|
index.byteIndex = 0; |
|
|
lowestPtr = NULL; |
|
|
do { |
|
|
dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index); |
|
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = lowestPtr; |
|
|
lowestPtr = dlPtr; |
|
|
TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index); |
|
|
bytesToCount -= dlPtr->byteCount; |
|
|
} while ((bytesToCount > 0) && (index.linePtr == dlPtr->index.linePtr)); |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Scan through the display lines to see if we've covered enough |
|
|
* vertical distance. If so, save the starting index for the |
|
|
* line at the desired location. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
for (dlPtr = lowestPtr; dlPtr != NULL; dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
distance -= dlPtr->height; |
|
|
if (distance < 0) { |
|
|
*dstPtr = (noBestYet) ? dlPtr->index : bestIndex; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
bestIndex = dlPtr->index; |
|
|
noBestYet = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Discard the display lines, then either return or prepare |
|
|
* for the next display line to lay out. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, lowestPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0); |
|
|
if (distance < 0) { |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
bytesToCount = INT_MAX; /* Consider all chars. in next line. */ |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Ran off the beginning of the text. Return the first character |
|
|
* in the text. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, dstPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextSeeCmd -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is invoked to process the "see" option for |
|
|
* the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation |
|
|
* for details on what it does. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* A standard Tcl result. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* See the user documentation. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
TkTextSeeCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about text widget. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Current interpreter. */ |
|
|
int argc; /* Number of arguments. */ |
|
|
char **argv; /* Argument strings. Someone else has already |
|
|
* parsed this command enough to know that |
|
|
* argv[1] is "see". */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
TkTextIndex index; |
|
|
int x, y, width, height, lineWidth, byteCount, oneThird, delta; |
|
|
DLine *dlPtr; |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (argc != 3) { |
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"", |
|
|
argv[0], " see index\"", (char *) NULL); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If the specified position is the extra line at the end of the |
|
|
* text, round it back to the last real line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (TkBTreeLineIndex(index.linePtr) == TkBTreeNumLines(index.tree)) { |
|
|
TkTextIndexBackChars(&index, 1, &index); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* First get the desired position into the vertical range of the window. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, 1); |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Now make sure that the character is in view horizontally. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
|
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
lineWidth = dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x; |
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->maxLength < lineWidth) { |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the chunk that contains the desired index. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, &index); |
|
|
byteCount = index.byteIndex - dlPtr->index.byteIndex; |
|
|
for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; chunkPtr!=NULL ; chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if (byteCount < chunkPtr->numBytes) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
byteCount -= chunkPtr->numBytes; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Call a chunk-specific procedure to find the horizontal range of |
|
|
* the character within the chunk. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (chunkPtr!=NULL) { /* chunkPtr==NULL iff trying to see in elided region */ |
|
|
(*chunkPtr->bboxProc)(chunkPtr, byteCount, dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove, |
|
|
dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow, |
|
|
dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, &x, &y, &width, |
|
|
&height); |
|
|
delta = x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset; |
|
|
oneThird = lineWidth/3; |
|
|
if (delta < 0) { |
|
|
if (delta < -oneThird) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = (x - lineWidth/2)/textPtr->charWidth; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset -= ((-delta) + textPtr->charWidth - 1) |
|
|
/ textPtr->charWidth; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
delta -= (lineWidth - width); |
|
|
if (delta > 0) { |
|
|
if (delta > oneThird) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = (x - lineWidth/2)/textPtr->charWidth; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset += (delta + textPtr->charWidth - 1) |
|
|
/ textPtr->charWidth; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
}} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE; |
|
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING; |
|
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextXviewCmd -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is invoked to process the "xview" option for |
|
|
* the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation |
|
|
* for details on what it does. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* A standard Tcl result. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* See the user documentation. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
TkTextXviewCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about text widget. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Current interpreter. */ |
|
|
int argc; /* Number of arguments. */ |
|
|
char **argv; /* Argument strings. Someone else has already |
|
|
* parsed this command enough to know that |
|
|
* argv[1] is "xview". */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
int type, charsPerPage, count, newOffset; |
|
|
double fraction; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
|
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (argc == 2) { |
|
|
GetXView(interp, textPtr, 0); |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
newOffset = dInfoPtr->newByteOffset; |
|
|
type = Tk_GetScrollInfo(interp, argc, argv, &fraction, &count); |
|
|
switch (type) { |
|
|
case TK_SCROLL_ERROR: |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO: |
|
|
if (fraction > 1.0) { |
|
|
fraction = 1.0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (fraction < 0) { |
|
|
fraction = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
newOffset = (int) (((fraction * dInfoPtr->maxLength) / textPtr->charWidth) |
|
|
+ 0.5); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: |
|
|
charsPerPage = ((dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x) / textPtr->charWidth) |
|
|
- 2; |
|
|
if (charsPerPage < 1) { |
|
|
charsPerPage = 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
newOffset += charsPerPage * count; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
case TK_SCROLL_UNITS: |
|
|
newOffset += count; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = newOffset; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE; |
|
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING; |
|
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* ScrollByLines -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called to scroll a text widget up or down |
|
|
* by a given number of lines. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The view in textPtr's window changes to reflect the value |
|
|
* of "offset". |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
ScrollByLines(textPtr, offset) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget to scroll. */ |
|
|
int offset; /* Amount by which to scroll, in *screen* |
|
|
* lines. Positive means that information |
|
|
* later in text becomes visible, negative |
|
|
* means that information earlier in the |
|
|
* text becomes visible. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
int i, bytesToCount, lineNum; |
|
|
TkTextIndex new, index; |
|
|
TkTextLine *lastLinePtr; |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
DLine *dlPtr, *lowestPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (offset < 0) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Must scroll up (to show earlier information in the text). |
|
|
* The code below is similar to that in MeasureUp, except that |
|
|
* it counts lines instead of pixels. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
bytesToCount = textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex + 1; |
|
|
index.tree = textPtr->tree; |
|
|
offset--; /* Skip line containing topIndex. */ |
|
|
for (lineNum = TkBTreeLineIndex(textPtr->topIndex.linePtr); |
|
|
lineNum >= 0; lineNum--) { |
|
|
index.linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree, lineNum); |
|
|
index.byteIndex = 0; |
|
|
lowestPtr = NULL; |
|
|
do { |
|
|
dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index); |
|
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = lowestPtr; |
|
|
lowestPtr = dlPtr; |
|
|
TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index); |
|
|
bytesToCount -= dlPtr->byteCount; |
|
|
} while ((bytesToCount > 0) |
|
|
&& (index.linePtr == dlPtr->index.linePtr)); |
|
|
|
|
|
for (dlPtr = lowestPtr; dlPtr != NULL; dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
offset++; |
|
|
if (offset == 0) { |
|
|
textPtr->topIndex = dlPtr->index; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Discard the display lines, then either return or prepare |
|
|
* for the next display line to lay out. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, lowestPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0); |
|
|
if (offset >= 0) { |
|
|
goto scheduleUpdate; |
|
|
} |
|
|
bytesToCount = INT_MAX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Ran off the beginning of the text. Return the first character |
|
|
* in the text. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, &textPtr->topIndex); |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Scrolling down, to show later information in the text. |
|
|
* Just count lines from the current top of the window. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
lastLinePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree, |
|
|
TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree)); |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < offset; i++) { |
|
|
dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex); |
|
|
if (dlPtr->length == 0 && dlPtr->height == 0) offset++; |
|
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = NULL; |
|
|
TkTextIndexForwBytes(&textPtr->topIndex, dlPtr->byteCount, &new); |
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0); |
|
|
if (new.linePtr == lastLinePtr) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
textPtr->topIndex = new; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
scheduleUpdate: |
|
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
|
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextYviewCmd -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is invoked to process the "yview" option for |
|
|
* the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation |
|
|
* for details on what it does. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* A standard Tcl result. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* See the user documentation. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
TkTextYviewCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about text widget. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Current interpreter. */ |
|
|
int argc; /* Number of arguments. */ |
|
|
char **argv; /* Argument strings. Someone else has already |
|
|
* parsed this command enough to know that |
|
|
* argv[1] is "yview". */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
int pickPlace, lineNum, type, bytesInLine; |
|
|
Tk_FontMetrics fm; |
|
|
int pixels, count; |
|
|
size_t switchLength; |
|
|
double fraction; |
|
|
TkTextIndex index, new; |
|
|
TkTextLine *lastLinePtr; |
|
|
DLine *dlPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
|
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (argc == 2) { |
|
|
GetYView(interp, textPtr, 0); |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Next, handle the old syntax: "pathName yview ?-pickplace? where" |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
pickPlace = 0; |
|
|
if (argv[2][0] == '-') { |
|
|
switchLength = strlen(argv[2]); |
|
|
if ((switchLength >= 2) |
|
|
&& (strncmp(argv[2], "-pickplace", switchLength) == 0)) { |
|
|
pickPlace = 1; |
|
|
if (argc != 4) { |
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"", |
|
|
argv[0], " yview -pickplace lineNum|index\"", |
|
|
(char *) NULL); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((argc == 3) || pickPlace) { |
|
|
if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[2+pickPlace], &lineNum) == TCL_OK) { |
|
|
TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineNum, 0, &index); |
|
|
TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, 0); |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The argument must be a regular text index. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Tcl_ResetResult(interp); |
|
|
if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[2+pickPlace], |
|
|
&index) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, pickPlace); |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* New syntax: dispatch based on argv[2]. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
type = Tk_GetScrollInfo(interp, argc, argv, &fraction, &count); |
|
|
switch (type) { |
|
|
case TK_SCROLL_ERROR: |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO: |
|
|
if (fraction > 1.0) { |
|
|
fraction = 1.0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (fraction < 0) { |
|
|
fraction = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
fraction *= TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree); |
|
|
lineNum = (int) fraction; |
|
|
TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineNum, 0, &index); |
|
|
bytesInLine = TkBTreeBytesInLine(index.linePtr); |
|
|
index.byteIndex = (int)((bytesInLine * (fraction-lineNum)) + 0.5); |
|
|
if (index.byteIndex >= bytesInLine) { |
|
|
TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineNum + 1, 0, &index); |
|
|
} |
|
|
TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, 0); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Scroll up or down by screenfuls. Actually, use the |
|
|
* window height minus two lines, so that there's some |
|
|
* overlap between adjacent pages. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Tk_GetFontMetrics(textPtr->tkfont, &fm); |
|
|
if (count < 0) { |
|
|
pixels = (dInfoPtr->maxY - 2*fm.linespace - dInfoPtr->y)*(-count) |
|
|
+ fm.linespace; |
|
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, pixels, &new); |
|
|
if (TkTextIndexCmp(&textPtr->topIndex, &new) == 0) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* A page of scrolling ended up being less than one line. |
|
|
* Scroll one line anyway. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
count = -1; |
|
|
goto scrollByLines; |
|
|
} |
|
|
textPtr->topIndex = new; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Scrolling down by pages. Layout lines starting at the |
|
|
* top index and count through the desired vertical distance. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
pixels = (dInfoPtr->maxY - 2*fm.linespace - dInfoPtr->y)*count; |
|
|
lastLinePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree, |
|
|
TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree)); |
|
|
do { |
|
|
dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex); |
|
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = NULL; |
|
|
TkTextIndexForwBytes(&textPtr->topIndex, dlPtr->byteCount, |
|
|
&new); |
|
|
pixels -= dlPtr->height; |
|
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0); |
|
|
if (new.linePtr == lastLinePtr) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
textPtr->topIndex = new; |
|
|
} while (pixels > 0); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
|
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
case TK_SCROLL_UNITS: |
|
|
scrollByLines: |
|
|
ScrollByLines(textPtr, count); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextScanCmd -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is invoked to process the "scan" option for |
|
|
* the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation |
|
|
* for details on what it does. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* A standard Tcl result. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* See the user documentation. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
TkTextScanCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv) |
|
|
register TkText *textPtr; /* Information about text widget. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Current interpreter. */ |
|
|
int argc; /* Number of arguments. */ |
|
|
char **argv; /* Argument strings. Someone else has already |
|
|
* parsed this command enough to know that |
|
|
* argv[1] is "scan". */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
TkTextIndex index; |
|
|
int c, x, y, totalScroll, newByte, maxByte, gain=10; |
|
|
Tk_FontMetrics fm; |
|
|
size_t length; |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((argc != 5) && (argc != 6)) { |
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"", |
|
|
argv[0], " scan mark x y\" or \"", |
|
|
argv[0], " scan dragto x y ?gain?\"", (char *) NULL); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &y) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((argc == 6) && (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[5], &gain) != TCL_OK)) |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
c = argv[2][0]; |
|
|
length = strlen(argv[2]); |
|
|
if ((c == 'd') && (strncmp(argv[2], "dragto", length) == 0)) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Amplify the difference between the current position and the |
|
|
* mark position to compute how much the view should shift, then |
|
|
* update the mark position to correspond to the new view. If we |
|
|
* run off the edge of the text, reset the mark point so that the |
|
|
* current position continues to correspond to the edge of the |
|
|
* window. This means that the picture will start dragging as |
|
|
* soon as the mouse reverses direction (without this reset, might |
|
|
* have to slide mouse a long ways back before the picture starts |
|
|
* moving again). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
newByte = dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex + (gain*(dInfoPtr->scanMarkX - x)) |
|
|
/ (textPtr->charWidth); |
|
|
maxByte = 1 + (dInfoPtr->maxLength - (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x) |
|
|
+ textPtr->charWidth - 1)/textPtr->charWidth; |
|
|
if (newByte < 0) { |
|
|
newByte = 0; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex = 0; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkX = x; |
|
|
} else if (newByte > maxByte) { |
|
|
newByte = maxByte; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex = maxByte; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkX = x; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = newByte; |
|
|
|
|
|
Tk_GetFontMetrics(textPtr->tkfont, &fm); |
|
|
totalScroll = (gain*(dInfoPtr->scanMarkY - y)) / fm.linespace; |
|
|
if (totalScroll != dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll) { |
|
|
index = textPtr->topIndex; |
|
|
ScrollByLines(textPtr, totalScroll-dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll); |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll = totalScroll; |
|
|
if ((index.linePtr == textPtr->topIndex.linePtr) && |
|
|
(index.byteIndex == textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex)) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll = 0; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkY = y; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} else if ((c == 'm') && (strncmp(argv[2], "mark", length) == 0)) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex = dInfoPtr->newByteOffset; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkX = x; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll = 0; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkY = y; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad scan option \"", argv[2], |
|
|
"\": must be mark or dragto", (char *) NULL); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE; |
|
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
|
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING; |
|
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* GetXView -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure computes the fractions that indicate what's |
|
|
* visible in a text window and, optionally, evaluates a |
|
|
* Tcl script to report them to the text's associated scrollbar. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* If report is zero, then the interp's result is filled in with |
|
|
* two real numbers separated by a space, giving the position of |
|
|
* the left and right edges of the window as fractions from 0 to |
|
|
* 1, where 0 means the left edge of the text and 1 means the right |
|
|
* edge. If report is non-zero, then the interp's result isn't modified |
|
|
* directly, but instead a script is evaluated in interp to report |
|
|
* the new horizontal scroll position to the scrollbar (if the scroll |
|
|
* position hasn't changed then no script is invoked). |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
GetXView(interp, textPtr, report) |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* If "report" is FALSE, string |
|
|
* describing visible range gets |
|
|
* stored in the interp's result. */ |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about text widget. */ |
|
|
int report; /* Non-zero means report info to |
|
|
* scrollbar if it has changed. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
char buffer[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2]; |
|
|
double first, last; |
|
|
int code; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->maxLength > 0) { |
|
|
first = ((double) dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset) |
|
|
/ dInfoPtr->maxLength; |
|
|
last = first + ((double) (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x)) |
|
|
/ dInfoPtr->maxLength; |
|
|
if (last > 1.0) { |
|
|
last = 1.0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
first = 0; |
|
|
last = 1.0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (!report) { |
|
|
sprintf(buffer, "%g %g", first, last); |
|
|
Tcl_SetResult(interp, buffer, TCL_VOLATILE); |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((first == dInfoPtr->xScrollFirst) && (last == dInfoPtr->xScrollLast)) { |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->xScrollFirst = first; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->xScrollLast = last; |
|
|
sprintf(buffer, " %g %g", first, last); |
|
|
code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, textPtr->xScrollCmd, |
|
|
buffer, (char *) NULL); |
|
|
if (code != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, |
|
|
"\n (horizontal scrolling command executed by text)"); |
|
|
Tcl_BackgroundError(interp); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* GetYView -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure computes the fractions that indicate what's |
|
|
* visible in a text window and, optionally, evaluates a |
|
|
* Tcl script to report them to the text's associated scrollbar. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* If report is zero, then the interp's result is filled in with |
|
|
* two real numbers separated by a space, giving the position of |
|
|
* the top and bottom of the window as fractions from 0 to 1, where |
|
|
* 0 means the beginning of the text and 1 means the end. If |
|
|
* report is non-zero, then the interp's result isn't modified directly, |
|
|
* but a script is evaluated in interp to report the new scroll |
|
|
* position to the scrollbar (if the scroll position hasn't changed |
|
|
* then no script is invoked). |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
GetYView(interp, textPtr, report) |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* If "report" is FALSE, string |
|
|
* describing visible range gets |
|
|
* stored in the interp's result. */ |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about text widget. */ |
|
|
int report; /* Non-zero means report info to |
|
|
* scrollbar if it has changed. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
char buffer[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2]; |
|
|
double first, last; |
|
|
DLine *dlPtr; |
|
|
int totalLines, code, count; |
|
|
|
|
|
dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
|
|
totalLines = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree); |
|
|
first = (double) TkBTreeLineIndex(dlPtr->index.linePtr) |
|
|
+ (double) dlPtr->index.byteIndex |
|
|
/ TkBTreeBytesInLine(dlPtr->index.linePtr); |
|
|
first /= totalLines; |
|
|
while (1) { |
|
|
if ((dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The last line is only partially visible, so don't |
|
|
* count its characters in what's visible. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
count = 0; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (dlPtr->nextPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
count = dlPtr->byteCount; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
last = ((double) TkBTreeLineIndex(dlPtr->index.linePtr)) |
|
|
+ ((double) (dlPtr->index.byteIndex + count)) |
|
|
/ (TkBTreeBytesInLine(dlPtr->index.linePtr)); |
|
|
last /= totalLines; |
|
|
if (!report) { |
|
|
sprintf(buffer, "%g %g", first, last); |
|
|
Tcl_SetResult(interp, buffer, TCL_VOLATILE); |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((first == dInfoPtr->yScrollFirst) && (last == dInfoPtr->yScrollLast)) { |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dInfoPtr->yScrollFirst = first; |
|
|
dInfoPtr->yScrollLast = last; |
|
|
sprintf(buffer, " %g %g", first, last); |
|
|
code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, textPtr->yScrollCmd, buffer, (char *) NULL); |
|
|
if (code != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, |
|
|
"\n (vertical scrolling command executed by text)"); |
|
|
Tcl_BackgroundError(interp); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* FindDLine -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called to find the DLine corresponding to a |
|
|
* given text index. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is a pointer to the first DLine found in the |
|
|
* list headed by dlPtr that displays information at or after the |
|
|
* specified position. If there is no such line in the list then |
|
|
* NULL is returned. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static DLine * |
|
|
FindDLine(dlPtr, indexPtr) |
|
|
register DLine *dlPtr; /* Pointer to first in list of DLines |
|
|
* to search. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Index of desired character. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkTextLine *linePtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (dlPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
return NULL; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (TkBTreeLineIndex(indexPtr->linePtr) |
|
|
< TkBTreeLineIndex(dlPtr->index.linePtr)) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The first display line is already past the desired line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
return dlPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the first display line that covers the desired text line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
linePtr = dlPtr->index.linePtr; |
|
|
while (linePtr != indexPtr->linePtr) { |
|
|
while (dlPtr->index.linePtr == linePtr) { |
|
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
if (dlPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
return NULL; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(linePtr); |
|
|
if (linePtr == NULL) { |
|
|
panic("FindDLine reached end of text"); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (indexPtr->linePtr != dlPtr->index.linePtr) { |
|
|
return dlPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Now get to the right position within the text line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
while (indexPtr->byteIndex >= (dlPtr->index.byteIndex + dlPtr->byteCount)) { |
|
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
if ((dlPtr == NULL) || (dlPtr->index.linePtr != indexPtr->linePtr)) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
return dlPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextPixelIndex -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Given an (x,y) coordinate on the screen, find the location of |
|
|
* the character closest to that location. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The index at *indexPtr is modified to refer to the character |
|
|
* on the display that is closest to (x,y). |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
TkTextPixelIndex(textPtr, x, y, indexPtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
|
|
int x, y; /* Pixel coordinates of point in widget's |
|
|
* window. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* This index gets filled in with the |
|
|
* index of the character nearest to (x,y). */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
register DLine *dlPtr, *validdlPtr; |
|
|
register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Make sure that all of the layout information about what's |
|
|
* displayed where on the screen is up-to-date. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
|
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If the coordinates are above the top of the window, then adjust |
|
|
* them to refer to the upper-right corner of the window. If they're |
|
|
* off to one side or the other, then adjust to the closest side. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (y < dInfoPtr->y) { |
|
|
y = dInfoPtr->y; |
|
|
x = dInfoPtr->x; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (x >= dInfoPtr->maxX) { |
|
|
x = dInfoPtr->maxX - 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (x < dInfoPtr->x) { |
|
|
x = dInfoPtr->x; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the display line containing the desired y-coordinate. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
for (dlPtr = validdlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; y >= (dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height); |
|
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if (dlPtr->chunkPtr !=NULL) validdlPtr = dlPtr; |
|
|
if (dlPtr->nextPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Y-coordinate is off the bottom of the displayed text. |
|
|
* Use the last character on the last line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
x = dInfoPtr->maxX - 1; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (dlPtr->chunkPtr == NULL) dlPtr = validdlPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Scan through the line's chunks to find the one that contains |
|
|
* the desired x-coordinate. Before doing this, translate the |
|
|
* x-coordinate from the coordinate system of the window to the |
|
|
* coordinate system of the line (to take account of x-scrolling). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
*indexPtr = dlPtr->index; |
|
|
x = x - dInfoPtr->x + dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset; |
|
|
for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; x >= (chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width); |
|
|
indexPtr->byteIndex += chunkPtr->numBytes, |
|
|
chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
indexPtr->byteIndex += chunkPtr->numBytes; |
|
|
TkTextIndexBackChars(indexPtr, 1, indexPtr); |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If the chunk has more than one byte in it, ask it which |
|
|
* character is at the desired location. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (chunkPtr->numBytes > 1) { |
|
|
indexPtr->byteIndex += (*chunkPtr->measureProc)(chunkPtr, x); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextCharBbox -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Given an index, find the bounding box of the screen area |
|
|
* occupied by that character. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* Zero is returned if the character is on the screen. -1 |
|
|
* means the character isn't on the screen. If the return value |
|
|
* is 0, then the bounding box of the part of the character that's |
|
|
* visible on the screen is returned to *xPtr, *yPtr, *widthPtr, |
|
|
* and *heightPtr. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
TkTextCharBbox(textPtr, indexPtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Index of character whose bounding |
|
|
* box is desired. */ |
|
|
int *xPtr, *yPtr; /* Filled with character's upper-left |
|
|
* coordinate. */ |
|
|
int *widthPtr, *heightPtr; /* Filled in with character's dimensions. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
DLine *dlPtr; |
|
|
register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; |
|
|
int byteIndex; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Make sure that all of the screen layout information is up to date. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
|
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the display line containing the desired index. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, indexPtr); |
|
|
if ((dlPtr == NULL) || (TkTextIndexCmp(&dlPtr->index, indexPtr) > 0)) { |
|
|
return -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the chunk within the line that contains the desired |
|
|
* index. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
byteIndex = indexPtr->byteIndex - dlPtr->index.byteIndex; |
|
|
for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; ; chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if (chunkPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
return -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (byteIndex < chunkPtr->numBytes) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
byteIndex -= chunkPtr->numBytes; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Call a chunk-specific procedure to find the horizontal range of |
|
|
* the character within the chunk, then fill in the vertical range. |
|
|
* The x-coordinate returned by bboxProc is a coordinate within a |
|
|
* line, not a coordinate on the screen. Translate it to reflect |
|
|
* horizontal scrolling. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
(*chunkPtr->bboxProc)(chunkPtr, byteIndex, dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove, |
|
|
dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow, |
|
|
dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, |
|
|
heightPtr); |
|
|
*xPtr = *xPtr + dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset; |
|
|
if ((byteIndex == (chunkPtr->numBytes - 1)) && (chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL)) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Last character in display line. Give it all the space up to |
|
|
* the line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (*xPtr > dInfoPtr->maxX) { |
|
|
*xPtr = dInfoPtr->maxX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
*widthPtr = dInfoPtr->maxX - *xPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((*xPtr + *widthPtr) <= dInfoPtr->x) { |
|
|
return -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((*xPtr + *widthPtr) > dInfoPtr->maxX) { |
|
|
*widthPtr = dInfoPtr->maxX - *xPtr; |
|
|
if (*widthPtr <= 0) { |
|
|
return -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((*yPtr + *heightPtr) > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
|
|
*heightPtr = dInfoPtr->maxY - *yPtr; |
|
|
if (*heightPtr <= 0) { |
|
|
return -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
return 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextDLineInfo -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Given an index, return information about the display line |
|
|
* containing that character. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* Zero is returned if the character is on the screen. -1 |
|
|
* means the character isn't on the screen. If the return value |
|
|
* is 0, then information is returned in the variables pointed |
|
|
* to by xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, and basePtr. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
TkTextDLineInfo(textPtr, indexPtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, basePtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Index of character whose bounding |
|
|
* box is desired. */ |
|
|
int *xPtr, *yPtr; /* Filled with line's upper-left |
|
|
* coordinate. */ |
|
|
int *widthPtr, *heightPtr; /* Filled in with line's dimensions. */ |
|
|
int *basePtr; /* Filled in with the baseline position, |
|
|
* measured as an offset down from *yPtr. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
|
|
DLine *dlPtr; |
|
|
int dlx; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Make sure that all of the screen layout information is up to date. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
|
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the display line containing the desired index. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, indexPtr); |
|
|
if ((dlPtr == NULL) || (TkTextIndexCmp(&dlPtr->index, indexPtr) > 0)) { |
|
|
return -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
dlx = (dlPtr->chunkPtr != NULL? dlPtr->chunkPtr->x: 0); |
|
|
*xPtr = dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset + dlx; |
|
|
*widthPtr = dlPtr->length - dlx; |
|
|
*yPtr = dlPtr->y; |
|
|
if ((dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
|
|
*heightPtr = dInfoPtr->maxY - dlPtr->y; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
*heightPtr = dlPtr->height; |
|
|
} |
|
|
*basePtr = dlPtr->baseline; |
|
|
return 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
ElideBboxProc(chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr, |
|
|
widthPtr, heightPtr) |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk containing desired char. */ |
|
|
int index; /* Index of desired character within |
|
|
* the chunk. */ |
|
|
int y; /* Topmost pixel in area allocated |
|
|
* for this line. */ |
|
|
int lineHeight; /* Height of line, in pixels. */ |
|
|
int baseline; /* Location of line's baseline, in |
|
|
* pixels measured down from y. */ |
|
|
int *xPtr, *yPtr; /* Gets filled in with coords of |
|
|
* character's upper-left pixel. |
|
|
* X-coord is in same coordinate |
|
|
* system as chunkPtr->x. */ |
|
|
int *widthPtr; /* Gets filled in with width of |
|
|
* character, in pixels. */ |
|
|
int *heightPtr; /* Gets filled in with height of |
|
|
* character, in pixels. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
*xPtr = chunkPtr->x; |
|
|
*yPtr = y; |
|
|
*widthPtr = *heightPtr = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int |
|
|
ElideMeasureProc(chunkPtr, x) |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk containing desired coord. */ |
|
|
int x; /* X-coordinate, in same coordinate |
|
|
* system as chunkPtr->x. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
return 0 /*chunkPtr->numBytes - 1*/; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkTextCharLayoutProc -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is the "layoutProc" for character segments. |
|
|
* |
|
|
n * Results: |
|
|
* If there is something to display for the chunk then a |
|
|
* non-zero value is returned and the fields of chunkPtr |
|
|
* will be filled in (see the declaration of TkTextDispChunk |
|
|
* in tkText.h for details). If zero is returned it means |
|
|
* that no characters from this chunk fit in the window. |
|
|
* If -1 is returned it means that this segment just doesn't |
|
|
* need to be displayed (never happens for text). |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Memory is allocated to hold additional information about |
|
|
* the chunk. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
TkTextCharLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, byteOffset, maxX, maxBytes, |
|
|
noCharsYet, wrapMode, chunkPtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Text widget being layed out. */ |
|
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Index of first character to lay out |
|
|
* (corresponds to segPtr and offset). */ |
|
|
TkTextSegment *segPtr; /* Segment being layed out. */ |
|
|
int byteOffset; /* Byte offset within segment of first |
|
|
* character to consider. */ |
|
|
int maxX; /* Chunk must not occupy pixels at this |
|
|
* position or higher. */ |
|
|
int maxBytes; /* Chunk must not include more than this |
|
|
* many characters. */ |
|
|
int noCharsYet; /* Non-zero means no characters have been |
|
|
* assigned to this display line yet. */ |
|
|
TkWrapMode wrapMode; /* How to handle line wrapping: TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR, |
|
|
* TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, or TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD. */ |
|
|
register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; |
|
|
/* Structure to fill in with information |
|
|
* about this chunk. The x field has already |
|
|
* been set by the caller. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; |
|
|
int nextX, bytesThatFit, count; |
|
|
CharInfo *ciPtr; |
|
|
char *p; |
|
|
TkTextSegment *nextPtr; |
|
|
Tk_FontMetrics fm; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Figure out how many characters will fit in the space we've got. |
|
|
* Include the next character, even though it won't fit completely, |
|
|
* if any of the following is true: |
|
|
* (a) the chunk contains no characters and the display line contains |
|
|
* no characters yet (i.e. the line isn't wide enough to hold |
|
|
* even a single character). |
|
|
* (b) at least one pixel of the character is visible, we haven't |
|
|
* already exceeded the character limit, and the next character |
|
|
* is a white space character. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
p = segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset; |
|
|
tkfont = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont; |
|
|
bytesThatFit = MeasureChars(tkfont, p, maxBytes, chunkPtr->x, maxX, 0, |
|
|
&nextX); |
|
|
if (bytesThatFit < maxBytes) { |
|
|
if ((bytesThatFit == 0) && noCharsYet) { |
|
|
Tcl_UniChar ch; |
|
|
|
|
|
bytesThatFit = MeasureChars(tkfont, p, Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch), |
|
|
chunkPtr->x, -1, 0, &nextX); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((nextX < maxX) && ((p[bytesThatFit] == ' ') |
|
|
|| (p[bytesThatFit] == '\t'))) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Space characters are funny, in that they are considered |
|
|
* to fit if there is at least one pixel of space left on the |
|
|
* line. Just give the space character whatever space is left. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
nextX = maxX; |
|
|
bytesThatFit++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (p[bytesThatFit] == '\n') { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* A newline character takes up no space, so if the previous |
|
|
* character fits then so does the newline. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
bytesThatFit++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (bytesThatFit == 0) { |
|
|
return 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, &fm); |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Fill in the chunk structure and allocate and initialize a |
|
|
* CharInfo structure. If the last character is a newline |
|
|
* then don't bother to display it. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
chunkPtr->displayProc = CharDisplayProc; |
|
|
chunkPtr->undisplayProc = CharUndisplayProc; |
|
|
chunkPtr->measureProc = CharMeasureProc; |
|
|
chunkPtr->bboxProc = CharBboxProc; |
|
|
chunkPtr->numBytes = bytesThatFit; |
|
|
chunkPtr->minAscent = fm.ascent + chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->offset; |
|
|
chunkPtr->minDescent = fm.descent - chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->offset; |
|
|
chunkPtr->minHeight = 0; |
|
|
chunkPtr->width = nextX - chunkPtr->x; |
|
|
chunkPtr->breakIndex = -1; |
|
|
ciPtr = (CharInfo *) ckalloc((unsigned) |
|
|
(sizeof(CharInfo) - 3 + bytesThatFit)); |
|
|
chunkPtr->clientData = (ClientData) ciPtr; |
|
|
ciPtr->numBytes = bytesThatFit; |
|
|
strncpy(ciPtr->chars, p, (size_t) bytesThatFit); |
|
|
if (p[bytesThatFit - 1] == '\n') { |
|
|
ciPtr->numBytes--; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Compute a break location. If we're in word wrap mode, a |
|
|
* break can occur after any space character, or at the end of |
|
|
* the chunk if the next segment (ignoring those with zero size) |
|
|
* is not a character segment. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (wrapMode != TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD) { |
|
|
chunkPtr->breakIndex = chunkPtr->numBytes; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
for (count = bytesThatFit, p += bytesThatFit - 1; count > 0; |
|
|
count--, p--) { |
|
|
if (isspace(UCHAR(*p))) { |
|
|
chunkPtr->breakIndex = count; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((bytesThatFit + byteOffset) == segPtr->size) { |
|
|
for (nextPtr = segPtr->nextPtr; nextPtr != NULL; |
|
|
nextPtr = nextPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if (nextPtr->size != 0) { |
|
|
if (nextPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType) { |
|
|
chunkPtr->breakIndex = chunkPtr->numBytes; |
|
|
} |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
return 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* CharDisplayProc -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called to display a character chunk on |
|
|
* the screen or in an off-screen pixmap. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Graphics are drawn. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
CharDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, height, baseline, display, dst, screenY) |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk that is to be drawn. */ |
|
|
int x; /* X-position in dst at which to |
|
|
* draw this chunk (may differ from |
|
|
* the x-position in the chunk because |
|
|
* of scrolling). */ |
|
|
int y; /* Y-position at which to draw this |
|
|
* chunk in dst. */ |
|
|
int height; /* Total height of line. */ |
|
|
int baseline; /* Offset of baseline from y. */ |
|
|
Display *display; /* Display to use for drawing. */ |
|
|
Drawable dst; /* Pixmap or window in which to draw |
|
|
* chunk. */ |
|
|
int screenY; /* Y-coordinate in text window that |
|
|
* corresponds to y. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
CharInfo *ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData; |
|
|
TextStyle *stylePtr; |
|
|
StyleValues *sValuePtr; |
|
|
int offsetBytes, offsetX; |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((x + chunkPtr->width) <= 0) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The chunk is off-screen. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
stylePtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr; |
|
|
sValuePtr = stylePtr->sValuePtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If the text sticks out way to the left of the window, skip |
|
|
* over the characters that aren't in the visible part of the |
|
|
* window. This is essential if x is very negative (such as |
|
|
* less than 32K); otherwise overflow problems will occur |
|
|
* in servers that use 16-bit arithmetic, like X. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
offsetX = x; |
|
|
offsetBytes = 0; |
|
|
if (x < 0) { |
|
|
offsetBytes = MeasureChars(sValuePtr->tkfont, ciPtr->chars, |
|
|
ciPtr->numBytes, x, 0, x - chunkPtr->x, &offsetX); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Draw the text, underline, and overstrike for this chunk. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (!sValuePtr->elide && (ciPtr->numBytes > offsetBytes) && (stylePtr->fgGC != None)) { |
|
|
int numBytes = ciPtr->numBytes - offsetBytes; |
|
|
char *string = ciPtr->chars + offsetBytes; |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((numBytes > 0) && (string[numBytes - 1] == '\t')) { |
|
|
numBytes--; |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tk_DrawChars(display, dst, stylePtr->fgGC, sValuePtr->tkfont, string, |
|
|
numBytes, offsetX, y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset); |
|
|
if (sValuePtr->underline) { |
|
|
Tk_UnderlineChars(display, dst, stylePtr->fgGC, sValuePtr->tkfont, |
|
|
ciPtr->chars + offsetBytes, offsetX, |
|
|
y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset, 0, numBytes); |
|
|
|
|
|
} |
|
|
if (sValuePtr->overstrike) { |
|
|
Tk_FontMetrics fm; |
|
|
|
|
|
Tk_GetFontMetrics(sValuePtr->tkfont, &fm); |
|
|
Tk_UnderlineChars(display, dst, stylePtr->fgGC, sValuePtr->tkfont, |
|
|
ciPtr->chars + offsetBytes, offsetX, |
|
|
y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset |
|
|
- fm.descent - (fm.ascent * 3) / 10, |
|
|
0, numBytes); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* CharUndisplayProc -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called when a character chunk is no |
|
|
* longer going to be displayed. It frees up resources |
|
|
* that were allocated to display the chunk. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Memory and other resources get freed. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
CharUndisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Overall information about text |
|
|
* widget. */ |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk that is about to be freed. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
CharInfo *ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData; |
|
|
|
|
|
ckfree((char *) ciPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* CharMeasureProc -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called to determine which character in |
|
|
* a character chunk lies over a given x-coordinate. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is the index *within the chunk* of the |
|
|
* character that covers the position given by "x". |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static int |
|
|
CharMeasureProc(chunkPtr, x) |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk containing desired coord. */ |
|
|
int x; /* X-coordinate, in same coordinate |
|
|
* system as chunkPtr->x. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
CharInfo *ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData; |
|
|
int endX; |
|
|
|
|
|
return MeasureChars(chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont, ciPtr->chars, |
|
|
chunkPtr->numBytes - 1, chunkPtr->x, x, 0, &endX); |
|
|
/* CHAR OFFSET */ |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* CharBboxProc -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called to compute the bounding box of |
|
|
* the area occupied by a single character. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* There is no return value. *xPtr and *yPtr are filled in |
|
|
* with the coordinates of the upper left corner of the |
|
|
* character, and *widthPtr and *heightPtr are filled in with |
|
|
* the dimensions of the character in pixels. Note: not all |
|
|
* of the returned bbox is necessarily visible on the screen |
|
|
* (the rightmost part might be off-screen to the right, |
|
|
* and the bottommost part might be off-screen to the bottom). |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
CharBboxProc(chunkPtr, byteIndex, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr, |
|
|
widthPtr, heightPtr) |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk containing desired char. */ |
|
|
int byteIndex; /* Byte offset of desired character |
|
|
* within the chunk. */ |
|
|
int y; /* Topmost pixel in area allocated |
|
|
* for this line. */ |
|
|
int lineHeight; /* Height of line, in pixels. */ |
|
|
int baseline; /* Location of line's baseline, in |
|
|
* pixels measured down from y. */ |
|
|
int *xPtr, *yPtr; /* Gets filled in with coords of |
|
|
* character's upper-left pixel. |
|
|
* X-coord is in same coordinate |
|
|
* system as chunkPtr->x. */ |
|
|
int *widthPtr; /* Gets filled in with width of |
|
|
* character, in pixels. */ |
|
|
int *heightPtr; /* Gets filled in with height of |
|
|
* character, in pixels. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
CharInfo *ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData; |
|
|
int maxX; |
|
|
|
|
|
maxX = chunkPtr->width + chunkPtr->x; |
|
|
MeasureChars(chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont, ciPtr->chars, |
|
|
byteIndex, chunkPtr->x, -1, 0, xPtr); |
|
|
|
|
|
if (byteIndex == ciPtr->numBytes) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* This situation only happens if the last character in a line |
|
|
* is a space character, in which case it absorbs all of the |
|
|
* extra space in the line (see TkTextCharLayoutProc). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
*widthPtr = maxX - *xPtr; |
|
|
} else if ((ciPtr->chars[byteIndex] == '\t') |
|
|
&& (byteIndex == ciPtr->numBytes - 1)) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The desired character is a tab character that terminates a |
|
|
* chunk; give it all the space left in the chunk. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
*widthPtr = maxX - *xPtr; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
MeasureChars(chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont, |
|
|
ciPtr->chars + byteIndex, 1, *xPtr, -1, 0, widthPtr); |
|
|
if (*widthPtr > maxX) { |
|
|
*widthPtr = maxX - *xPtr; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
*widthPtr -= *xPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
*yPtr = y + baseline - chunkPtr->minAscent; |
|
|
*heightPtr = chunkPtr->minAscent + chunkPtr->minDescent; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* AdjustForTab -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called to move a series of chunks right |
|
|
* in order to align them with a tab stop. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The width of chunkPtr gets adjusted so that it absorbs the |
|
|
* extra space due to the tab. The x locations in all the chunks |
|
|
* after chunkPtr are adjusted rightward to align with the tab |
|
|
* stop given by tabArrayPtr and index. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, chunkPtr) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about the text widget as |
|
|
* a whole. */ |
|
|
TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr; /* Information about the tab stops |
|
|
* that apply to this line. May be |
|
|
* NULL to indicate default tabbing |
|
|
* (every 8 chars). */ |
|
|
int index; /* Index of current tab stop. */ |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk whose last character is |
|
|
* the tab; the following chunks |
|
|
* contain information to be shifted |
|
|
* right. */ |
|
|
|
|
|
{ |
|
|
int x, desired, delta, width, decimal, i, gotDigit; |
|
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr2, *decimalChunkPtr; |
|
|
CharInfo *ciPtr; |
|
|
int tabX, prev, spaceWidth; |
|
|
char *p; |
|
|
TkTextTabAlign alignment; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Nothing after the actual tab; just return. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If no tab information has been given, do the usual thing: |
|
|
* round up to the next boundary of 8 average-sized characters. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
x = chunkPtr->nextPtr->x; |
|
|
if ((tabArrayPtr == NULL) || (tabArrayPtr->numTabs == 0)) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* No tab information has been given, so use the default |
|
|
* interpretation of tabs. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
desired = NextTabStop(textPtr->tkfont, x, 0); |
|
|
goto update; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (index < tabArrayPtr->numTabs) { |
|
|
alignment = tabArrayPtr->tabs[index].alignment; |
|
|
tabX = tabArrayPtr->tabs[index].location; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Ran out of tab stops; compute a tab position by extrapolating |
|
|
* from the last two tab positions. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (tabArrayPtr->numTabs > 1) { |
|
|
prev = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-2].location; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
prev = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
alignment = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].alignment; |
|
|
tabX = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].location |
|
|
+ (index + 1 - tabArrayPtr->numTabs) |
|
|
* (tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].location - prev); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (alignment == LEFT) { |
|
|
desired = tabX; |
|
|
goto update; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((alignment == CENTER) || (alignment == RIGHT)) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Compute the width of all the information in the tab group, |
|
|
* then use it to pick a desired location. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
width = 0; |
|
|
for (chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr->nextPtr; chunkPtr2 != NULL; |
|
|
chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr) { |
|
|
width += chunkPtr2->width; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (alignment == CENTER) { |
|
|
desired = tabX - width/2; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
desired = tabX - width; |
|
|
} |
|
|
goto update; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Must be numeric alignment. Search through the text to be |
|
|
* tabbed, looking for the last , or . before the first character |
|
|
* that isn't a number, comma, period, or sign. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
decimalChunkPtr = NULL; |
|
|
decimal = gotDigit = 0; |
|
|
for (chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr->nextPtr; chunkPtr2 != NULL; |
|
|
chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if (chunkPtr2->displayProc != CharDisplayProc) { |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr2->clientData; |
|
|
for (p = ciPtr->chars, i = 0; i < ciPtr->numBytes; p++, i++) { |
|
|
if (isdigit(UCHAR(*p))) { |
|
|
gotDigit = 1; |
|
|
} else if ((*p == '.') || (*p == ',')) { |
|
|
decimal = p-ciPtr->chars; |
|
|
decimalChunkPtr = chunkPtr2; |
|
|
} else if (gotDigit) { |
|
|
if (decimalChunkPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
decimal = p-ciPtr->chars; |
|
|
decimalChunkPtr = chunkPtr2; |
|
|
} |
|
|
goto endOfNumber; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
endOfNumber: |
|
|
if (decimalChunkPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
int curX; |
|
|
|
|
|
ciPtr = (CharInfo *) decimalChunkPtr->clientData; |
|
|
MeasureChars(decimalChunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont, |
|
|
ciPtr->chars, decimal, decimalChunkPtr->x, -1, 0, &curX); |
|
|
desired = tabX - (curX - x); |
|
|
goto update; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* There wasn't a decimal point. Right justify the text. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
width = 0; |
|
|
for (chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr->nextPtr; chunkPtr2 != NULL; |
|
|
chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr) { |
|
|
width += chunkPtr2->width; |
|
|
} |
|
|
desired = tabX - width; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Shift all of the chunks to the right so that the left edge is |
|
|
* at the desired location, then expand the chunk containing the |
|
|
* tab. Be sure that the tab occupies at least the width of a |
|
|
* space character. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
update: |
|
|
delta = desired - x; |
|
|
MeasureChars(textPtr->tkfont, " ", 1, 0, -1, 0, &spaceWidth); |
|
|
if (delta < spaceWidth) { |
|
|
delta = spaceWidth; |
|
|
} |
|
|
for (chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr->nextPtr; chunkPtr2 != NULL; |
|
|
chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr) { |
|
|
chunkPtr2->x += delta; |
|
|
} |
|
|
chunkPtr->width += delta; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* SizeOfTab -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This returns an estimate of the amount of white space that will |
|
|
* be consumed by a tab. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is the minimum number of pixels that will |
|
|
* be occupied by the index'th tab of tabArrayPtr, assuming that |
|
|
* the current position on the line is x and the end of the |
|
|
* line is maxX. For numeric tabs, this is a conservative |
|
|
* estimate. The return value is always >= 0. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static int |
|
|
SizeOfTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, x, maxX) |
|
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about the text widget as |
|
|
* a whole. */ |
|
|
TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr; /* Information about the tab stops |
|
|
* that apply to this line. NULL |
|
|
* means use default tabbing (every |
|
|
* 8 chars.) */ |
|
|
int index; /* Index of current tab stop. */ |
|
|
int x; /* Current x-location in line. Only |
|
|
* used if tabArrayPtr == NULL. */ |
|
|
int maxX; /* X-location of pixel just past the |
|
|
* right edge of the line. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
int tabX, prev, result, spaceWidth; |
|
|
TkTextTabAlign alignment; |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((tabArrayPtr == NULL) || (tabArrayPtr->numTabs == 0)) { |
|
|
tabX = NextTabStop(textPtr->tkfont, x, 0); |
|
|
return tabX - x; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (index < tabArrayPtr->numTabs) { |
|
|
tabX = tabArrayPtr->tabs[index].location; |
|
|
alignment = tabArrayPtr->tabs[index].alignment; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Ran out of tab stops; compute a tab position by extrapolating |
|
|
* from the last two tab positions. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (tabArrayPtr->numTabs > 1) { |
|
|
prev = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-2].location; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
prev = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
tabX = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].location |
|
|
+ (index + 1 - tabArrayPtr->numTabs) |
|
|
* (tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].location - prev); |
|
|
alignment = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].alignment; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (alignment == CENTER) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Be very careful in the arithmetic below, because maxX may |
|
|
* be the largest positive number: watch out for integer |
|
|
* overflow. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((maxX-tabX) < (tabX - x)) { |
|
|
result = (maxX - x) - 2*(maxX - tabX); |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
result = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
goto done; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (alignment == RIGHT) { |
|
|
result = 0; |
|
|
goto done; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Note: this treats NUMERIC alignment the same as LEFT |
|
|
* alignment, which is somewhat conservative. However, it's |
|
|
* pretty tricky at this point to figure out exactly where |
|
|
* the damn decimal point will be. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (tabX > x) { |
|
|
result = tabX - x; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
result = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
done: |
|
|
MeasureChars(textPtr->tkfont, " ", 1, 0, -1, 0, &spaceWidth); |
|
|
if (result < spaceWidth) { |
|
|
result = spaceWidth; |
|
|
} |
|
|
return result; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* NextTabStop -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Given the current position, determine where the next default |
|
|
* tab stop would be located. This procedure is called when the |
|
|
* current chunk in the text has no tabs defined and so the default |
|
|
* tab spacing for the font should be used. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The location in pixels of the next tab stop. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static int |
|
|
NextTabStop(tkfont, x, tabOrigin) |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font in which chunk that contains tab |
|
|
* stop will be drawn. */ |
|
|
int x; /* X-position in pixels where last |
|
|
* character was drawn. The next tab stop |
|
|
* occurs somewhere after this location. */ |
|
|
int tabOrigin; /* The origin for tab stops. May be |
|
|
* non-zero if text has been scrolled. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
int tabWidth, rem; |
|
|
|
|
|
tabWidth = Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, "0", 1) * 8; |
|
|
if (tabWidth == 0) { |
|
|
tabWidth = 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
x += tabWidth; |
|
|
rem = (x - tabOrigin) % tabWidth; |
|
|
if (rem < 0) { |
|
|
rem += tabWidth; |
|
|
} |
|
|
x -= rem; |
|
|
return x; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* MeasureChars -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Determine the number of characters from the string that will fit |
|
|
* in the given horizontal span. The measurement is done under the |
|
|
* assumption that Tk_DrawTextLayout will be used to actually display |
|
|
* the characters. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* If tabs are encountered in the string, they will be expanded |
|
|
* to the next tab stop, unless the TK_IGNORE_TABS flag is specified. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* If a newline is encountered in the string, the line will be |
|
|
* broken at that point, unless the TK_NEWSLINES_NOT_SPECIAL flag |
|
|
* is specified. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is the number of bytes from source |
|
|
* that fit in the span given by startX and maxX. *nextXPtr |
|
|
* is filled in with the x-coordinate at which the first |
|
|
* character that didn't fit would be drawn, if it were to |
|
|
* be drawn. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static int |
|
|
MeasureChars(tkfont, source, maxBytes, startX, maxX, tabOrigin, nextXPtr) |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font in which to draw characters. */ |
|
|
CONST char *source; /* Characters to be displayed. Need not |
|
|
* be NULL-terminated. */ |
|
|
int maxBytes; /* Maximum # of bytes to consider from |
|
|
* source. */ |
|
|
int startX; /* X-position at which first character will |
|
|
* be drawn. */ |
|
|
int maxX; /* Don't consider any character that would |
|
|
* cross this x-position. */ |
|
|
int tabOrigin; /* X-location that serves as "origin" for |
|
|
* tab stops. */ |
|
|
int *nextXPtr; /* Return x-position of terminating |
|
|
* character here. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
int curX, width, ch; |
|
|
CONST char *special, *end, *start; |
|
|
|
|
|
ch = 0; /* lint. */ |
|
|
curX = startX; |
|
|
special = source; |
|
|
end = source + maxBytes; |
|
|
for (start = source; start < end; ) { |
|
|
if (start >= special) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the next special character in the string. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
for (special = start; special < end; special++) { |
|
|
ch = *special; |
|
|
if ((ch == '\t') || (ch == '\n')) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Special points at the next special character (or the end of the |
|
|
* string). Process characters between start and special. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((maxX >= 0) && (curX >= maxX)) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
start += Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, start, special - start, maxX - curX, |
|
|
0, &width); |
|
|
curX += width; |
|
|
if (start < special) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* No more chars fit in line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (special < end) { |
|
|
if (ch == '\t') { |
|
|
start++; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
*nextXPtr = curX; |
|
|
return start - source; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* $History: tkTextDisp.c $ |
|
|
* |
|
|
* ***************** Version 1 ***************** |
|
|
* User: Dtashley Date: 1/02/01 Time: 3:07a |
|
|
* Created in $/IjuScripter, IjuConsole/Source/Tk Base |
|
|
* Initial check-in. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* End of TKTEXTDISP.C */ |
|
| 1 |
|
/* $Header$ */ |
| 2 |
|
|
| 3 |
|
/* |
| 4 |
|
* tkTextDisp.c -- |
| 5 |
|
* |
| 6 |
|
* This module provides facilities to display text widgets. It is |
| 7 |
|
* the only place where information is kept about the screen layout |
| 8 |
|
* of text widgets. |
| 9 |
|
* |
| 10 |
|
* Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California. |
| 11 |
|
* Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. |
| 12 |
|
* |
| 13 |
|
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution |
| 14 |
|
* of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
| 15 |
|
* |
| 16 |
|
* RCS: @(#) $Id: tktextdisp.c,v 1.1.1.1 2001/06/13 05:10:16 dtashley Exp $ |
| 17 |
|
*/ |
| 18 |
|
|
| 19 |
|
#include "tkPort.h" |
| 20 |
|
#include "tkInt.h" |
| 21 |
|
#include "tkText.h" |
| 22 |
|
|
| 23 |
|
#ifdef __WIN32__ |
| 24 |
|
#include "tkWinInt.h" |
| 25 |
|
#endif |
| 26 |
|
|
| 27 |
|
/* |
| 28 |
|
* The following structure describes how to display a range of characters. |
| 29 |
|
* The information is generated by scanning all of the tags associated |
| 30 |
|
* with the characters and combining that with default information for |
| 31 |
|
* the overall widget. These structures form the hash keys for |
| 32 |
|
* dInfoPtr->styleTable. |
| 33 |
|
*/ |
| 34 |
|
|
| 35 |
|
typedef struct StyleValues { |
| 36 |
|
Tk_3DBorder border; /* Used for drawing background under text. |
| 37 |
|
* NULL means use widget background. */ |
| 38 |
|
int borderWidth; /* Width of 3-D border for background. */ |
| 39 |
|
int relief; /* 3-D relief for background. */ |
| 40 |
|
Pixmap bgStipple; /* Stipple bitmap for background. None |
| 41 |
|
* means draw solid. */ |
| 42 |
|
XColor *fgColor; /* Foreground color for text. */ |
| 43 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font for displaying text. */ |
| 44 |
|
Pixmap fgStipple; /* Stipple bitmap for text and other |
| 45 |
|
* foreground stuff. None means draw |
| 46 |
|
* solid.*/ |
| 47 |
|
int justify; /* Justification style for text. */ |
| 48 |
|
int lMargin1; /* Left margin, in pixels, for first display |
| 49 |
|
* line of each text line. */ |
| 50 |
|
int lMargin2; /* Left margin, in pixels, for second and |
| 51 |
|
* later display lines of each text line. */ |
| 52 |
|
int offset; /* Offset in pixels of baseline, relative to |
| 53 |
|
* baseline of line. */ |
| 54 |
|
int overstrike; /* Non-zero means draw overstrike through |
| 55 |
|
* text. */ |
| 56 |
|
int rMargin; /* Right margin, in pixels. */ |
| 57 |
|
int spacing1; /* Spacing above first dline in text line. */ |
| 58 |
|
int spacing2; /* Spacing between lines of dline. */ |
| 59 |
|
int spacing3; /* Spacing below last dline in text line. */ |
| 60 |
|
TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr;/* Locations and types of tab stops (may |
| 61 |
|
* be NULL). */ |
| 62 |
|
int underline; /* Non-zero means draw underline underneath |
| 63 |
|
* text. */ |
| 64 |
|
int elide; /* Non-zero means draw text */ |
| 65 |
|
TkWrapMode wrapMode; /* How to handle wrap-around for this tag. |
| 66 |
|
* One of TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR, |
| 67 |
|
* TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE or TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD.*/ |
| 68 |
|
} StyleValues; |
| 69 |
|
|
| 70 |
|
/* |
| 71 |
|
* The following structure extends the StyleValues structure above with |
| 72 |
|
* graphics contexts used to actually draw the characters. The entries |
| 73 |
|
* in dInfoPtr->styleTable point to structures of this type. |
| 74 |
|
*/ |
| 75 |
|
|
| 76 |
|
typedef struct TextStyle { |
| 77 |
|
int refCount; /* Number of times this structure is |
| 78 |
|
* referenced in Chunks. */ |
| 79 |
|
GC bgGC; /* Graphics context for background. None |
| 80 |
|
* means use widget background. */ |
| 81 |
|
GC fgGC; /* Graphics context for foreground. */ |
| 82 |
|
StyleValues *sValuePtr; /* Raw information from which GCs were |
| 83 |
|
* derived. */ |
| 84 |
|
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr; /* Pointer to entry in styleTable. Used |
| 85 |
|
* to delete entry. */ |
| 86 |
|
} TextStyle; |
| 87 |
|
|
| 88 |
|
/* |
| 89 |
|
* The following macro determines whether two styles have the same |
| 90 |
|
* background so that, for example, no beveled border should be drawn |
| 91 |
|
* between them. |
| 92 |
|
*/ |
| 93 |
|
|
| 94 |
|
#define SAME_BACKGROUND(s1, s2) \ |
| 95 |
|
(((s1)->sValuePtr->border == (s2)->sValuePtr->border) \ |
| 96 |
|
&& ((s1)->sValuePtr->borderWidth == (s2)->sValuePtr->borderWidth) \ |
| 97 |
|
&& ((s1)->sValuePtr->relief == (s2)->sValuePtr->relief) \ |
| 98 |
|
&& ((s1)->sValuePtr->bgStipple == (s2)->sValuePtr->bgStipple)) |
| 99 |
|
|
| 100 |
|
/* |
| 101 |
|
* The following structure describes one line of the display, which may |
| 102 |
|
* be either part or all of one line of the text. |
| 103 |
|
*/ |
| 104 |
|
|
| 105 |
|
typedef struct DLine { |
| 106 |
|
TkTextIndex index; /* Identifies first character in text |
| 107 |
|
* that is displayed on this line. */ |
| 108 |
|
int byteCount; /* Number of bytes accounted for by this |
| 109 |
|
* display line, including a trailing space |
| 110 |
|
* or newline that isn't actually displayed. */ |
| 111 |
|
int y; /* Y-position at which line is supposed to |
| 112 |
|
* be drawn (topmost pixel of rectangular |
| 113 |
|
* area occupied by line). */ |
| 114 |
|
int oldY; /* Y-position at which line currently |
| 115 |
|
* appears on display. -1 means line isn't |
| 116 |
|
* currently visible on display and must be |
| 117 |
|
* redrawn. This is used to move lines by |
| 118 |
|
* scrolling rather than re-drawing. */ |
| 119 |
|
int height; /* Height of line, in pixels. */ |
| 120 |
|
int baseline; /* Offset of text baseline from y, in |
| 121 |
|
* pixels. */ |
| 122 |
|
int spaceAbove; /* How much extra space was added to the |
| 123 |
|
* top of the line because of spacing |
| 124 |
|
* options. This is included in height |
| 125 |
|
* and baseline. */ |
| 126 |
|
int spaceBelow; /* How much extra space was added to the |
| 127 |
|
* bottom of the line because of spacing |
| 128 |
|
* options. This is included in height. */ |
| 129 |
|
int length; /* Total length of line, in pixels. */ |
| 130 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Pointer to first chunk in list of all |
| 131 |
|
* of those that are displayed on this |
| 132 |
|
* line of the screen. */ |
| 133 |
|
struct DLine *nextPtr; /* Next in list of all display lines for |
| 134 |
|
* this window. The list is sorted in |
| 135 |
|
* order from top to bottom. Note: the |
| 136 |
|
* next DLine doesn't always correspond |
| 137 |
|
* to the next line of text: (a) can have |
| 138 |
|
* multiple DLines for one text line, and |
| 139 |
|
* (b) can have gaps where DLine's have been |
| 140 |
|
* deleted because they're out of date. */ |
| 141 |
|
int flags; /* Various flag bits: see below for values. */ |
| 142 |
|
} DLine; |
| 143 |
|
|
| 144 |
|
/* |
| 145 |
|
* Flag bits for DLine structures: |
| 146 |
|
* |
| 147 |
|
* HAS_3D_BORDER - Non-zero means that at least one of the |
| 148 |
|
* chunks in this line has a 3D border, so |
| 149 |
|
* it potentially interacts with 3D borders |
| 150 |
|
* in neighboring lines (see |
| 151 |
|
* DisplayLineBackground). |
| 152 |
|
* NEW_LAYOUT - Non-zero means that the line has been |
| 153 |
|
* re-layed out since the last time the |
| 154 |
|
* display was updated. |
| 155 |
|
* TOP_LINE - Non-zero means that this was the top line |
| 156 |
|
* in the window the last time that the window |
| 157 |
|
* was laid out. This is important because |
| 158 |
|
* a line may be displayed differently if its |
| 159 |
|
* at the top or bottom than if it's in the |
| 160 |
|
* middle (e.g. beveled edges aren't displayed |
| 161 |
|
* for middle lines if the adjacent line has |
| 162 |
|
* a similar background). |
| 163 |
|
* BOTTOM_LINE - Non-zero means that this was the bottom line |
| 164 |
|
* in the window the last time that the window |
| 165 |
|
* was laid out. |
| 166 |
|
* IS_DISABLED - This Dline cannot be edited. |
| 167 |
|
*/ |
| 168 |
|
|
| 169 |
|
#define HAS_3D_BORDER 1 |
| 170 |
|
#define NEW_LAYOUT 2 |
| 171 |
|
#define TOP_LINE 4 |
| 172 |
|
#define BOTTOM_LINE 8 |
| 173 |
|
#define IS_DISABLED 16 |
| 174 |
|
|
| 175 |
|
/* |
| 176 |
|
* Overall display information for a text widget: |
| 177 |
|
*/ |
| 178 |
|
|
| 179 |
|
typedef struct TextDInfo { |
| 180 |
|
Tcl_HashTable styleTable; /* Hash table that maps from StyleValues |
| 181 |
|
* to TextStyles for this widget. */ |
| 182 |
|
DLine *dLinePtr; /* First in list of all display lines for |
| 183 |
|
* this widget, in order from top to bottom. */ |
| 184 |
|
GC copyGC; /* Graphics context for copying from off- |
| 185 |
|
* screen pixmaps onto screen. */ |
| 186 |
|
GC scrollGC; /* Graphics context for copying from one place |
| 187 |
|
* in the window to another (scrolling): |
| 188 |
|
* differs from copyGC in that we need to get |
| 189 |
|
* GraphicsExpose events. */ |
| 190 |
|
int x; /* First x-coordinate that may be used for |
| 191 |
|
* actually displaying line information. |
| 192 |
|
* Leaves space for border, etc. */ |
| 193 |
|
int y; /* First y-coordinate that may be used for |
| 194 |
|
* actually displaying line information. |
| 195 |
|
* Leaves space for border, etc. */ |
| 196 |
|
int maxX; /* First x-coordinate to right of available |
| 197 |
|
* space for displaying lines. */ |
| 198 |
|
int maxY; /* First y-coordinate below available |
| 199 |
|
* space for displaying lines. */ |
| 200 |
|
int topOfEof; /* Top-most pixel (lowest y-value) that has |
| 201 |
|
* been drawn in the appropriate fashion for |
| 202 |
|
* the portion of the window after the last |
| 203 |
|
* line of the text. This field is used to |
| 204 |
|
* figure out when to redraw part or all of |
| 205 |
|
* the eof field. */ |
| 206 |
|
|
| 207 |
|
/* |
| 208 |
|
* Information used for scrolling: |
| 209 |
|
*/ |
| 210 |
|
|
| 211 |
|
int newByteOffset; /* Desired x scroll position, measured as the |
| 212 |
|
* number of average-size characters off-screen |
| 213 |
|
* to the left for a line with no left |
| 214 |
|
* margin. */ |
| 215 |
|
int curPixelOffset; /* Actual x scroll position, measured as the |
| 216 |
|
* number of pixels off-screen to the left. */ |
| 217 |
|
int maxLength; /* Length in pixels of longest line that's |
| 218 |
|
* visible in window (length may exceed window |
| 219 |
|
* size). If there's no wrapping, this will |
| 220 |
|
* be zero. */ |
| 221 |
|
double xScrollFirst, xScrollLast; |
| 222 |
|
/* Most recent values reported to horizontal |
| 223 |
|
* scrollbar; used to eliminate unnecessary |
| 224 |
|
* reports. */ |
| 225 |
|
double yScrollFirst, yScrollLast; |
| 226 |
|
/* Most recent values reported to vertical |
| 227 |
|
* scrollbar; used to eliminate unnecessary |
| 228 |
|
* reports. */ |
| 229 |
|
|
| 230 |
|
/* |
| 231 |
|
* The following information is used to implement scanning: |
| 232 |
|
*/ |
| 233 |
|
|
| 234 |
|
int scanMarkIndex; /* Byte index of character that was at the |
| 235 |
|
* left edge of the window when the scan |
| 236 |
|
* started. */ |
| 237 |
|
int scanMarkX; /* X-position of mouse at time scan started. */ |
| 238 |
|
int scanTotalScroll; /* Total scrolling (in screen lines) that has |
| 239 |
|
* occurred since scanMarkY was set. */ |
| 240 |
|
int scanMarkY; /* Y-position of mouse at time scan started. */ |
| 241 |
|
|
| 242 |
|
/* |
| 243 |
|
* Miscellaneous information: |
| 244 |
|
*/ |
| 245 |
|
|
| 246 |
|
int dLinesInvalidated; /* This value is set to 1 whenever something |
| 247 |
|
* happens that invalidates information in |
| 248 |
|
* DLine structures; if a redisplay |
| 249 |
|
* is in progress, it will see this and |
| 250 |
|
* abort the redisplay. This is needed |
| 251 |
|
* because, for example, an embedded window |
| 252 |
|
* could change its size when it is first |
| 253 |
|
* displayed, invalidating the DLine that |
| 254 |
|
* is currently being displayed. If redisplay |
| 255 |
|
* continues, it will use freed memory and |
| 256 |
|
* could dump core. */ |
| 257 |
|
int flags; /* Various flag values: see below for |
| 258 |
|
* definitions. */ |
| 259 |
|
} TextDInfo; |
| 260 |
|
|
| 261 |
|
/* |
| 262 |
|
* In TkTextDispChunk structures for character segments, the clientData |
| 263 |
|
* field points to one of the following structures: |
| 264 |
|
*/ |
| 265 |
|
|
| 266 |
|
typedef struct CharInfo { |
| 267 |
|
int numBytes; /* Number of bytes to display. */ |
| 268 |
|
char chars[4]; /* UTF characters to display. Actual size |
| 269 |
|
* will be numBytes, not 4. THIS MUST BE |
| 270 |
|
* THE LAST FIELD IN THE STRUCTURE. */ |
| 271 |
|
} CharInfo; |
| 272 |
|
|
| 273 |
|
/* |
| 274 |
|
* Flag values for TextDInfo structures: |
| 275 |
|
* |
| 276 |
|
* DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE: Non-zero means that the DLine structures |
| 277 |
|
* for this window are partially or completely |
| 278 |
|
* out of date and need to be recomputed. |
| 279 |
|
* REDRAW_PENDING: Means that a when-idle handler has been |
| 280 |
|
* scheduled to update the display. |
| 281 |
|
* REDRAW_BORDERS: Means window border or pad area has |
| 282 |
|
* potentially been damaged and must be redrawn. |
| 283 |
|
* REPICK_NEEDED: 1 means that the widget has been modified |
| 284 |
|
* in a way that could change the current |
| 285 |
|
* character (a different character might be |
| 286 |
|
* under the mouse cursor now). Need to |
| 287 |
|
* recompute the current character before |
| 288 |
|
* the next redisplay. |
| 289 |
|
*/ |
| 290 |
|
|
| 291 |
|
#define DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE 1 |
| 292 |
|
#define REDRAW_PENDING 2 |
| 293 |
|
#define REDRAW_BORDERS 4 |
| 294 |
|
#define REPICK_NEEDED 8 |
| 295 |
|
|
| 296 |
|
/* |
| 297 |
|
* The following counters keep statistics about redisplay that can be |
| 298 |
|
* checked to see how clever this code is at reducing redisplays. |
| 299 |
|
*/ |
| 300 |
|
|
| 301 |
|
static int numRedisplays; /* Number of calls to DisplayText. */ |
| 302 |
|
static int linesRedrawn; /* Number of calls to DisplayDLine. */ |
| 303 |
|
static int numCopies; /* Number of calls to XCopyArea to copy part |
| 304 |
|
* of the screen. */ |
| 305 |
|
|
| 306 |
|
/* |
| 307 |
|
* Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file: |
| 308 |
|
*/ |
| 309 |
|
|
| 310 |
|
static void AdjustForTab _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
| 311 |
|
TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr, int index, |
| 312 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr)); |
| 313 |
|
static void CharBboxProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, |
| 314 |
|
int index, int y, int lineHeight, int baseline, |
| 315 |
|
int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, |
| 316 |
|
int *heightPtr)); |
| 317 |
|
static void CharDisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, |
| 318 |
|
int x, int y, int height, int baseline, |
| 319 |
|
Display *display, Drawable dst, int screenY)); |
| 320 |
|
static int CharMeasureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, |
| 321 |
|
int x)); |
| 322 |
|
static void CharUndisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
| 323 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr)); |
| 324 |
|
|
| 325 |
|
/* |
| 326 |
|
Definitions of elided procs. |
| 327 |
|
Compiler can't inline these since we use pointers to these functions. |
| 328 |
|
ElideDisplayProc, ElideUndisplayProc special-cased for speed, |
| 329 |
|
as potentially many elided DLine chunks if large, tag toggle-filled |
| 330 |
|
elided region. |
| 331 |
|
*/ |
| 332 |
|
static void ElideBboxProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, |
| 333 |
|
int index, int y, int lineHeight, int baseline, |
| 334 |
|
int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, |
| 335 |
|
int *heightPtr)); |
| 336 |
|
static int ElideMeasureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, |
| 337 |
|
int x)); |
| 338 |
|
|
| 339 |
|
static void DisplayDLine _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
| 340 |
|
DLine *dlPtr, DLine *prevPtr, Pixmap pixmap)); |
| 341 |
|
static void DisplayLineBackground _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
| 342 |
|
DLine *dlPtr, DLine *prevPtr, Pixmap pixmap)); |
| 343 |
|
static void DisplayText _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData)); |
| 344 |
|
static DLine * FindDLine _ANSI_ARGS_((DLine *dlPtr, |
| 345 |
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr)); |
| 346 |
|
static void FreeDLines _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
| 347 |
|
DLine *firstPtr, DLine *lastPtr, int unlink)); |
| 348 |
|
static void FreeStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
| 349 |
|
TextStyle *stylePtr)); |
| 350 |
|
static TextStyle * GetStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
| 351 |
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr)); |
| 352 |
|
static void GetXView _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
| 353 |
|
TkText *textPtr, int report)); |
| 354 |
|
static void GetYView _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
| 355 |
|
TkText *textPtr, int report)); |
| 356 |
|
static DLine * LayoutDLine _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
| 357 |
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr)); |
| 358 |
|
static int MeasureChars _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font tkfont, |
| 359 |
|
CONST char *source, int maxBytes, int startX, |
| 360 |
|
int maxX, int tabOrigin, int *nextXPtr)); |
| 361 |
|
static void MeasureUp _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
| 362 |
|
TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int distance, |
| 363 |
|
TkTextIndex *dstPtr)); |
| 364 |
|
static int NextTabStop _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font tkfont, int x, |
| 365 |
|
int tabOrigin)); |
| 366 |
|
static void UpdateDisplayInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr)); |
| 367 |
|
static void ScrollByLines _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
| 368 |
|
int offset)); |
| 369 |
|
static int SizeOfTab _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
| 370 |
|
TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr, int index, int x, |
| 371 |
|
int maxX)); |
| 372 |
|
static void TextInvalidateRegion _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, |
| 373 |
|
TkRegion region)); |
| 374 |
|
|
| 375 |
|
|
| 376 |
|
/* |
| 377 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 378 |
|
* |
| 379 |
|
* TkTextCreateDInfo -- |
| 380 |
|
* |
| 381 |
|
* This procedure is called when a new text widget is created. |
| 382 |
|
* Its job is to set up display-related information for the widget. |
| 383 |
|
* |
| 384 |
|
* Results: |
| 385 |
|
* None. |
| 386 |
|
* |
| 387 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 388 |
|
* A TextDInfo data structure is allocated and initialized and attached |
| 389 |
|
* to textPtr. |
| 390 |
|
* |
| 391 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 392 |
|
*/ |
| 393 |
|
|
| 394 |
|
void |
| 395 |
|
TkTextCreateDInfo(textPtr) |
| 396 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Overall information for text widget. */ |
| 397 |
|
{ |
| 398 |
|
register TextDInfo *dInfoPtr; |
| 399 |
|
XGCValues gcValues; |
| 400 |
|
|
| 401 |
|
dInfoPtr = (TextDInfo *) ckalloc(sizeof(TextDInfo)); |
| 402 |
|
Tcl_InitHashTable(&dInfoPtr->styleTable, sizeof(StyleValues)/sizeof(int)); |
| 403 |
|
dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = NULL; |
| 404 |
|
dInfoPtr->copyGC = None; |
| 405 |
|
gcValues.graphics_exposures = True; |
| 406 |
|
dInfoPtr->scrollGC = Tk_GetGC(textPtr->tkwin, GCGraphicsExposures, |
| 407 |
|
&gcValues); |
| 408 |
|
dInfoPtr->topOfEof = 0; |
| 409 |
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = 0; |
| 410 |
|
dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset = 0; |
| 411 |
|
dInfoPtr->maxLength = 0; |
| 412 |
|
dInfoPtr->xScrollFirst = -1; |
| 413 |
|
dInfoPtr->xScrollLast = -1; |
| 414 |
|
dInfoPtr->yScrollFirst = -1; |
| 415 |
|
dInfoPtr->yScrollLast = -1; |
| 416 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex = 0; |
| 417 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkX = 0; |
| 418 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll = 0; |
| 419 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkY = 0; |
| 420 |
|
dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated = 0; |
| 421 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags = DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE; |
| 422 |
|
textPtr->dInfoPtr = dInfoPtr; |
| 423 |
|
} |
| 424 |
|
|
| 425 |
|
/* |
| 426 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 427 |
|
* |
| 428 |
|
* TkTextFreeDInfo -- |
| 429 |
|
* |
| 430 |
|
* This procedure is called to free up all of the private display |
| 431 |
|
* information kept by this file for a text widget. |
| 432 |
|
* |
| 433 |
|
* Results: |
| 434 |
|
* None. |
| 435 |
|
* |
| 436 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 437 |
|
* Lots of resources get freed. |
| 438 |
|
* |
| 439 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 440 |
|
*/ |
| 441 |
|
|
| 442 |
|
void |
| 443 |
|
TkTextFreeDInfo(textPtr) |
| 444 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Overall information for text widget. */ |
| 445 |
|
{ |
| 446 |
|
register TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 447 |
|
|
| 448 |
|
/* |
| 449 |
|
* Be careful to free up styleTable *after* freeing up all the |
| 450 |
|
* DLines, so that the hash table is still intact to free up the |
| 451 |
|
* style-related information from the lines. Once the lines are |
| 452 |
|
* all free then styleTable will be empty. |
| 453 |
|
*/ |
| 454 |
|
|
| 455 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, (DLine *) NULL, 1); |
| 456 |
|
Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&dInfoPtr->styleTable); |
| 457 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->copyGC != None) { |
| 458 |
|
Tk_FreeGC(textPtr->display, dInfoPtr->copyGC); |
| 459 |
|
} |
| 460 |
|
Tk_FreeGC(textPtr->display, dInfoPtr->scrollGC); |
| 461 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) { |
| 462 |
|
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
| 463 |
|
} |
| 464 |
|
ckfree((char *) dInfoPtr); |
| 465 |
|
} |
| 466 |
|
|
| 467 |
|
/* |
| 468 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 469 |
|
* |
| 470 |
|
* GetStyle -- |
| 471 |
|
* |
| 472 |
|
* This procedure creates all the information needed to display |
| 473 |
|
* text at a particular location. |
| 474 |
|
* |
| 475 |
|
* Results: |
| 476 |
|
* The return value is a pointer to a TextStyle structure that |
| 477 |
|
* corresponds to *sValuePtr. |
| 478 |
|
* |
| 479 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 480 |
|
* A new entry may be created in the style table for the widget. |
| 481 |
|
* |
| 482 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 483 |
|
*/ |
| 484 |
|
|
| 485 |
|
static TextStyle * |
| 486 |
|
GetStyle(textPtr, indexPtr) |
| 487 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Overall information about text widget. */ |
| 488 |
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* The character in the text for which |
| 489 |
|
* display information is wanted. */ |
| 490 |
|
{ |
| 491 |
|
TkTextTag **tagPtrs; |
| 492 |
|
register TkTextTag *tagPtr; |
| 493 |
|
StyleValues styleValues; |
| 494 |
|
TextStyle *stylePtr; |
| 495 |
|
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr; |
| 496 |
|
int numTags, new, i; |
| 497 |
|
XGCValues gcValues; |
| 498 |
|
unsigned long mask; |
| 499 |
|
|
| 500 |
|
/* |
| 501 |
|
* The variables below keep track of the highest-priority specification |
| 502 |
|
* that has occurred for each of the various fields of the StyleValues. |
| 503 |
|
*/ |
| 504 |
|
|
| 505 |
|
int borderPrio, borderWidthPrio, reliefPrio, bgStipplePrio; |
| 506 |
|
int fgPrio, fontPrio, fgStipplePrio; |
| 507 |
|
int underlinePrio, elidePrio, justifyPrio, offsetPrio; |
| 508 |
|
int lMargin1Prio, lMargin2Prio, rMarginPrio; |
| 509 |
|
int spacing1Prio, spacing2Prio, spacing3Prio; |
| 510 |
|
int overstrikePrio, tabPrio, wrapPrio; |
| 511 |
|
|
| 512 |
|
/* |
| 513 |
|
* Find out what tags are present for the character, then compute |
| 514 |
|
* a StyleValues structure corresponding to those tags (scan |
| 515 |
|
* through all of the tags, saving information for the highest- |
| 516 |
|
* priority tag). |
| 517 |
|
*/ |
| 518 |
|
|
| 519 |
|
tagPtrs = TkBTreeGetTags(indexPtr, &numTags); |
| 520 |
|
borderPrio = borderWidthPrio = reliefPrio = bgStipplePrio = -1; |
| 521 |
|
fgPrio = fontPrio = fgStipplePrio = -1; |
| 522 |
|
underlinePrio = elidePrio = justifyPrio = offsetPrio = -1; |
| 523 |
|
lMargin1Prio = lMargin2Prio = rMarginPrio = -1; |
| 524 |
|
spacing1Prio = spacing2Prio = spacing3Prio = -1; |
| 525 |
|
overstrikePrio = tabPrio = wrapPrio = -1; |
| 526 |
|
memset((VOID *) &styleValues, 0, sizeof(StyleValues)); |
| 527 |
|
styleValues.relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT; |
| 528 |
|
styleValues.fgColor = textPtr->fgColor; |
| 529 |
|
styleValues.tkfont = textPtr->tkfont; |
| 530 |
|
styleValues.justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT; |
| 531 |
|
styleValues.spacing1 = textPtr->spacing1; |
| 532 |
|
styleValues.spacing2 = textPtr->spacing2; |
| 533 |
|
styleValues.spacing3 = textPtr->spacing3; |
| 534 |
|
styleValues.tabArrayPtr = textPtr->tabArrayPtr; |
| 535 |
|
styleValues.wrapMode = textPtr->wrapMode; |
| 536 |
|
styleValues.elide = 0; |
| 537 |
|
for (i = 0 ; i < numTags; i++) { |
| 538 |
|
tagPtr = tagPtrs[i]; |
| 539 |
|
|
| 540 |
|
/* |
| 541 |
|
* On Windows and Mac, we need to skip the selection tag if |
| 542 |
|
* we don't have focus. |
| 543 |
|
*/ |
| 544 |
|
|
| 545 |
|
#ifndef ALWAYS_SHOW_SELECTION |
| 546 |
|
if ((tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) && !(textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) { |
| 547 |
|
continue; |
| 548 |
|
} |
| 549 |
|
#endif |
| 550 |
|
|
| 551 |
|
if ((tagPtr->border != NULL) && (tagPtr->priority > borderPrio)) { |
| 552 |
|
styleValues.border = tagPtr->border; |
| 553 |
|
borderPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 554 |
|
} |
| 555 |
|
if ((tagPtr->bdString != NULL) |
| 556 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > borderWidthPrio)) { |
| 557 |
|
styleValues.borderWidth = tagPtr->borderWidth; |
| 558 |
|
borderWidthPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 559 |
|
} |
| 560 |
|
if ((tagPtr->reliefString != NULL) |
| 561 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > reliefPrio)) { |
| 562 |
|
if (styleValues.border == NULL) { |
| 563 |
|
styleValues.border = textPtr->border; |
| 564 |
|
} |
| 565 |
|
styleValues.relief = tagPtr->relief; |
| 566 |
|
reliefPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 567 |
|
} |
| 568 |
|
if ((tagPtr->bgStipple != None) |
| 569 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > bgStipplePrio)) { |
| 570 |
|
styleValues.bgStipple = tagPtr->bgStipple; |
| 571 |
|
bgStipplePrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 572 |
|
} |
| 573 |
|
if ((tagPtr->fgColor != None) && (tagPtr->priority > fgPrio)) { |
| 574 |
|
styleValues.fgColor = tagPtr->fgColor; |
| 575 |
|
fgPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 576 |
|
} |
| 577 |
|
if ((tagPtr->tkfont != None) && (tagPtr->priority > fontPrio)) { |
| 578 |
|
styleValues.tkfont = tagPtr->tkfont; |
| 579 |
|
fontPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 580 |
|
} |
| 581 |
|
if ((tagPtr->fgStipple != None) |
| 582 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > fgStipplePrio)) { |
| 583 |
|
styleValues.fgStipple = tagPtr->fgStipple; |
| 584 |
|
fgStipplePrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 585 |
|
} |
| 586 |
|
if ((tagPtr->justifyString != NULL) |
| 587 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > justifyPrio)) { |
| 588 |
|
styleValues.justify = tagPtr->justify; |
| 589 |
|
justifyPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 590 |
|
} |
| 591 |
|
if ((tagPtr->lMargin1String != NULL) |
| 592 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > lMargin1Prio)) { |
| 593 |
|
styleValues.lMargin1 = tagPtr->lMargin1; |
| 594 |
|
lMargin1Prio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 595 |
|
} |
| 596 |
|
if ((tagPtr->lMargin2String != NULL) |
| 597 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > lMargin2Prio)) { |
| 598 |
|
styleValues.lMargin2 = tagPtr->lMargin2; |
| 599 |
|
lMargin2Prio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 600 |
|
} |
| 601 |
|
if ((tagPtr->offsetString != NULL) |
| 602 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > offsetPrio)) { |
| 603 |
|
styleValues.offset = tagPtr->offset; |
| 604 |
|
offsetPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 605 |
|
} |
| 606 |
|
if ((tagPtr->overstrikeString != NULL) |
| 607 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > overstrikePrio)) { |
| 608 |
|
styleValues.overstrike = tagPtr->overstrike; |
| 609 |
|
overstrikePrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 610 |
|
} |
| 611 |
|
if ((tagPtr->rMarginString != NULL) |
| 612 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > rMarginPrio)) { |
| 613 |
|
styleValues.rMargin = tagPtr->rMargin; |
| 614 |
|
rMarginPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 615 |
|
} |
| 616 |
|
if ((tagPtr->spacing1String != NULL) |
| 617 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > spacing1Prio)) { |
| 618 |
|
styleValues.spacing1 = tagPtr->spacing1; |
| 619 |
|
spacing1Prio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 620 |
|
} |
| 621 |
|
if ((tagPtr->spacing2String != NULL) |
| 622 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > spacing2Prio)) { |
| 623 |
|
styleValues.spacing2 = tagPtr->spacing2; |
| 624 |
|
spacing2Prio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 625 |
|
} |
| 626 |
|
if ((tagPtr->spacing3String != NULL) |
| 627 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > spacing3Prio)) { |
| 628 |
|
styleValues.spacing3 = tagPtr->spacing3; |
| 629 |
|
spacing3Prio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 630 |
|
} |
| 631 |
|
if ((tagPtr->tabString != NULL) |
| 632 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > tabPrio)) { |
| 633 |
|
styleValues.tabArrayPtr = tagPtr->tabArrayPtr; |
| 634 |
|
tabPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 635 |
|
} |
| 636 |
|
if ((tagPtr->underlineString != NULL) |
| 637 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > underlinePrio)) { |
| 638 |
|
styleValues.underline = tagPtr->underline; |
| 639 |
|
underlinePrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 640 |
|
} |
| 641 |
|
if ((tagPtr->elideString != NULL) |
| 642 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > elidePrio)) { |
| 643 |
|
styleValues.elide = tagPtr->elide; |
| 644 |
|
elidePrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 645 |
|
} |
| 646 |
|
if ((tagPtr->wrapMode != TEXT_WRAPMODE_NULL) |
| 647 |
|
&& (tagPtr->priority > wrapPrio)) { |
| 648 |
|
styleValues.wrapMode = tagPtr->wrapMode; |
| 649 |
|
wrapPrio = tagPtr->priority; |
| 650 |
|
} |
| 651 |
|
} |
| 652 |
|
if (tagPtrs != NULL) { |
| 653 |
|
ckfree((char *) tagPtrs); |
| 654 |
|
} |
| 655 |
|
|
| 656 |
|
/* |
| 657 |
|
* Use an existing style if there's one around that matches. |
| 658 |
|
*/ |
| 659 |
|
|
| 660 |
|
hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->dInfoPtr->styleTable, |
| 661 |
|
(char *) &styleValues, &new); |
| 662 |
|
if (!new) { |
| 663 |
|
stylePtr = (TextStyle *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr); |
| 664 |
|
stylePtr->refCount++; |
| 665 |
|
return stylePtr; |
| 666 |
|
} |
| 667 |
|
|
| 668 |
|
/* |
| 669 |
|
* No existing style matched. Make a new one. |
| 670 |
|
*/ |
| 671 |
|
|
| 672 |
|
stylePtr = (TextStyle *) ckalloc(sizeof(TextStyle)); |
| 673 |
|
stylePtr->refCount = 1; |
| 674 |
|
if (styleValues.border != NULL) { |
| 675 |
|
gcValues.foreground = Tk_3DBorderColor(styleValues.border)->pixel; |
| 676 |
|
mask = GCForeground; |
| 677 |
|
if (styleValues.bgStipple != None) { |
| 678 |
|
gcValues.stipple = styleValues.bgStipple; |
| 679 |
|
gcValues.fill_style = FillStippled; |
| 680 |
|
mask |= GCStipple|GCFillStyle; |
| 681 |
|
} |
| 682 |
|
stylePtr->bgGC = Tk_GetGC(textPtr->tkwin, mask, &gcValues); |
| 683 |
|
} else { |
| 684 |
|
stylePtr->bgGC = None; |
| 685 |
|
} |
| 686 |
|
mask = GCFont; |
| 687 |
|
gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(styleValues.tkfont); |
| 688 |
|
mask |= GCForeground; |
| 689 |
|
gcValues.foreground = styleValues.fgColor->pixel; |
| 690 |
|
if (styleValues.fgStipple != None) { |
| 691 |
|
gcValues.stipple = styleValues.fgStipple; |
| 692 |
|
gcValues.fill_style = FillStippled; |
| 693 |
|
mask |= GCStipple|GCFillStyle; |
| 694 |
|
} |
| 695 |
|
stylePtr->fgGC = Tk_GetGC(textPtr->tkwin, mask, &gcValues); |
| 696 |
|
stylePtr->sValuePtr = (StyleValues *) |
| 697 |
|
Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->dInfoPtr->styleTable, hPtr); |
| 698 |
|
stylePtr->hPtr = hPtr; |
| 699 |
|
Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, stylePtr); |
| 700 |
|
return stylePtr; |
| 701 |
|
} |
| 702 |
|
|
| 703 |
|
/* |
| 704 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 705 |
|
* |
| 706 |
|
* FreeStyle -- |
| 707 |
|
* |
| 708 |
|
* This procedure is called when a TextStyle structure is no longer |
| 709 |
|
* needed. It decrements the reference count and frees up the |
| 710 |
|
* space for the style structure if the reference count is 0. |
| 711 |
|
* |
| 712 |
|
* Results: |
| 713 |
|
* None. |
| 714 |
|
* |
| 715 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 716 |
|
* The storage and other resources associated with the style |
| 717 |
|
* are freed up if no-one's still using it. |
| 718 |
|
* |
| 719 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 720 |
|
*/ |
| 721 |
|
|
| 722 |
|
static void |
| 723 |
|
FreeStyle(textPtr, stylePtr) |
| 724 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about overall widget. */ |
| 725 |
|
register TextStyle *stylePtr; /* Information about style to free. */ |
| 726 |
|
|
| 727 |
|
{ |
| 728 |
|
stylePtr->refCount--; |
| 729 |
|
if (stylePtr->refCount == 0) { |
| 730 |
|
if (stylePtr->bgGC != None) { |
| 731 |
|
Tk_FreeGC(textPtr->display, stylePtr->bgGC); |
| 732 |
|
} |
| 733 |
|
if (stylePtr->fgGC != None) { |
| 734 |
|
Tk_FreeGC(textPtr->display, stylePtr->fgGC); |
| 735 |
|
} |
| 736 |
|
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(stylePtr->hPtr); |
| 737 |
|
ckfree((char *) stylePtr); |
| 738 |
|
} |
| 739 |
|
} |
| 740 |
|
|
| 741 |
|
/* |
| 742 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 743 |
|
* |
| 744 |
|
* LayoutDLine -- |
| 745 |
|
* |
| 746 |
|
* This procedure generates a single DLine structure for a display |
| 747 |
|
* line whose leftmost character is given by indexPtr. |
| 748 |
|
* |
| 749 |
|
* Results: |
| 750 |
|
* The return value is a pointer to a DLine structure desribing the |
| 751 |
|
* display line. All fields are filled in and correct except for |
| 752 |
|
* y and nextPtr. |
| 753 |
|
* |
| 754 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 755 |
|
* Storage is allocated for the new DLine. |
| 756 |
|
* |
| 757 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 758 |
|
*/ |
| 759 |
|
|
| 760 |
|
static DLine * |
| 761 |
|
LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr) |
| 762 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Overall information about text widget. */ |
| 763 |
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Beginning of display line. May not |
| 764 |
|
* necessarily point to a character segment. */ |
| 765 |
|
{ |
| 766 |
|
register DLine *dlPtr; /* New display line. */ |
| 767 |
|
TkTextSegment *segPtr; /* Current segment in text. */ |
| 768 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *lastChunkPtr; /* Last chunk allocated so far |
| 769 |
|
* for line. */ |
| 770 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Current chunk. */ |
| 771 |
|
TkTextIndex curIndex; |
| 772 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *breakChunkPtr; /* Chunk containing best word break |
| 773 |
|
* point, if any. */ |
| 774 |
|
TkTextIndex breakIndex; /* Index of first character in |
| 775 |
|
* breakChunkPtr. */ |
| 776 |
|
int breakByteOffset; /* Byte offset of character within |
| 777 |
|
* breakChunkPtr just to right of best |
| 778 |
|
* break point. */ |
| 779 |
|
int noCharsYet; /* Non-zero means that no characters |
| 780 |
|
* have been placed on the line yet. */ |
| 781 |
|
int justify; /* How to justify line: taken from |
| 782 |
|
* style for the first character in |
| 783 |
|
* line. */ |
| 784 |
|
int jIndent; /* Additional indentation (beyond |
| 785 |
|
* margins) due to justification. */ |
| 786 |
|
int rMargin; /* Right margin width for line. */ |
| 787 |
|
TkWrapMode wrapMode; /* Wrap mode to use for this line. */ |
| 788 |
|
int x = 0, maxX = 0; /* Initializations needed only to |
| 789 |
|
* stop compiler warnings. */ |
| 790 |
|
int wholeLine; /* Non-zero means this display line |
| 791 |
|
* runs to the end of the text line. */ |
| 792 |
|
int tabIndex; /* Index of the current tab stop. */ |
| 793 |
|
int gotTab; /* Non-zero means the current chunk |
| 794 |
|
* contains a tab. */ |
| 795 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *tabChunkPtr; /* Pointer to the chunk containing |
| 796 |
|
* the previous tab stop. */ |
| 797 |
|
int maxBytes; /* Maximum number of bytes to |
| 798 |
|
* include in this chunk. */ |
| 799 |
|
TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr; /* Tab stops for line; taken from |
| 800 |
|
* style for the first character on |
| 801 |
|
* line. */ |
| 802 |
|
int tabSize; /* Number of pixels consumed by current |
| 803 |
|
* tab stop. */ |
| 804 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *lastCharChunkPtr; /* Pointer to last chunk in display |
| 805 |
|
* lines with numBytes > 0. Used to |
| 806 |
|
* drop 0-sized chunks from the end |
| 807 |
|
* of the line. */ |
| 808 |
|
int byteOffset, ascent, descent, code, elide, elidesize; |
| 809 |
|
StyleValues *sValuePtr; |
| 810 |
|
|
| 811 |
|
/* |
| 812 |
|
* Create and initialize a new DLine structure. |
| 813 |
|
*/ |
| 814 |
|
|
| 815 |
|
dlPtr = (DLine *) ckalloc(sizeof(DLine)); |
| 816 |
|
dlPtr->index = *indexPtr; |
| 817 |
|
dlPtr->byteCount = 0; |
| 818 |
|
dlPtr->y = 0; |
| 819 |
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
| 820 |
|
dlPtr->height = 0; |
| 821 |
|
dlPtr->baseline = 0; |
| 822 |
|
dlPtr->chunkPtr = NULL; |
| 823 |
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = NULL; |
| 824 |
|
dlPtr->flags = NEW_LAYOUT; |
| 825 |
|
|
| 826 |
|
/* |
| 827 |
|
* Special case entirely elide line as there may be 1000s or more |
| 828 |
|
*/ |
| 829 |
|
elide = TkTextIsElided(textPtr, indexPtr); /* save a malloc */ |
| 830 |
|
if (elide && indexPtr->byteIndex==0) { |
| 831 |
|
maxBytes = 0; |
| 832 |
|
for (segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr; |
| 833 |
|
elide && (segPtr != NULL); |
| 834 |
|
segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 835 |
|
if ((elidesize = segPtr->size) > 0) { |
| 836 |
|
maxBytes += elidesize; |
| 837 |
|
/* |
| 838 |
|
* If have we have a tag toggle, there is a chance |
| 839 |
|
* that invisibility state changed, so bail out |
| 840 |
|
*/ |
| 841 |
|
} else if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) |
| 842 |
|
|| (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) { |
| 843 |
|
if (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elideString != NULL) { |
| 844 |
|
elide = (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) |
| 845 |
|
^ segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elide; |
| 846 |
|
} |
| 847 |
|
} |
| 848 |
|
} |
| 849 |
|
|
| 850 |
|
if (elide) { |
| 851 |
|
dlPtr->byteCount = maxBytes; |
| 852 |
|
dlPtr->spaceAbove = dlPtr->spaceBelow = dlPtr->length = 0; |
| 853 |
|
return dlPtr; |
| 854 |
|
} |
| 855 |
|
} |
| 856 |
|
|
| 857 |
|
/* |
| 858 |
|
* Each iteration of the loop below creates one TkTextDispChunk for |
| 859 |
|
* the new display line. The line will always have at least one |
| 860 |
|
* chunk (for the newline character at the end, if there's nothing |
| 861 |
|
* else available). |
| 862 |
|
*/ |
| 863 |
|
|
| 864 |
|
curIndex = *indexPtr; |
| 865 |
|
lastChunkPtr = NULL; |
| 866 |
|
chunkPtr = NULL; |
| 867 |
|
noCharsYet = 1; |
| 868 |
|
elide = 0; |
| 869 |
|
breakChunkPtr = NULL; |
| 870 |
|
breakByteOffset = 0; |
| 871 |
|
justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT; |
| 872 |
|
tabIndex = -1; |
| 873 |
|
tabChunkPtr = NULL; |
| 874 |
|
tabArrayPtr = NULL; |
| 875 |
|
rMargin = 0; |
| 876 |
|
wrapMode = TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR; |
| 877 |
|
tabSize = 0; |
| 878 |
|
lastCharChunkPtr = NULL; |
| 879 |
|
|
| 880 |
|
/* |
| 881 |
|
* Find the first segment to consider for the line. Can't call |
| 882 |
|
* TkTextIndexToSeg for this because it won't return a segment |
| 883 |
|
* with zero size (such as the insertion cursor's mark). |
| 884 |
|
*/ |
| 885 |
|
|
| 886 |
|
for (byteOffset = curIndex.byteIndex, segPtr = curIndex.linePtr->segPtr; |
| 887 |
|
(byteOffset > 0) && (byteOffset >= segPtr->size); |
| 888 |
|
byteOffset -= segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 889 |
|
/* Empty loop body. */ |
| 890 |
|
} |
| 891 |
|
|
| 892 |
|
while (segPtr != NULL) { |
| 893 |
|
/* |
| 894 |
|
* Every line still gets at least one chunk due to expectations |
| 895 |
|
* in the rest of the code, but we are able to skip elided portions |
| 896 |
|
* of the line quickly. |
| 897 |
|
* If current chunk is elided and last chunk was too, coalese |
| 898 |
|
*/ |
| 899 |
|
if (elide && (lastChunkPtr != NULL) |
| 900 |
|
&& (lastChunkPtr->displayProc == NULL /*ElideDisplayProc*/)) { |
| 901 |
|
if ((elidesize = segPtr->size - byteOffset) > 0) { |
| 902 |
|
curIndex.byteIndex += elidesize; |
| 903 |
|
lastChunkPtr->numBytes += elidesize; |
| 904 |
|
breakByteOffset = lastChunkPtr->breakIndex = lastChunkPtr->numBytes; |
| 905 |
|
/* |
| 906 |
|
* If have we have a tag toggle, there is a chance |
| 907 |
|
* that invisibility state changed, so bail out |
| 908 |
|
*/ |
| 909 |
|
} else if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) |
| 910 |
|
|| (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) { |
| 911 |
|
if (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elideString != NULL) { |
| 912 |
|
elide = (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) |
| 913 |
|
^ segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elide; |
| 914 |
|
} |
| 915 |
|
} |
| 916 |
|
|
| 917 |
|
byteOffset = 0; |
| 918 |
|
segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr; |
| 919 |
|
if (segPtr == NULL && chunkPtr != NULL) { |
| 920 |
|
ckfree((char *) chunkPtr); |
| 921 |
|
} |
| 922 |
|
continue; |
| 923 |
|
} |
| 924 |
|
|
| 925 |
|
if (segPtr->typePtr->layoutProc == NULL) { |
| 926 |
|
segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr; |
| 927 |
|
byteOffset = 0; |
| 928 |
|
continue; |
| 929 |
|
} |
| 930 |
|
if (chunkPtr == NULL) { |
| 931 |
|
chunkPtr = (TkTextDispChunk *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextDispChunk)); |
| 932 |
|
chunkPtr->nextPtr = NULL; |
| 933 |
|
} |
| 934 |
|
chunkPtr->stylePtr = GetStyle(textPtr, &curIndex); |
| 935 |
|
elide = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->elide; |
| 936 |
|
|
| 937 |
|
/* |
| 938 |
|
* Save style information such as justification and indentation, |
| 939 |
|
* up until the first character is encountered, then retain that |
| 940 |
|
* information for the rest of the line. |
| 941 |
|
*/ |
| 942 |
|
|
| 943 |
|
if (noCharsYet) { |
| 944 |
|
tabArrayPtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tabArrayPtr; |
| 945 |
|
justify = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->justify; |
| 946 |
|
rMargin = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->rMargin; |
| 947 |
|
wrapMode = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->wrapMode; |
| 948 |
|
x = ((curIndex.byteIndex == 0) |
| 949 |
|
? chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->lMargin1 |
| 950 |
|
: chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->lMargin2); |
| 951 |
|
if (wrapMode == TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE) { |
| 952 |
|
maxX = -1; |
| 953 |
|
} else { |
| 954 |
|
maxX = textPtr->dInfoPtr->maxX - textPtr->dInfoPtr->x |
| 955 |
|
- rMargin; |
| 956 |
|
if (maxX < x) { |
| 957 |
|
maxX = x; |
| 958 |
|
} |
| 959 |
|
} |
| 960 |
|
} |
| 961 |
|
|
| 962 |
|
/* |
| 963 |
|
* See if there is a tab in the current chunk; if so, only |
| 964 |
|
* layout characters up to (and including) the tab. |
| 965 |
|
*/ |
| 966 |
|
|
| 967 |
|
gotTab = 0; |
| 968 |
|
maxBytes = segPtr->size - byteOffset; |
| 969 |
|
if (!elide && justify == TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT) { |
| 970 |
|
if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) { |
| 971 |
|
char *p; |
| 972 |
|
|
| 973 |
|
for (p = segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset; *p != 0; p++) { |
| 974 |
|
if (*p == '\t') { |
| 975 |
|
maxBytes = (p + 1 - segPtr->body.chars) - byteOffset; |
| 976 |
|
gotTab = 1; |
| 977 |
|
break; |
| 978 |
|
} |
| 979 |
|
} |
| 980 |
|
} |
| 981 |
|
} |
| 982 |
|
chunkPtr->x = x; |
| 983 |
|
if (elide && maxBytes) { |
| 984 |
|
/* don't free style here, as other code expects to be able to do that */ |
| 985 |
|
/*breakByteOffset =*/ chunkPtr->breakIndex = chunkPtr->numBytes = maxBytes; |
| 986 |
|
chunkPtr->width = 0; |
| 987 |
|
chunkPtr->minAscent = chunkPtr->minDescent = chunkPtr->minHeight = 0; |
| 988 |
|
|
| 989 |
|
/* would just like to point to canonical empty chunk */ |
| 990 |
|
chunkPtr->displayProc = (Tk_ChunkDisplayProc *) NULL; |
| 991 |
|
chunkPtr->undisplayProc = (Tk_ChunkUndisplayProc *) NULL; |
| 992 |
|
chunkPtr->measureProc = ElideMeasureProc; |
| 993 |
|
chunkPtr->bboxProc = ElideBboxProc; |
| 994 |
|
|
| 995 |
|
code = 1; |
| 996 |
|
} else |
| 997 |
|
code = (*segPtr->typePtr->layoutProc)(textPtr, &curIndex, segPtr, |
| 998 |
|
byteOffset, maxX-tabSize, maxBytes, noCharsYet, wrapMode, |
| 999 |
|
chunkPtr); |
| 1000 |
|
if (code <= 0) { |
| 1001 |
|
FreeStyle(textPtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
| 1002 |
|
if (code < 0) { |
| 1003 |
|
/* |
| 1004 |
|
* This segment doesn't wish to display itself (e.g. most |
| 1005 |
|
* marks). |
| 1006 |
|
*/ |
| 1007 |
|
|
| 1008 |
|
segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1009 |
|
byteOffset = 0; |
| 1010 |
|
continue; |
| 1011 |
|
} |
| 1012 |
|
|
| 1013 |
|
/* |
| 1014 |
|
* No characters from this segment fit in the window: this |
| 1015 |
|
* means we're at the end of the display line. |
| 1016 |
|
*/ |
| 1017 |
|
|
| 1018 |
|
if (chunkPtr != NULL) { |
| 1019 |
|
ckfree((char *) chunkPtr); |
| 1020 |
|
} |
| 1021 |
|
break; |
| 1022 |
|
} |
| 1023 |
|
if (chunkPtr->numBytes > 0) { |
| 1024 |
|
noCharsYet = 0; |
| 1025 |
|
lastCharChunkPtr = chunkPtr; |
| 1026 |
|
} |
| 1027 |
|
if (lastChunkPtr == NULL) { |
| 1028 |
|
dlPtr->chunkPtr = chunkPtr; |
| 1029 |
|
} else { |
| 1030 |
|
lastChunkPtr->nextPtr = chunkPtr; |
| 1031 |
|
} |
| 1032 |
|
lastChunkPtr = chunkPtr; |
| 1033 |
|
x += chunkPtr->width; |
| 1034 |
|
if (chunkPtr->breakIndex > 0) { |
| 1035 |
|
breakByteOffset = chunkPtr->breakIndex; |
| 1036 |
|
breakIndex = curIndex; |
| 1037 |
|
breakChunkPtr = chunkPtr; |
| 1038 |
|
} |
| 1039 |
|
if (chunkPtr->numBytes != maxBytes) { |
| 1040 |
|
break; |
| 1041 |
|
} |
| 1042 |
|
|
| 1043 |
|
/* |
| 1044 |
|
* If we're at a new tab, adjust the layout for all the chunks |
| 1045 |
|
* pertaining to the previous tab. Also adjust the amount of |
| 1046 |
|
* space left in the line to account for space that will be eaten |
| 1047 |
|
* up by the tab. |
| 1048 |
|
*/ |
| 1049 |
|
|
| 1050 |
|
if (gotTab) { |
| 1051 |
|
if (tabIndex >= 0) { |
| 1052 |
|
AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, tabIndex, tabChunkPtr); |
| 1053 |
|
x = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width; |
| 1054 |
|
} |
| 1055 |
|
tabIndex++; |
| 1056 |
|
tabChunkPtr = chunkPtr; |
| 1057 |
|
tabSize = SizeOfTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, tabIndex, x, maxX); |
| 1058 |
|
if ((maxX >= 0) && (tabSize >= maxX - x)) { |
| 1059 |
|
break; |
| 1060 |
|
} |
| 1061 |
|
} |
| 1062 |
|
curIndex.byteIndex += chunkPtr->numBytes; |
| 1063 |
|
byteOffset += chunkPtr->numBytes; |
| 1064 |
|
if (byteOffset >= segPtr->size) { |
| 1065 |
|
byteOffset = 0; |
| 1066 |
|
segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1067 |
|
} |
| 1068 |
|
|
| 1069 |
|
chunkPtr = NULL; |
| 1070 |
|
} |
| 1071 |
|
if (noCharsYet) { |
| 1072 |
|
panic("LayoutDLine couldn't place any characters on a line"); |
| 1073 |
|
} |
| 1074 |
|
wholeLine = (segPtr == NULL); |
| 1075 |
|
|
| 1076 |
|
/* |
| 1077 |
|
* We're at the end of the display line. Throw away everything |
| 1078 |
|
* after the most recent word break, if there is one; this may |
| 1079 |
|
* potentially require the last chunk to be layed out again. |
| 1080 |
|
*/ |
| 1081 |
|
|
| 1082 |
|
if (breakChunkPtr == NULL) { |
| 1083 |
|
/* |
| 1084 |
|
* This code makes sure that we don't accidentally display |
| 1085 |
|
* chunks with no characters at the end of the line (such as |
| 1086 |
|
* the insertion cursor). These chunks belong on the next |
| 1087 |
|
* line. So, throw away everything after the last chunk that |
| 1088 |
|
* has characters in it. |
| 1089 |
|
*/ |
| 1090 |
|
|
| 1091 |
|
breakChunkPtr = lastCharChunkPtr; |
| 1092 |
|
breakByteOffset = breakChunkPtr->numBytes; |
| 1093 |
|
} |
| 1094 |
|
if ((breakChunkPtr != NULL) && ((lastChunkPtr != breakChunkPtr) |
| 1095 |
|
|| (breakByteOffset != lastChunkPtr->numBytes))) { |
| 1096 |
|
while (1) { |
| 1097 |
|
chunkPtr = breakChunkPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1098 |
|
if (chunkPtr == NULL) { |
| 1099 |
|
break; |
| 1100 |
|
} |
| 1101 |
|
FreeStyle(textPtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
| 1102 |
|
breakChunkPtr->nextPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1103 |
|
(*chunkPtr->undisplayProc)(textPtr, chunkPtr); |
| 1104 |
|
ckfree((char *) chunkPtr); |
| 1105 |
|
} |
| 1106 |
|
if (breakByteOffset != breakChunkPtr->numBytes) { |
| 1107 |
|
(*breakChunkPtr->undisplayProc)(textPtr, breakChunkPtr); |
| 1108 |
|
segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&breakIndex, &byteOffset); |
| 1109 |
|
(*segPtr->typePtr->layoutProc)(textPtr, &breakIndex, |
| 1110 |
|
segPtr, byteOffset, maxX, breakByteOffset, 0, |
| 1111 |
|
wrapMode, breakChunkPtr); |
| 1112 |
|
} |
| 1113 |
|
lastChunkPtr = breakChunkPtr; |
| 1114 |
|
wholeLine = 0; |
| 1115 |
|
} |
| 1116 |
|
|
| 1117 |
|
|
| 1118 |
|
/* |
| 1119 |
|
* Make tab adjustments for the last tab stop, if there is one. |
| 1120 |
|
*/ |
| 1121 |
|
|
| 1122 |
|
if ((tabIndex >= 0) && (tabChunkPtr != NULL)) { |
| 1123 |
|
AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, tabIndex, tabChunkPtr); |
| 1124 |
|
} |
| 1125 |
|
|
| 1126 |
|
/* |
| 1127 |
|
* Make one more pass over the line to recompute various things |
| 1128 |
|
* like its height, length, and total number of bytes. Also |
| 1129 |
|
* modify the x-locations of chunks to reflect justification. |
| 1130 |
|
* If we're not wrapping, I'm not sure what is the best way to |
| 1131 |
|
* handle left and center justification: should the total length, |
| 1132 |
|
* for purposes of justification, be (a) the window width, (b) |
| 1133 |
|
* the length of the longest line in the window, or (c) the length |
| 1134 |
|
* of the longest line in the text? (c) isn't available, (b) seems |
| 1135 |
|
* weird, since it can change with vertical scrolling, so (a) is |
| 1136 |
|
* what is implemented below. |
| 1137 |
|
*/ |
| 1138 |
|
|
| 1139 |
|
if (wrapMode == TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE) { |
| 1140 |
|
maxX = textPtr->dInfoPtr->maxX - textPtr->dInfoPtr->x - rMargin; |
| 1141 |
|
} |
| 1142 |
|
dlPtr->length = lastChunkPtr->x + lastChunkPtr->width; |
| 1143 |
|
if (justify == TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT) { |
| 1144 |
|
jIndent = 0; |
| 1145 |
|
} else if (justify == TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT) { |
| 1146 |
|
jIndent = maxX - dlPtr->length; |
| 1147 |
|
} else { |
| 1148 |
|
jIndent = (maxX - dlPtr->length)/2; |
| 1149 |
|
} |
| 1150 |
|
ascent = descent = 0; |
| 1151 |
|
for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; chunkPtr != NULL; |
| 1152 |
|
chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 1153 |
|
chunkPtr->x += jIndent; |
| 1154 |
|
dlPtr->byteCount += chunkPtr->numBytes; |
| 1155 |
|
if (chunkPtr->minAscent > ascent) { |
| 1156 |
|
ascent = chunkPtr->minAscent; |
| 1157 |
|
} |
| 1158 |
|
if (chunkPtr->minDescent > descent) { |
| 1159 |
|
descent = chunkPtr->minDescent; |
| 1160 |
|
} |
| 1161 |
|
if (chunkPtr->minHeight > dlPtr->height) { |
| 1162 |
|
dlPtr->height = chunkPtr->minHeight; |
| 1163 |
|
} |
| 1164 |
|
sValuePtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr; |
| 1165 |
|
if ((sValuePtr->borderWidth > 0) |
| 1166 |
|
&& (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)) { |
| 1167 |
|
dlPtr->flags |= HAS_3D_BORDER; |
| 1168 |
|
} |
| 1169 |
|
} |
| 1170 |
|
if (dlPtr->height < (ascent + descent)) { |
| 1171 |
|
dlPtr->height = ascent + descent; |
| 1172 |
|
dlPtr->baseline = ascent; |
| 1173 |
|
} else { |
| 1174 |
|
dlPtr->baseline = ascent + (dlPtr->height - ascent - descent)/2; |
| 1175 |
|
} |
| 1176 |
|
sValuePtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr; |
| 1177 |
|
if (dlPtr->index.byteIndex == 0) { |
| 1178 |
|
dlPtr->spaceAbove = sValuePtr->spacing1; |
| 1179 |
|
} else { |
| 1180 |
|
dlPtr->spaceAbove = sValuePtr->spacing2 - sValuePtr->spacing2/2; |
| 1181 |
|
} |
| 1182 |
|
if (wholeLine) { |
| 1183 |
|
dlPtr->spaceBelow = sValuePtr->spacing3; |
| 1184 |
|
} else { |
| 1185 |
|
dlPtr->spaceBelow = sValuePtr->spacing2/2; |
| 1186 |
|
} |
| 1187 |
|
dlPtr->height += dlPtr->spaceAbove + dlPtr->spaceBelow; |
| 1188 |
|
dlPtr->baseline += dlPtr->spaceAbove; |
| 1189 |
|
|
| 1190 |
|
/* |
| 1191 |
|
* Recompute line length: may have changed because of justification. |
| 1192 |
|
*/ |
| 1193 |
|
|
| 1194 |
|
dlPtr->length = lastChunkPtr->x + lastChunkPtr->width; |
| 1195 |
|
return dlPtr; |
| 1196 |
|
} |
| 1197 |
|
|
| 1198 |
|
/* |
| 1199 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1200 |
|
* |
| 1201 |
|
* UpdateDisplayInfo -- |
| 1202 |
|
* |
| 1203 |
|
* This procedure is invoked to recompute some or all of the |
| 1204 |
|
* DLine structures for a text widget. At the time it is called |
| 1205 |
|
* the DLine structures still left in the widget are guaranteed |
| 1206 |
|
* to be correct except that (a) the y-coordinates aren't |
| 1207 |
|
* necessarily correct, (b) there may be missing structures |
| 1208 |
|
* (the DLine structures get removed as soon as they are potentially |
| 1209 |
|
* out-of-date), and (c) DLine structures that don't start at the |
| 1210 |
|
* beginning of a line may be incorrect if previous information in |
| 1211 |
|
* the same line changed size in a way that moved a line boundary |
| 1212 |
|
* (DLines for any info that changed will have been deleted, but |
| 1213 |
|
* not DLines for unchanged info in the same text line). |
| 1214 |
|
* |
| 1215 |
|
* Results: |
| 1216 |
|
* None. |
| 1217 |
|
* |
| 1218 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1219 |
|
* Upon return, the DLine information for textPtr correctly reflects |
| 1220 |
|
* the positions where characters will be displayed. However, this |
| 1221 |
|
* procedure doesn't actually bring the display up-to-date. |
| 1222 |
|
* |
| 1223 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1224 |
|
*/ |
| 1225 |
|
|
| 1226 |
|
static void |
| 1227 |
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr) |
| 1228 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Text widget to update. */ |
| 1229 |
|
{ |
| 1230 |
|
register TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 1231 |
|
register DLine *dlPtr, *prevPtr; |
| 1232 |
|
TkTextIndex index; |
| 1233 |
|
TkTextLine *lastLinePtr; |
| 1234 |
|
int y, maxY, pixelOffset, maxOffset; |
| 1235 |
|
|
| 1236 |
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE)) { |
| 1237 |
|
return; |
| 1238 |
|
} |
| 1239 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags &= ~DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE; |
| 1240 |
|
|
| 1241 |
|
/* |
| 1242 |
|
* Delete any DLines that are now above the top of the window. |
| 1243 |
|
*/ |
| 1244 |
|
|
| 1245 |
|
index = textPtr->topIndex; |
| 1246 |
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, &index); |
| 1247 |
|
if ((dlPtr != NULL) && (dlPtr != dInfoPtr->dLinePtr)) { |
| 1248 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, dlPtr, 1); |
| 1249 |
|
} |
| 1250 |
|
|
| 1251 |
|
/* |
| 1252 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1253 |
|
* Scan through the contents of the window from top to bottom, |
| 1254 |
|
* recomputing information for lines that are missing. |
| 1255 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1256 |
|
*/ |
| 1257 |
|
|
| 1258 |
|
lastLinePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree, |
| 1259 |
|
TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree)); |
| 1260 |
|
dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
| 1261 |
|
prevPtr = NULL; |
| 1262 |
|
y = dInfoPtr->y; |
| 1263 |
|
maxY = dInfoPtr->maxY; |
| 1264 |
|
while (1) { |
| 1265 |
|
register DLine *newPtr; |
| 1266 |
|
|
| 1267 |
|
if (index.linePtr == lastLinePtr) { |
| 1268 |
|
break; |
| 1269 |
|
} |
| 1270 |
|
|
| 1271 |
|
/* |
| 1272 |
|
* There are three possibilities right now: |
| 1273 |
|
* (a) the next DLine (dlPtr) corresponds exactly to the next |
| 1274 |
|
* information we want to display: just use it as-is. |
| 1275 |
|
* (b) the next DLine corresponds to a different line, or to |
| 1276 |
|
* a segment that will be coming later in the same line: |
| 1277 |
|
* leave this DLine alone in the hopes that we'll be able |
| 1278 |
|
* to use it later, then create a new DLine in front of |
| 1279 |
|
* it. |
| 1280 |
|
* (c) the next DLine corresponds to a segment in the line we |
| 1281 |
|
* want, but it's a segment that has already been processed |
| 1282 |
|
* or will never be processed. Delete the DLine and try |
| 1283 |
|
* again. |
| 1284 |
|
* |
| 1285 |
|
* One other twist on all this. It's possible for 3D borders |
| 1286 |
|
* to interact between lines (see DisplayLineBackground) so if |
| 1287 |
|
* a line is relayed out and has styles with 3D borders, its |
| 1288 |
|
* neighbors have to be redrawn if they have 3D borders too, |
| 1289 |
|
* since the interactions could have changed (the neighbors |
| 1290 |
|
* don't have to be relayed out, just redrawn). |
| 1291 |
|
*/ |
| 1292 |
|
|
| 1293 |
|
if ((dlPtr == NULL) || (dlPtr->index.linePtr != index.linePtr)) { |
| 1294 |
|
/* |
| 1295 |
|
* Case (b) -- must make new DLine. |
| 1296 |
|
*/ |
| 1297 |
|
|
| 1298 |
|
makeNewDLine: |
| 1299 |
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
| 1300 |
|
char string[TK_POS_CHARS]; |
| 1301 |
|
|
| 1302 |
|
/* |
| 1303 |
|
* Debugging is enabled, so keep a log of all the lines |
| 1304 |
|
* that were re-layed out. The test suite uses this |
| 1305 |
|
* information. |
| 1306 |
|
*/ |
| 1307 |
|
|
| 1308 |
|
TkTextPrintIndex(&index, string); |
| 1309 |
|
Tcl_SetVar2(textPtr->interp, "tk_textRelayout", (char *) NULL, |
| 1310 |
|
string, |
| 1311 |
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); |
| 1312 |
|
} |
| 1313 |
|
newPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index); |
| 1314 |
|
if (prevPtr == NULL) { |
| 1315 |
|
dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = newPtr; |
| 1316 |
|
} else { |
| 1317 |
|
prevPtr->nextPtr = newPtr; |
| 1318 |
|
if (prevPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER) { |
| 1319 |
|
prevPtr->oldY = -1; |
| 1320 |
|
} |
| 1321 |
|
} |
| 1322 |
|
newPtr->nextPtr = dlPtr; |
| 1323 |
|
dlPtr = newPtr; |
| 1324 |
|
} else { |
| 1325 |
|
/* |
| 1326 |
|
* DlPtr refers to the line we want. Next check the |
| 1327 |
|
* index within the line. |
| 1328 |
|
*/ |
| 1329 |
|
|
| 1330 |
|
if (index.byteIndex == dlPtr->index.byteIndex) { |
| 1331 |
|
/* |
| 1332 |
|
* Case (a) -- can use existing display line as-is. |
| 1333 |
|
*/ |
| 1334 |
|
|
| 1335 |
|
if ((dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER) && (prevPtr != NULL) |
| 1336 |
|
&& (prevPtr->flags & (NEW_LAYOUT))) { |
| 1337 |
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
| 1338 |
|
} |
| 1339 |
|
goto lineOK; |
| 1340 |
|
} |
| 1341 |
|
if (index.byteIndex < dlPtr->index.byteIndex) { |
| 1342 |
|
goto makeNewDLine; |
| 1343 |
|
} |
| 1344 |
|
|
| 1345 |
|
/* |
| 1346 |
|
* Case (c) -- dlPtr is useless. Discard it and start |
| 1347 |
|
* again with the next display line. |
| 1348 |
|
*/ |
| 1349 |
|
|
| 1350 |
|
newPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1351 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, newPtr, 0); |
| 1352 |
|
dlPtr = newPtr; |
| 1353 |
|
if (prevPtr != NULL) { |
| 1354 |
|
prevPtr->nextPtr = newPtr; |
| 1355 |
|
} else { |
| 1356 |
|
dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = newPtr; |
| 1357 |
|
} |
| 1358 |
|
continue; |
| 1359 |
|
} |
| 1360 |
|
|
| 1361 |
|
/* |
| 1362 |
|
* Advance to the start of the next line. |
| 1363 |
|
*/ |
| 1364 |
|
|
| 1365 |
|
lineOK: |
| 1366 |
|
dlPtr->y = y; |
| 1367 |
|
y += dlPtr->height; |
| 1368 |
|
TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index); |
| 1369 |
|
prevPtr = dlPtr; |
| 1370 |
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1371 |
|
|
| 1372 |
|
/* |
| 1373 |
|
* If we switched text lines, delete any DLines left for the |
| 1374 |
|
* old text line. |
| 1375 |
|
*/ |
| 1376 |
|
|
| 1377 |
|
if (index.linePtr != prevPtr->index.linePtr) { |
| 1378 |
|
register DLine *nextPtr; |
| 1379 |
|
|
| 1380 |
|
nextPtr = dlPtr; |
| 1381 |
|
while ((nextPtr != NULL) |
| 1382 |
|
&& (nextPtr->index.linePtr == prevPtr->index.linePtr)) { |
| 1383 |
|
nextPtr = nextPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1384 |
|
} |
| 1385 |
|
if (nextPtr != dlPtr) { |
| 1386 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, nextPtr, 0); |
| 1387 |
|
prevPtr->nextPtr = nextPtr; |
| 1388 |
|
dlPtr = nextPtr; |
| 1389 |
|
} |
| 1390 |
|
} |
| 1391 |
|
|
| 1392 |
|
/* |
| 1393 |
|
* It's important to have the following check here rather than in |
| 1394 |
|
* the while statement for the loop, so that there's always at least |
| 1395 |
|
* one DLine generated, regardless of how small the window is. This |
| 1396 |
|
* keeps a lot of other code from breaking. |
| 1397 |
|
*/ |
| 1398 |
|
|
| 1399 |
|
if (y >= maxY) { |
| 1400 |
|
break; |
| 1401 |
|
} |
| 1402 |
|
} |
| 1403 |
|
|
| 1404 |
|
/* |
| 1405 |
|
* Delete any DLine structures that don't fit on the screen. |
| 1406 |
|
*/ |
| 1407 |
|
|
| 1408 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 1); |
| 1409 |
|
|
| 1410 |
|
/* |
| 1411 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1412 |
|
* If there is extra space at the bottom of the window (because |
| 1413 |
|
* we've hit the end of the text), then bring in more lines at |
| 1414 |
|
* the top of the window, if there are any, to fill in the view. |
| 1415 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1416 |
|
*/ |
| 1417 |
|
|
| 1418 |
|
if (y < maxY) { |
| 1419 |
|
int lineNum, spaceLeft, bytesToCount; |
| 1420 |
|
DLine *lowestPtr; |
| 1421 |
|
|
| 1422 |
|
/* |
| 1423 |
|
* Layout an entire text line (potentially > 1 display line), |
| 1424 |
|
* then link in as many display lines as fit without moving |
| 1425 |
|
* the bottom line out of the window. Repeat this until |
| 1426 |
|
* all the extra space has been used up or we've reached the |
| 1427 |
|
* beginning of the text. |
| 1428 |
|
*/ |
| 1429 |
|
|
| 1430 |
|
spaceLeft = maxY - y; |
| 1431 |
|
lineNum = TkBTreeLineIndex(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->index.linePtr); |
| 1432 |
|
bytesToCount = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->index.byteIndex; |
| 1433 |
|
if (bytesToCount == 0) { |
| 1434 |
|
bytesToCount = INT_MAX; |
| 1435 |
|
lineNum--; |
| 1436 |
|
} |
| 1437 |
|
for ( ; (lineNum >= 0) && (spaceLeft > 0); lineNum--) { |
| 1438 |
|
index.linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree, lineNum); |
| 1439 |
|
index.byteIndex = 0; |
| 1440 |
|
lowestPtr = NULL; |
| 1441 |
|
|
| 1442 |
|
do { |
| 1443 |
|
dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index); |
| 1444 |
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = lowestPtr; |
| 1445 |
|
lowestPtr = dlPtr; |
| 1446 |
|
if (dlPtr->length == 0 && dlPtr->height == 0) { bytesToCount--; break; } /* elide */ |
| 1447 |
|
TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index); |
| 1448 |
|
bytesToCount -= dlPtr->byteCount; |
| 1449 |
|
} while ((bytesToCount > 0) |
| 1450 |
|
&& (index.linePtr == lowestPtr->index.linePtr)); |
| 1451 |
|
|
| 1452 |
|
/* |
| 1453 |
|
* Scan through the display lines from the bottom one up to |
| 1454 |
|
* the top one. |
| 1455 |
|
*/ |
| 1456 |
|
|
| 1457 |
|
while (lowestPtr != NULL) { |
| 1458 |
|
dlPtr = lowestPtr; |
| 1459 |
|
spaceLeft -= dlPtr->height; |
| 1460 |
|
if (spaceLeft < 0) { |
| 1461 |
|
break; |
| 1462 |
|
} |
| 1463 |
|
lowestPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1464 |
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
| 1465 |
|
dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = dlPtr; |
| 1466 |
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
| 1467 |
|
char string[TK_POS_CHARS]; |
| 1468 |
|
|
| 1469 |
|
TkTextPrintIndex(&dlPtr->index, string); |
| 1470 |
|
Tcl_SetVar2(textPtr->interp, "tk_textRelayout", |
| 1471 |
|
(char *) NULL, string, |
| 1472 |
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); |
| 1473 |
|
} |
| 1474 |
|
} |
| 1475 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, lowestPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0); |
| 1476 |
|
bytesToCount = INT_MAX; |
| 1477 |
|
} |
| 1478 |
|
|
| 1479 |
|
/* |
| 1480 |
|
* Now we're all done except that the y-coordinates in all the |
| 1481 |
|
* DLines are wrong and the top index for the text is wrong. |
| 1482 |
|
* Update them. |
| 1483 |
|
*/ |
| 1484 |
|
|
| 1485 |
|
textPtr->topIndex = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->index; |
| 1486 |
|
y = dInfoPtr->y; |
| 1487 |
|
for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; |
| 1488 |
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 1489 |
|
if (y > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
| 1490 |
|
panic("Added too many new lines in UpdateDisplayInfo"); |
| 1491 |
|
} |
| 1492 |
|
dlPtr->y = y; |
| 1493 |
|
y += dlPtr->height; |
| 1494 |
|
} |
| 1495 |
|
} |
| 1496 |
|
|
| 1497 |
|
/* |
| 1498 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1499 |
|
* If the old top or bottom line has scrolled elsewhere on the |
| 1500 |
|
* screen, we may not be able to re-use its old contents by |
| 1501 |
|
* copying bits (e.g., a beveled edge that was drawn when it was |
| 1502 |
|
* at the top or bottom won't be drawn when the line is in the |
| 1503 |
|
* middle and its neighbor has a matching background). Similarly, |
| 1504 |
|
* if the new top or bottom line came from somewhere else on the |
| 1505 |
|
* screen, we may not be able to copy the old bits. |
| 1506 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1507 |
|
*/ |
| 1508 |
|
|
| 1509 |
|
dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
| 1510 |
|
if ((dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER) && !(dlPtr->flags & TOP_LINE)) { |
| 1511 |
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
| 1512 |
|
} |
| 1513 |
|
while (1) { |
| 1514 |
|
if ((dlPtr->flags & TOP_LINE) && (dlPtr != dInfoPtr->dLinePtr) |
| 1515 |
|
&& (dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER)) { |
| 1516 |
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
| 1517 |
|
} |
| 1518 |
|
if ((dlPtr->flags & BOTTOM_LINE) && (dlPtr->nextPtr != NULL) |
| 1519 |
|
&& (dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER)) { |
| 1520 |
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
| 1521 |
|
} |
| 1522 |
|
if (dlPtr->nextPtr == NULL) { |
| 1523 |
|
if ((dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER) |
| 1524 |
|
&& !(dlPtr->flags & BOTTOM_LINE)) { |
| 1525 |
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
| 1526 |
|
} |
| 1527 |
|
dlPtr->flags &= ~TOP_LINE; |
| 1528 |
|
dlPtr->flags |= BOTTOM_LINE; |
| 1529 |
|
break; |
| 1530 |
|
} |
| 1531 |
|
dlPtr->flags &= ~(TOP_LINE|BOTTOM_LINE); |
| 1532 |
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1533 |
|
} |
| 1534 |
|
dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->flags |= TOP_LINE; |
| 1535 |
|
|
| 1536 |
|
/* |
| 1537 |
|
* Arrange for scrollbars to be updated. |
| 1538 |
|
*/ |
| 1539 |
|
|
| 1540 |
|
textPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBARS; |
| 1541 |
|
|
| 1542 |
|
/* |
| 1543 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1544 |
|
* Deal with horizontal scrolling: |
| 1545 |
|
* 1. If there's empty space to the right of the longest line, |
| 1546 |
|
* shift the screen to the right to fill in the empty space. |
| 1547 |
|
* 2. If the desired horizontal scroll position has changed, |
| 1548 |
|
* force a full redisplay of all the lines in the widget. |
| 1549 |
|
* 3. If the wrap mode isn't "none" then re-scroll to the base |
| 1550 |
|
* position. |
| 1551 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1552 |
|
*/ |
| 1553 |
|
|
| 1554 |
|
dInfoPtr->maxLength = 0; |
| 1555 |
|
for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; |
| 1556 |
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 1557 |
|
if (dlPtr->length > dInfoPtr->maxLength) { |
| 1558 |
|
dInfoPtr->maxLength = dlPtr->length; |
| 1559 |
|
} |
| 1560 |
|
} |
| 1561 |
|
maxOffset = (dInfoPtr->maxLength - (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x) |
| 1562 |
|
+ textPtr->charWidth - 1)/textPtr->charWidth; |
| 1563 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->newByteOffset > maxOffset) { |
| 1564 |
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = maxOffset; |
| 1565 |
|
} |
| 1566 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->newByteOffset < 0) { |
| 1567 |
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = 0; |
| 1568 |
|
} |
| 1569 |
|
pixelOffset = dInfoPtr->newByteOffset * textPtr->charWidth; |
| 1570 |
|
if (pixelOffset != dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset) { |
| 1571 |
|
dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset = pixelOffset; |
| 1572 |
|
for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; |
| 1573 |
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 1574 |
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
| 1575 |
|
} |
| 1576 |
|
} |
| 1577 |
|
} |
| 1578 |
|
|
| 1579 |
|
/* |
| 1580 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1581 |
|
* |
| 1582 |
|
* FreeDLines -- |
| 1583 |
|
* |
| 1584 |
|
* This procedure is called to free up all of the resources |
| 1585 |
|
* associated with one or more DLine structures. |
| 1586 |
|
* |
| 1587 |
|
* Results: |
| 1588 |
|
* None. |
| 1589 |
|
* |
| 1590 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1591 |
|
* Memory gets freed and various other resources are released. |
| 1592 |
|
* |
| 1593 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1594 |
|
*/ |
| 1595 |
|
|
| 1596 |
|
static void |
| 1597 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr, unlink) |
| 1598 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about overall text |
| 1599 |
|
* widget. */ |
| 1600 |
|
register DLine *firstPtr; /* Pointer to first DLine to free up. */ |
| 1601 |
|
DLine *lastPtr; /* Pointer to DLine just after last |
| 1602 |
|
* one to free (NULL means everything |
| 1603 |
|
* starting with firstPtr). */ |
| 1604 |
|
int unlink; /* 1 means DLines are currently linked |
| 1605 |
|
* into the list rooted at |
| 1606 |
|
* textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr and |
| 1607 |
|
* they have to be unlinked. 0 means |
| 1608 |
|
* just free without unlinking. */ |
| 1609 |
|
{ |
| 1610 |
|
register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, *nextChunkPtr; |
| 1611 |
|
register DLine *nextDLinePtr; |
| 1612 |
|
|
| 1613 |
|
if (unlink) { |
| 1614 |
|
if (textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr == firstPtr) { |
| 1615 |
|
textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = lastPtr; |
| 1616 |
|
} else { |
| 1617 |
|
register DLine *prevPtr; |
| 1618 |
|
for (prevPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
| 1619 |
|
prevPtr->nextPtr != firstPtr; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 1620 |
|
/* Empty loop body. */ |
| 1621 |
|
} |
| 1622 |
|
prevPtr->nextPtr = lastPtr; |
| 1623 |
|
} |
| 1624 |
|
} |
| 1625 |
|
while (firstPtr != lastPtr) { |
| 1626 |
|
nextDLinePtr = firstPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1627 |
|
for (chunkPtr = firstPtr->chunkPtr; chunkPtr != NULL; |
| 1628 |
|
chunkPtr = nextChunkPtr) { |
| 1629 |
|
if (chunkPtr->undisplayProc != NULL) { |
| 1630 |
|
(*chunkPtr->undisplayProc)(textPtr, chunkPtr); |
| 1631 |
|
} |
| 1632 |
|
FreeStyle(textPtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
| 1633 |
|
nextChunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1634 |
|
ckfree((char *) chunkPtr); |
| 1635 |
|
} |
| 1636 |
|
ckfree((char *) firstPtr); |
| 1637 |
|
firstPtr = nextDLinePtr; |
| 1638 |
|
} |
| 1639 |
|
textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated = 1; |
| 1640 |
|
} |
| 1641 |
|
|
| 1642 |
|
/* |
| 1643 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1644 |
|
* |
| 1645 |
|
* DisplayDLine -- |
| 1646 |
|
* |
| 1647 |
|
* This procedure is invoked to draw a single line on the |
| 1648 |
|
* screen. |
| 1649 |
|
* |
| 1650 |
|
* Results: |
| 1651 |
|
* None. |
| 1652 |
|
* |
| 1653 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1654 |
|
* The line given by dlPtr is drawn at its correct position in |
| 1655 |
|
* textPtr's window. Note that this is one *display* line, not |
| 1656 |
|
* one *text* line. |
| 1657 |
|
* |
| 1658 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1659 |
|
*/ |
| 1660 |
|
|
| 1661 |
|
static void |
| 1662 |
|
DisplayDLine(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap) |
| 1663 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Text widget in which to draw line. */ |
| 1664 |
|
register DLine *dlPtr; /* Information about line to draw. */ |
| 1665 |
|
DLine *prevPtr; /* Line just before one to draw, or NULL |
| 1666 |
|
* if dlPtr is the top line. */ |
| 1667 |
|
Pixmap pixmap; /* Pixmap to use for double-buffering. |
| 1668 |
|
* Caller must make sure it's large enough |
| 1669 |
|
* to hold line. */ |
| 1670 |
|
{ |
| 1671 |
|
register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; |
| 1672 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 1673 |
|
Display *display; |
| 1674 |
|
int height, x; |
| 1675 |
|
|
| 1676 |
|
if (dlPtr->chunkPtr == NULL) return; |
| 1677 |
|
|
| 1678 |
|
/* |
| 1679 |
|
* First, clear the area of the line to the background color for the |
| 1680 |
|
* text widget. |
| 1681 |
|
*/ |
| 1682 |
|
|
| 1683 |
|
display = Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin); |
| 1684 |
|
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, textPtr->border, 0, 0, |
| 1685 |
|
Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin), dlPtr->height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); |
| 1686 |
|
|
| 1687 |
|
/* |
| 1688 |
|
* Next, draw background information for the whole line. |
| 1689 |
|
*/ |
| 1690 |
|
|
| 1691 |
|
DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap); |
| 1692 |
|
|
| 1693 |
|
/* |
| 1694 |
|
* Make another pass through all of the chunks to redraw the |
| 1695 |
|
* insertion cursor, if it is visible on this line. Must do |
| 1696 |
|
* it here rather than in the foreground pass below because |
| 1697 |
|
* otherwise a wide insertion cursor will obscure the character |
| 1698 |
|
* to its left. |
| 1699 |
|
*/ |
| 1700 |
|
|
| 1701 |
|
if (textPtr->state == TK_STATE_NORMAL) { |
| 1702 |
|
for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; (chunkPtr != NULL); |
| 1703 |
|
chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 1704 |
|
x = chunkPtr->x + dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset; |
| 1705 |
|
if (chunkPtr->displayProc == TkTextInsertDisplayProc) { |
| 1706 |
|
(*chunkPtr->displayProc)(chunkPtr, x, dlPtr->spaceAbove, |
| 1707 |
|
dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow, |
| 1708 |
|
dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, display, pixmap, |
| 1709 |
|
dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove); |
| 1710 |
|
} |
| 1711 |
|
} |
| 1712 |
|
} |
| 1713 |
|
|
| 1714 |
|
/* |
| 1715 |
|
* Make yet another pass through all of the chunks to redraw all of |
| 1716 |
|
* foreground information. Note: we have to call the displayProc |
| 1717 |
|
* even for chunks that are off-screen. This is needed, for |
| 1718 |
|
* example, so that embedded windows can be unmapped in this case. |
| 1719 |
|
* Conve |
| 1720 |
|
*/ |
| 1721 |
|
|
| 1722 |
|
for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; (chunkPtr != NULL); |
| 1723 |
|
chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 1724 |
|
if (chunkPtr->displayProc == TkTextInsertDisplayProc) { |
| 1725 |
|
/* |
| 1726 |
|
* Already displayed the insertion cursor above. Don't |
| 1727 |
|
* do it again here. |
| 1728 |
|
*/ |
| 1729 |
|
|
| 1730 |
|
continue; |
| 1731 |
|
} |
| 1732 |
|
x = chunkPtr->x + dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset; |
| 1733 |
|
if ((x + chunkPtr->width <= 0) || (x >= dInfoPtr->maxX)) { |
| 1734 |
|
/* |
| 1735 |
|
* Note: we have to call the displayProc even for chunks |
| 1736 |
|
* that are off-screen. This is needed, for example, so |
| 1737 |
|
* that embedded windows can be unmapped in this case. |
| 1738 |
|
* Display the chunk at a coordinate that can be clearly |
| 1739 |
|
* identified by the displayProc as being off-screen to |
| 1740 |
|
* the left (the displayProc may not be able to tell if |
| 1741 |
|
* something is off to the right). |
| 1742 |
|
*/ |
| 1743 |
|
|
| 1744 |
|
if (chunkPtr->displayProc != NULL) |
| 1745 |
|
(*chunkPtr->displayProc)(chunkPtr, -chunkPtr->width, |
| 1746 |
|
dlPtr->spaceAbove, |
| 1747 |
|
dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow, |
| 1748 |
|
dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, display, pixmap, |
| 1749 |
|
dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove); |
| 1750 |
|
} else { |
| 1751 |
|
/* don't call if elide. This tax ok since not very many visible DLine's in |
| 1752 |
|
an area, but potentially many elide ones */ |
| 1753 |
|
if (chunkPtr->displayProc != NULL) |
| 1754 |
|
(*chunkPtr->displayProc)(chunkPtr, x, dlPtr->spaceAbove, |
| 1755 |
|
dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow, |
| 1756 |
|
dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, display, pixmap, |
| 1757 |
|
dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove); |
| 1758 |
|
} |
| 1759 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated) { |
| 1760 |
|
return; |
| 1761 |
|
} |
| 1762 |
|
} |
| 1763 |
|
|
| 1764 |
|
/* |
| 1765 |
|
* Copy the pixmap onto the screen. If this is the last line on |
| 1766 |
|
* the screen then copy a piece of the line, so that it doesn't |
| 1767 |
|
* overflow into the border area. Another special trick: copy the |
| 1768 |
|
* padding area to the left of the line; this is because the |
| 1769 |
|
* insertion cursor sometimes overflows onto that area and we want |
| 1770 |
|
* to get as much of the cursor as possible. |
| 1771 |
|
*/ |
| 1772 |
|
|
| 1773 |
|
height = dlPtr->height; |
| 1774 |
|
if ((height + dlPtr->y) > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
| 1775 |
|
height = dInfoPtr->maxY - dlPtr->y; |
| 1776 |
|
} |
| 1777 |
|
XCopyArea(display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), dInfoPtr->copyGC, |
| 1778 |
|
dInfoPtr->x, 0, (unsigned) (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x), |
| 1779 |
|
(unsigned) height, dInfoPtr->x, dlPtr->y); |
| 1780 |
|
linesRedrawn++; |
| 1781 |
|
} |
| 1782 |
|
|
| 1783 |
|
/* |
| 1784 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1785 |
|
* |
| 1786 |
|
* DisplayLineBackground -- |
| 1787 |
|
* |
| 1788 |
|
* This procedure is called to fill in the background for |
| 1789 |
|
* a display line. It draws 3D borders cleverly so that |
| 1790 |
|
* adjacent chunks with the same style (whether on the same |
| 1791 |
|
* line or different lines) have a single 3D border around |
| 1792 |
|
* the whole region. |
| 1793 |
|
* |
| 1794 |
|
* Results: |
| 1795 |
|
* There is no return value. Pixmap is filled in with background |
| 1796 |
|
* information for dlPtr. |
| 1797 |
|
* |
| 1798 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1799 |
|
* None. |
| 1800 |
|
* |
| 1801 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1802 |
|
*/ |
| 1803 |
|
|
| 1804 |
|
static void |
| 1805 |
|
DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap) |
| 1806 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Text widget containing line. */ |
| 1807 |
|
register DLine *dlPtr; /* Information about line to draw. */ |
| 1808 |
|
DLine *prevPtr; /* Line just above dlPtr, or NULL if dlPtr |
| 1809 |
|
* is the top-most line in the window. */ |
| 1810 |
|
Pixmap pixmap; /* Pixmap to use for double-buffering. |
| 1811 |
|
* Caller must make sure it's large enough |
| 1812 |
|
* to hold line. Caller must also have |
| 1813 |
|
* filled it with the background color for |
| 1814 |
|
* the widget. */ |
| 1815 |
|
{ |
| 1816 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 1817 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Pointer to chunk in the current line. */ |
| 1818 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr2; /* Pointer to chunk in the line above or |
| 1819 |
|
* below the current one. NULL if we're to |
| 1820 |
|
* the left of or to the right of the chunks |
| 1821 |
|
* in the line. */ |
| 1822 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *nextPtr2; /* Next chunk after chunkPtr2 (it's not the |
| 1823 |
|
* same as chunkPtr2->nextPtr in the case |
| 1824 |
|
* where chunkPtr2 is NULL because the line |
| 1825 |
|
* is indented). */ |
| 1826 |
|
int leftX; /* The left edge of the region we're |
| 1827 |
|
* currently working on. */ |
| 1828 |
|
int leftXIn; /* 1 means beveled edge at leftX slopes right |
| 1829 |
|
* as it goes down, 0 means it slopes left |
| 1830 |
|
* as it goes down. */ |
| 1831 |
|
int rightX; /* Right edge of chunkPtr. */ |
| 1832 |
|
int rightX2; /* Right edge of chunkPtr2. */ |
| 1833 |
|
int matchLeft; /* Does the style of this line match that |
| 1834 |
|
* of its neighbor just to the left of |
| 1835 |
|
* the current x coordinate? */ |
| 1836 |
|
int matchRight; /* Does line's style match its neighbor |
| 1837 |
|
* just to the right of the current x-coord? */ |
| 1838 |
|
int minX, maxX, xOffset; |
| 1839 |
|
StyleValues *sValuePtr; |
| 1840 |
|
Display *display; |
| 1841 |
|
|
| 1842 |
|
|
| 1843 |
|
/* |
| 1844 |
|
* Pass 1: scan through dlPtr from left to right. For each range of |
| 1845 |
|
* chunks with the same style, draw the main background for the style |
| 1846 |
|
* plus the vertical parts of the 3D borders (the left and right |
| 1847 |
|
* edges). |
| 1848 |
|
*/ |
| 1849 |
|
|
| 1850 |
|
display = Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin); |
| 1851 |
|
minX = dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset; |
| 1852 |
|
xOffset = dInfoPtr->x - minX; |
| 1853 |
|
maxX = minX + dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x; |
| 1854 |
|
chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; |
| 1855 |
|
|
| 1856 |
|
/* |
| 1857 |
|
* Note A: in the following statement, and a few others later in |
| 1858 |
|
* this file marked with "See Note A above", the right side of the |
| 1859 |
|
* assignment was replaced with 0 on 6/18/97. This has the effect |
| 1860 |
|
* of highlighting the empty space to the left of a line whenever |
| 1861 |
|
* the leftmost character of the line is highlighted. This way, |
| 1862 |
|
* multi-line highlights always line up along their left edges. |
| 1863 |
|
* However, this may look funny in the case where a single word is |
| 1864 |
|
* highlighted. To undo the change, replace "leftX = 0" with "leftX |
| 1865 |
|
* = chunkPtr->x" and "rightX2 = 0" with "rightX2 = nextPtr2->x" |
| 1866 |
|
* here and at all the marked points below. This restores the old |
| 1867 |
|
* behavior where empty space to the left of a line is not |
| 1868 |
|
* highlighted, leaving a ragged left edge for multi-line |
| 1869 |
|
* highlights. |
| 1870 |
|
*/ |
| 1871 |
|
|
| 1872 |
|
leftX = 0; |
| 1873 |
|
for (; leftX < maxX; chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 1874 |
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr != NULL) |
| 1875 |
|
&& SAME_BACKGROUND(chunkPtr->nextPtr->stylePtr, |
| 1876 |
|
chunkPtr->stylePtr)) { |
| 1877 |
|
continue; |
| 1878 |
|
} |
| 1879 |
|
sValuePtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr; |
| 1880 |
|
rightX = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width; |
| 1881 |
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) && (rightX < maxX)) { |
| 1882 |
|
rightX = maxX; |
| 1883 |
|
} |
| 1884 |
|
if (chunkPtr->stylePtr->bgGC != None) { |
| 1885 |
|
XFillRectangle(display, pixmap, chunkPtr->stylePtr->bgGC, |
| 1886 |
|
leftX + xOffset, 0, (unsigned int) (rightX - leftX), |
| 1887 |
|
(unsigned int) dlPtr->height); |
| 1888 |
|
if (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { |
| 1889 |
|
Tk_3DVerticalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
| 1890 |
|
leftX + xOffset, 0, sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
| 1891 |
|
dlPtr->height, 1, sValuePtr->relief); |
| 1892 |
|
Tk_3DVerticalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
| 1893 |
|
rightX - sValuePtr->borderWidth + xOffset, |
| 1894 |
|
0, sValuePtr->borderWidth, dlPtr->height, 0, |
| 1895 |
|
sValuePtr->relief); |
| 1896 |
|
} |
| 1897 |
|
} |
| 1898 |
|
leftX = rightX; |
| 1899 |
|
} |
| 1900 |
|
|
| 1901 |
|
/* |
| 1902 |
|
* Pass 2: draw the horizontal bevels along the top of the line. To |
| 1903 |
|
* do this, scan through dlPtr from left to right while simultaneously |
| 1904 |
|
* scanning through the line just above dlPtr. ChunkPtr2 and nextPtr2 |
| 1905 |
|
* refer to two adjacent chunks in the line above. |
| 1906 |
|
*/ |
| 1907 |
|
|
| 1908 |
|
chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; |
| 1909 |
|
leftX = 0; /* See Note A above. */ |
| 1910 |
|
leftXIn = 1; |
| 1911 |
|
rightX = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width; |
| 1912 |
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) && (rightX < maxX)) { |
| 1913 |
|
rightX = maxX; |
| 1914 |
|
} |
| 1915 |
|
chunkPtr2 = NULL; |
| 1916 |
|
if (prevPtr != NULL && prevPtr->chunkPtr != NULL) { |
| 1917 |
|
/* |
| 1918 |
|
* Find the chunk in the previous line that covers leftX. |
| 1919 |
|
*/ |
| 1920 |
|
|
| 1921 |
|
nextPtr2 = prevPtr->chunkPtr; |
| 1922 |
|
rightX2 = 0; /* See Note A above. */ |
| 1923 |
|
while (rightX2 <= leftX) { |
| 1924 |
|
chunkPtr2 = nextPtr2; |
| 1925 |
|
if (chunkPtr2 == NULL) { |
| 1926 |
|
break; |
| 1927 |
|
} |
| 1928 |
|
nextPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr; |
| 1929 |
|
rightX2 = chunkPtr2->x + chunkPtr2->width; |
| 1930 |
|
if (nextPtr2 == NULL) { |
| 1931 |
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
| 1932 |
|
} |
| 1933 |
|
} |
| 1934 |
|
} else { |
| 1935 |
|
nextPtr2 = NULL; |
| 1936 |
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
| 1937 |
|
} |
| 1938 |
|
|
| 1939 |
|
while (leftX < maxX) { |
| 1940 |
|
matchLeft = (chunkPtr2 != NULL) |
| 1941 |
|
&& SAME_BACKGROUND(chunkPtr2->stylePtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
| 1942 |
|
sValuePtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr; |
| 1943 |
|
if (rightX <= rightX2) { |
| 1944 |
|
/* |
| 1945 |
|
* The chunk in our line is about to end. If its style |
| 1946 |
|
* changes then draw the bevel for the current style. |
| 1947 |
|
*/ |
| 1948 |
|
|
| 1949 |
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) |
| 1950 |
|
|| !SAME_BACKGROUND(chunkPtr->stylePtr, |
| 1951 |
|
chunkPtr->nextPtr->stylePtr)) { |
| 1952 |
|
if (!matchLeft && (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)) { |
| 1953 |
|
Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, |
| 1954 |
|
sValuePtr->border, leftX + xOffset, 0, |
| 1955 |
|
rightX - leftX, sValuePtr->borderWidth, leftXIn, |
| 1956 |
|
1, 1, sValuePtr->relief); |
| 1957 |
|
} |
| 1958 |
|
leftX = rightX; |
| 1959 |
|
leftXIn = 1; |
| 1960 |
|
|
| 1961 |
|
/* |
| 1962 |
|
* If the chunk in the line above is also ending at |
| 1963 |
|
* the same point then advance to the next chunk in |
| 1964 |
|
* that line. |
| 1965 |
|
*/ |
| 1966 |
|
|
| 1967 |
|
if ((rightX == rightX2) && (chunkPtr2 != NULL)) { |
| 1968 |
|
goto nextChunk2; |
| 1969 |
|
} |
| 1970 |
|
} |
| 1971 |
|
chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1972 |
|
if (chunkPtr == NULL) { |
| 1973 |
|
break; |
| 1974 |
|
} |
| 1975 |
|
rightX = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width; |
| 1976 |
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) && (rightX < maxX)) { |
| 1977 |
|
rightX = maxX; |
| 1978 |
|
} |
| 1979 |
|
continue; |
| 1980 |
|
} |
| 1981 |
|
|
| 1982 |
|
/* |
| 1983 |
|
* The chunk in the line above is ending at an x-position where |
| 1984 |
|
* there is no change in the style of the current line. If the |
| 1985 |
|
* style above matches the current line on one side of the change |
| 1986 |
|
* but not on the other, we have to draw an L-shaped piece of |
| 1987 |
|
* bevel. |
| 1988 |
|
*/ |
| 1989 |
|
|
| 1990 |
|
matchRight = (nextPtr2 != NULL) |
| 1991 |
|
&& SAME_BACKGROUND(nextPtr2->stylePtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
| 1992 |
|
if (matchLeft && !matchRight) { |
| 1993 |
|
if (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { |
| 1994 |
|
Tk_3DVerticalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
| 1995 |
|
rightX2 - sValuePtr->borderWidth + xOffset, 0, |
| 1996 |
|
sValuePtr->borderWidth, sValuePtr->borderWidth, 0, |
| 1997 |
|
sValuePtr->relief); |
| 1998 |
|
} |
| 1999 |
|
leftX = rightX2 - sValuePtr->borderWidth; |
| 2000 |
|
leftXIn = 0; |
| 2001 |
|
} else if (!matchLeft && matchRight |
| 2002 |
|
&& (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)) { |
| 2003 |
|
Tk_3DVerticalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
| 2004 |
|
rightX2 + xOffset, 0, sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
| 2005 |
|
sValuePtr->borderWidth, 1, sValuePtr->relief); |
| 2006 |
|
Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
| 2007 |
|
leftX + xOffset, 0, rightX2 + sValuePtr->borderWidth -leftX, |
| 2008 |
|
sValuePtr->borderWidth, leftXIn, 0, 1, |
| 2009 |
|
sValuePtr->relief); |
| 2010 |
|
} |
| 2011 |
|
|
| 2012 |
|
nextChunk2: |
| 2013 |
|
chunkPtr2 = nextPtr2; |
| 2014 |
|
if (chunkPtr2 == NULL) { |
| 2015 |
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
| 2016 |
|
} else { |
| 2017 |
|
nextPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr; |
| 2018 |
|
rightX2 = chunkPtr2->x + chunkPtr2->width; |
| 2019 |
|
if (nextPtr2 == NULL) { |
| 2020 |
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
| 2021 |
|
} |
| 2022 |
|
} |
| 2023 |
|
} |
| 2024 |
|
/* |
| 2025 |
|
* Pass 3: draw the horizontal bevels along the bottom of the line. |
| 2026 |
|
* This uses the same approach as pass 2. |
| 2027 |
|
*/ |
| 2028 |
|
|
| 2029 |
|
chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; |
| 2030 |
|
leftX = 0; /* See Note A above. */ |
| 2031 |
|
leftXIn = 0; |
| 2032 |
|
rightX = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width; |
| 2033 |
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) && (rightX < maxX)) { |
| 2034 |
|
rightX = maxX; |
| 2035 |
|
} |
| 2036 |
|
chunkPtr2 = NULL; |
| 2037 |
|
if (dlPtr->nextPtr != NULL && dlPtr->nextPtr->chunkPtr != NULL) { |
| 2038 |
|
/* |
| 2039 |
|
* Find the chunk in the previous line that covers leftX. |
| 2040 |
|
*/ |
| 2041 |
|
|
| 2042 |
|
nextPtr2 = dlPtr->nextPtr->chunkPtr; |
| 2043 |
|
rightX2 = 0; /* See Note A above. */ |
| 2044 |
|
while (rightX2 <= leftX) { |
| 2045 |
|
chunkPtr2 = nextPtr2; |
| 2046 |
|
if (chunkPtr2 == NULL) { |
| 2047 |
|
break; |
| 2048 |
|
} |
| 2049 |
|
nextPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr; |
| 2050 |
|
rightX2 = chunkPtr2->x + chunkPtr2->width; |
| 2051 |
|
if (nextPtr2 == NULL) { |
| 2052 |
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
| 2053 |
|
} |
| 2054 |
|
} |
| 2055 |
|
} else { |
| 2056 |
|
nextPtr2 = NULL; |
| 2057 |
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
| 2058 |
|
} |
| 2059 |
|
|
| 2060 |
|
while (leftX < maxX) { |
| 2061 |
|
matchLeft = (chunkPtr2 != NULL) |
| 2062 |
|
&& SAME_BACKGROUND(chunkPtr2->stylePtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
| 2063 |
|
sValuePtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr; |
| 2064 |
|
if (rightX <= rightX2) { |
| 2065 |
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) |
| 2066 |
|
|| !SAME_BACKGROUND(chunkPtr->stylePtr, |
| 2067 |
|
chunkPtr->nextPtr->stylePtr)) { |
| 2068 |
|
if (!matchLeft && (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)) { |
| 2069 |
|
Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, |
| 2070 |
|
sValuePtr->border, leftX + xOffset, |
| 2071 |
|
dlPtr->height - sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
| 2072 |
|
rightX - leftX, sValuePtr->borderWidth, leftXIn, |
| 2073 |
|
0, 0, sValuePtr->relief); |
| 2074 |
|
} |
| 2075 |
|
leftX = rightX; |
| 2076 |
|
leftXIn = 0; |
| 2077 |
|
if ((rightX == rightX2) && (chunkPtr2 != NULL)) { |
| 2078 |
|
goto nextChunk2b; |
| 2079 |
|
} |
| 2080 |
|
} |
| 2081 |
|
chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr; |
| 2082 |
|
if (chunkPtr == NULL) { |
| 2083 |
|
break; |
| 2084 |
|
} |
| 2085 |
|
rightX = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width; |
| 2086 |
|
if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) && (rightX < maxX)) { |
| 2087 |
|
rightX = maxX; |
| 2088 |
|
} |
| 2089 |
|
continue; |
| 2090 |
|
} |
| 2091 |
|
|
| 2092 |
|
matchRight = (nextPtr2 != NULL) |
| 2093 |
|
&& SAME_BACKGROUND(nextPtr2->stylePtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr); |
| 2094 |
|
if (matchLeft && !matchRight) { |
| 2095 |
|
if (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) { |
| 2096 |
|
Tk_3DVerticalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
| 2097 |
|
rightX2 - sValuePtr->borderWidth + xOffset, |
| 2098 |
|
dlPtr->height - sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
| 2099 |
|
sValuePtr->borderWidth, sValuePtr->borderWidth, 0, |
| 2100 |
|
sValuePtr->relief); |
| 2101 |
|
} |
| 2102 |
|
leftX = rightX2 - sValuePtr->borderWidth; |
| 2103 |
|
leftXIn = 1; |
| 2104 |
|
} else if (!matchLeft && matchRight |
| 2105 |
|
&& (sValuePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)) { |
| 2106 |
|
Tk_3DVerticalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
| 2107 |
|
rightX2 + xOffset, dlPtr->height - sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
| 2108 |
|
sValuePtr->borderWidth, sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
| 2109 |
|
1, sValuePtr->relief); |
| 2110 |
|
Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border, |
| 2111 |
|
leftX + xOffset, dlPtr->height - sValuePtr->borderWidth, |
| 2112 |
|
rightX2 + sValuePtr->borderWidth - leftX, |
| 2113 |
|
sValuePtr->borderWidth, leftXIn, 1, 0, sValuePtr->relief); |
| 2114 |
|
} |
| 2115 |
|
|
| 2116 |
|
nextChunk2b: |
| 2117 |
|
chunkPtr2 = nextPtr2; |
| 2118 |
|
if (chunkPtr2 == NULL) { |
| 2119 |
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
| 2120 |
|
} else { |
| 2121 |
|
nextPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr; |
| 2122 |
|
rightX2 = chunkPtr2->x + chunkPtr2->width; |
| 2123 |
|
if (nextPtr2 == NULL) { |
| 2124 |
|
rightX2 = INT_MAX; |
| 2125 |
|
} |
| 2126 |
|
} |
| 2127 |
|
} |
| 2128 |
|
} |
| 2129 |
|
|
| 2130 |
|
/* |
| 2131 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2132 |
|
* |
| 2133 |
|
* DisplayText -- |
| 2134 |
|
* |
| 2135 |
|
* This procedure is invoked as a when-idle handler to update the |
| 2136 |
|
* display. It only redisplays the parts of the text widget that |
| 2137 |
|
* are out of date. |
| 2138 |
|
* |
| 2139 |
|
* Results: |
| 2140 |
|
* None. |
| 2141 |
|
* |
| 2142 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2143 |
|
* Information is redrawn on the screen. |
| 2144 |
|
* |
| 2145 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2146 |
|
*/ |
| 2147 |
|
|
| 2148 |
|
static void |
| 2149 |
|
DisplayText(clientData) |
| 2150 |
|
ClientData clientData; /* Information about widget. */ |
| 2151 |
|
{ |
| 2152 |
|
register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData; |
| 2153 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 2154 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin; |
| 2155 |
|
register DLine *dlPtr; |
| 2156 |
|
DLine *prevPtr; |
| 2157 |
|
Pixmap pixmap; |
| 2158 |
|
int maxHeight, borders; |
| 2159 |
|
int bottomY = 0; /* Initialization needed only to stop |
| 2160 |
|
* compiler warnings. */ |
| 2161 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; |
| 2162 |
|
|
| 2163 |
|
if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) { |
| 2164 |
|
|
| 2165 |
|
/* |
| 2166 |
|
* The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. |
| 2167 |
|
*/ |
| 2168 |
|
|
| 2169 |
|
return; |
| 2170 |
|
} |
| 2171 |
|
|
| 2172 |
|
interp = textPtr->interp; |
| 2173 |
|
Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp); |
| 2174 |
|
|
| 2175 |
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
| 2176 |
|
Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "tk_textRelayout", (char *) NULL, "", |
| 2177 |
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY); |
| 2178 |
|
} |
| 2179 |
|
|
| 2180 |
|
if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) { |
| 2181 |
|
|
| 2182 |
|
/* |
| 2183 |
|
* The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. |
| 2184 |
|
*/ |
| 2185 |
|
|
| 2186 |
|
goto end; |
| 2187 |
|
} |
| 2188 |
|
|
| 2189 |
|
if (!Tk_IsMapped(textPtr->tkwin) || (dInfoPtr->maxX <= dInfoPtr->x) |
| 2190 |
|
|| (dInfoPtr->maxY <= dInfoPtr->y)) { |
| 2191 |
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
| 2192 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; |
| 2193 |
|
goto doScrollbars; |
| 2194 |
|
} |
| 2195 |
|
numRedisplays++; |
| 2196 |
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
| 2197 |
|
Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "tk_textRedraw", (char *) NULL, "", |
| 2198 |
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY); |
| 2199 |
|
} |
| 2200 |
|
|
| 2201 |
|
if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) { |
| 2202 |
|
|
| 2203 |
|
/* |
| 2204 |
|
* The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. |
| 2205 |
|
*/ |
| 2206 |
|
|
| 2207 |
|
goto end; |
| 2208 |
|
} |
| 2209 |
|
|
| 2210 |
|
/* |
| 2211 |
|
* Choose a new current item if that is needed (this could cause |
| 2212 |
|
* event handlers to be invoked, hence the preserve/release calls |
| 2213 |
|
* and the loop, since the handlers could conceivably necessitate |
| 2214 |
|
* yet another current item calculation). The tkwin check is because |
| 2215 |
|
* the whole window could go away in the Tcl_Release call. |
| 2216 |
|
*/ |
| 2217 |
|
|
| 2218 |
|
while (dInfoPtr->flags & REPICK_NEEDED) { |
| 2219 |
|
Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) textPtr); |
| 2220 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags &= ~REPICK_NEEDED; |
| 2221 |
|
TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, &textPtr->pickEvent); |
| 2222 |
|
tkwin = textPtr->tkwin; |
| 2223 |
|
Tcl_Release((ClientData) textPtr); |
| 2224 |
|
if (tkwin == NULL) { |
| 2225 |
|
goto end; |
| 2226 |
|
} |
| 2227 |
|
} |
| 2228 |
|
|
| 2229 |
|
/* |
| 2230 |
|
* First recompute what's supposed to be displayed. |
| 2231 |
|
*/ |
| 2232 |
|
|
| 2233 |
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
| 2234 |
|
dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated = 0; |
| 2235 |
|
|
| 2236 |
|
/* |
| 2237 |
|
* See if it's possible to bring some parts of the screen up-to-date |
| 2238 |
|
* by scrolling (copying from other parts of the screen). |
| 2239 |
|
*/ |
| 2240 |
|
|
| 2241 |
|
for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 2242 |
|
register DLine *dlPtr2; |
| 2243 |
|
int offset, height, y, oldY; |
| 2244 |
|
TkRegion damageRgn; |
| 2245 |
|
|
| 2246 |
|
if ((dlPtr->oldY == -1) || (dlPtr->y == dlPtr->oldY) |
| 2247 |
|
|| ((dlPtr->oldY + dlPtr->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY)) { |
| 2248 |
|
continue; |
| 2249 |
|
} |
| 2250 |
|
|
| 2251 |
|
/* |
| 2252 |
|
* This line is already drawn somewhere in the window so it only |
| 2253 |
|
* needs to be copied to its new location. See if there's a group |
| 2254 |
|
* of lines that can all be copied together. |
| 2255 |
|
*/ |
| 2256 |
|
|
| 2257 |
|
offset = dlPtr->y - dlPtr->oldY; |
| 2258 |
|
height = dlPtr->height; |
| 2259 |
|
y = dlPtr->y; |
| 2260 |
|
for (dlPtr2 = dlPtr->nextPtr; dlPtr2 != NULL; |
| 2261 |
|
dlPtr2 = dlPtr2->nextPtr) { |
| 2262 |
|
if ((dlPtr2->oldY == -1) |
| 2263 |
|
|| ((dlPtr2->oldY + offset) != dlPtr2->y) |
| 2264 |
|
|| ((dlPtr2->oldY + dlPtr2->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY)) { |
| 2265 |
|
break; |
| 2266 |
|
} |
| 2267 |
|
height += dlPtr2->height; |
| 2268 |
|
} |
| 2269 |
|
|
| 2270 |
|
/* |
| 2271 |
|
* Reduce the height of the area being copied if necessary to |
| 2272 |
|
* avoid overwriting the border area. |
| 2273 |
|
*/ |
| 2274 |
|
|
| 2275 |
|
if ((y + height) > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
| 2276 |
|
height = dInfoPtr->maxY -y; |
| 2277 |
|
} |
| 2278 |
|
oldY = dlPtr->oldY; |
| 2279 |
|
|
| 2280 |
|
/* |
| 2281 |
|
* Update the lines we are going to scroll to show that they |
| 2282 |
|
* have been copied. |
| 2283 |
|
*/ |
| 2284 |
|
|
| 2285 |
|
while (1) { |
| 2286 |
|
dlPtr->oldY = dlPtr->y; |
| 2287 |
|
if (dlPtr->nextPtr == dlPtr2) { |
| 2288 |
|
break; |
| 2289 |
|
} |
| 2290 |
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
| 2291 |
|
} |
| 2292 |
|
|
| 2293 |
|
/* |
| 2294 |
|
* Scan through the lines following the copied ones to see if |
| 2295 |
|
* we are going to overwrite them with the copy operation. |
| 2296 |
|
* If so, mark them for redisplay. |
| 2297 |
|
*/ |
| 2298 |
|
|
| 2299 |
|
for ( ; dlPtr2 != NULL; dlPtr2 = dlPtr2->nextPtr) { |
| 2300 |
|
if ((dlPtr2->oldY != -1) |
| 2301 |
|
&& ((dlPtr2->oldY + dlPtr2->height) > y) |
| 2302 |
|
&& (dlPtr2->oldY < (y + height))) { |
| 2303 |
|
dlPtr2->oldY = -1; |
| 2304 |
|
} |
| 2305 |
|
} |
| 2306 |
|
|
| 2307 |
|
/* |
| 2308 |
|
* Now scroll the lines. This may generate damage which we |
| 2309 |
|
* handle by calling TextInvalidateRegion to mark the display |
| 2310 |
|
* blocks as stale. |
| 2311 |
|
*/ |
| 2312 |
|
|
| 2313 |
|
damageRgn = TkCreateRegion(); |
| 2314 |
|
if (TkScrollWindow(textPtr->tkwin, dInfoPtr->scrollGC, |
| 2315 |
|
dInfoPtr->x, oldY, |
| 2316 |
|
(dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x), height, |
| 2317 |
|
0, y - oldY, damageRgn)) { |
| 2318 |
|
TextInvalidateRegion(textPtr, damageRgn); |
| 2319 |
|
} |
| 2320 |
|
numCopies++; |
| 2321 |
|
TkDestroyRegion(damageRgn); |
| 2322 |
|
} |
| 2323 |
|
|
| 2324 |
|
/* |
| 2325 |
|
* Clear the REDRAW_PENDING flag here. This is actually pretty |
| 2326 |
|
* tricky. We want to wait until *after* doing the scrolling, |
| 2327 |
|
* since that could generate more areas to redraw and don't |
| 2328 |
|
* want to reschedule a redisplay for them. On the other hand, |
| 2329 |
|
* we can't wait until after all the redisplaying, because the |
| 2330 |
|
* act of redisplaying could actually generate more redisplays |
| 2331 |
|
* (e.g. in the case of a nested window with event bindings triggered |
| 2332 |
|
* by redisplay). |
| 2333 |
|
*/ |
| 2334 |
|
|
| 2335 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING; |
| 2336 |
|
|
| 2337 |
|
/* |
| 2338 |
|
* Redraw the borders if that's needed. |
| 2339 |
|
*/ |
| 2340 |
|
|
| 2341 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_BORDERS) { |
| 2342 |
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
| 2343 |
|
Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "tk_textRedraw", (char *) NULL, "borders", |
| 2344 |
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); |
| 2345 |
|
} |
| 2346 |
|
|
| 2347 |
|
if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) { |
| 2348 |
|
|
| 2349 |
|
/* |
| 2350 |
|
* The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. |
| 2351 |
|
*/ |
| 2352 |
|
|
| 2353 |
|
goto end; |
| 2354 |
|
} |
| 2355 |
|
|
| 2356 |
|
Tk_Draw3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), |
| 2357 |
|
textPtr->border, textPtr->highlightWidth, |
| 2358 |
|
textPtr->highlightWidth, |
| 2359 |
|
Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - 2*textPtr->highlightWidth, |
| 2360 |
|
Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - 2*textPtr->highlightWidth, |
| 2361 |
|
textPtr->borderWidth, textPtr->relief); |
| 2362 |
|
if (textPtr->highlightWidth != 0) { |
| 2363 |
|
GC fgGC, bgGC; |
| 2364 |
|
|
| 2365 |
|
bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(textPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, |
| 2366 |
|
Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin)); |
| 2367 |
|
if (textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) { |
| 2368 |
|
fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(textPtr->highlightColorPtr, |
| 2369 |
|
Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin)); |
| 2370 |
|
TkpDrawHighlightBorder(textPtr->tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, |
| 2371 |
|
textPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin)); |
| 2372 |
|
} else { |
| 2373 |
|
TkpDrawHighlightBorder(textPtr->tkwin, bgGC, bgGC, |
| 2374 |
|
textPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin)); |
| 2375 |
|
} |
| 2376 |
|
} |
| 2377 |
|
borders = textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->highlightWidth; |
| 2378 |
|
if (textPtr->padY > 0) { |
| 2379 |
|
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), |
| 2380 |
|
textPtr->border, borders, borders, |
| 2381 |
|
Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - 2*borders, textPtr->padY, |
| 2382 |
|
0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); |
| 2383 |
|
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), |
| 2384 |
|
textPtr->border, borders, |
| 2385 |
|
Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - borders - textPtr->padY, |
| 2386 |
|
Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - 2*borders, |
| 2387 |
|
textPtr->padY, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); |
| 2388 |
|
} |
| 2389 |
|
if (textPtr->padX > 0) { |
| 2390 |
|
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), |
| 2391 |
|
textPtr->border, borders, borders + textPtr->padY, |
| 2392 |
|
textPtr->padX, |
| 2393 |
|
Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - 2*borders -2*textPtr->padY, |
| 2394 |
|
0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); |
| 2395 |
|
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), |
| 2396 |
|
textPtr->border, |
| 2397 |
|
Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - borders - textPtr->padX, |
| 2398 |
|
borders + textPtr->padY, textPtr->padX, |
| 2399 |
|
Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - 2*borders -2*textPtr->padY, |
| 2400 |
|
0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); |
| 2401 |
|
} |
| 2402 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_BORDERS; |
| 2403 |
|
} |
| 2404 |
|
|
| 2405 |
|
/* |
| 2406 |
|
* Now we have to redraw the lines that couldn't be updated by |
| 2407 |
|
* scrolling. First, compute the height of the largest line and |
| 2408 |
|
* allocate an off-screen pixmap to use for double-buffered |
| 2409 |
|
* displays. |
| 2410 |
|
*/ |
| 2411 |
|
|
| 2412 |
|
maxHeight = -1; |
| 2413 |
|
for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; |
| 2414 |
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 2415 |
|
if ((dlPtr->height > maxHeight) && (dlPtr->oldY != dlPtr->y)) { |
| 2416 |
|
maxHeight = dlPtr->height; |
| 2417 |
|
} |
| 2418 |
|
bottomY = dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height; |
| 2419 |
|
} |
| 2420 |
|
if (maxHeight > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
| 2421 |
|
maxHeight = dInfoPtr->maxY; |
| 2422 |
|
} |
| 2423 |
|
if (maxHeight > 0) { |
| 2424 |
|
pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin), |
| 2425 |
|
Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin), |
| 2426 |
|
maxHeight, Tk_Depth(textPtr->tkwin)); |
| 2427 |
|
for (prevPtr = NULL, dlPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
| 2428 |
|
(dlPtr != NULL) && (dlPtr->y < dInfoPtr->maxY); |
| 2429 |
|
prevPtr = dlPtr, dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 2430 |
|
if (dlPtr->chunkPtr == NULL) continue; |
| 2431 |
|
if (dlPtr->oldY != dlPtr->y) { |
| 2432 |
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
| 2433 |
|
char string[TK_POS_CHARS]; |
| 2434 |
|
TkTextPrintIndex(&dlPtr->index, string); |
| 2435 |
|
Tcl_SetVar2(textPtr->interp, "tk_textRedraw", |
| 2436 |
|
(char *) NULL, string, |
| 2437 |
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); |
| 2438 |
|
} |
| 2439 |
|
DisplayDLine(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap); |
| 2440 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated) { |
| 2441 |
|
Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin), pixmap); |
| 2442 |
|
return; |
| 2443 |
|
} |
| 2444 |
|
dlPtr->oldY = dlPtr->y; |
| 2445 |
|
dlPtr->flags &= ~NEW_LAYOUT; |
| 2446 |
|
} |
| 2447 |
|
/*prevPtr = dlPtr;*/ |
| 2448 |
|
} |
| 2449 |
|
Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin), pixmap); |
| 2450 |
|
} |
| 2451 |
|
|
| 2452 |
|
/* |
| 2453 |
|
* See if we need to refresh the part of the window below the |
| 2454 |
|
* last line of text (if there is any such area). Refresh the |
| 2455 |
|
* padding area on the left too, since the insertion cursor might |
| 2456 |
|
* have been displayed there previously). |
| 2457 |
|
*/ |
| 2458 |
|
|
| 2459 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->topOfEof > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
| 2460 |
|
dInfoPtr->topOfEof = dInfoPtr->maxY; |
| 2461 |
|
} |
| 2462 |
|
if (bottomY < dInfoPtr->topOfEof) { |
| 2463 |
|
if (tkTextDebug) { |
| 2464 |
|
Tcl_SetVar2(textPtr->interp, "tk_textRedraw", |
| 2465 |
|
(char *) NULL, "eof", |
| 2466 |
|
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT); |
| 2467 |
|
} |
| 2468 |
|
|
| 2469 |
|
if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) { |
| 2470 |
|
|
| 2471 |
|
/* |
| 2472 |
|
* The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. |
| 2473 |
|
*/ |
| 2474 |
|
|
| 2475 |
|
goto end; |
| 2476 |
|
} |
| 2477 |
|
|
| 2478 |
|
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), |
| 2479 |
|
textPtr->border, dInfoPtr->x - textPtr->padX, bottomY, |
| 2480 |
|
dInfoPtr->maxX - (dInfoPtr->x - textPtr->padX), |
| 2481 |
|
dInfoPtr->topOfEof-bottomY, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT); |
| 2482 |
|
} |
| 2483 |
|
dInfoPtr->topOfEof = bottomY; |
| 2484 |
|
|
| 2485 |
|
doScrollbars: |
| 2486 |
|
|
| 2487 |
|
/* |
| 2488 |
|
* Update the vertical scrollbar, if there is one. Note: it's |
| 2489 |
|
* important to clear REDRAW_PENDING here, just in case the |
| 2490 |
|
* scroll procedure does something that requires redisplay. |
| 2491 |
|
*/ |
| 2492 |
|
|
| 2493 |
|
if (textPtr->flags & UPDATE_SCROLLBARS) { |
| 2494 |
|
textPtr->flags &= ~UPDATE_SCROLLBARS; |
| 2495 |
|
if (textPtr->yScrollCmd != NULL) { |
| 2496 |
|
GetYView(textPtr->interp, textPtr, 1); |
| 2497 |
|
} |
| 2498 |
|
|
| 2499 |
|
if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) { |
| 2500 |
|
|
| 2501 |
|
/* |
| 2502 |
|
* The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything. |
| 2503 |
|
*/ |
| 2504 |
|
|
| 2505 |
|
goto end; |
| 2506 |
|
} |
| 2507 |
|
|
| 2508 |
|
/* |
| 2509 |
|
* Update the horizontal scrollbar, if any. |
| 2510 |
|
*/ |
| 2511 |
|
|
| 2512 |
|
if (textPtr->xScrollCmd != NULL) { |
| 2513 |
|
GetXView(textPtr->interp, textPtr, 1); |
| 2514 |
|
} |
| 2515 |
|
} |
| 2516 |
|
|
| 2517 |
|
end: |
| 2518 |
|
Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp); |
| 2519 |
|
} |
| 2520 |
|
|
| 2521 |
|
/* |
| 2522 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2523 |
|
* |
| 2524 |
|
* TkTextEventuallyRepick -- |
| 2525 |
|
* |
| 2526 |
|
* This procedure is invoked whenever something happens that |
| 2527 |
|
* could change the current character or the tags associated |
| 2528 |
|
* with it. |
| 2529 |
|
* |
| 2530 |
|
* Results: |
| 2531 |
|
* None. |
| 2532 |
|
* |
| 2533 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2534 |
|
* A repick is scheduled as an idle handler. |
| 2535 |
|
* |
| 2536 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2537 |
|
*/ |
| 2538 |
|
|
| 2539 |
|
/* ARGSUSED */ |
| 2540 |
|
void |
| 2541 |
|
TkTextEventuallyRepick(textPtr) |
| 2542 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
| 2543 |
|
{ |
| 2544 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 2545 |
|
|
| 2546 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REPICK_NEEDED; |
| 2547 |
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
| 2548 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING; |
| 2549 |
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
| 2550 |
|
} |
| 2551 |
|
} |
| 2552 |
|
|
| 2553 |
|
/* |
| 2554 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2555 |
|
* |
| 2556 |
|
* TkTextRedrawRegion -- |
| 2557 |
|
* |
| 2558 |
|
* This procedure is invoked to schedule a redisplay for a given |
| 2559 |
|
* region of a text widget. The redisplay itself may not occur |
| 2560 |
|
* immediately: it's scheduled as a when-idle handler. |
| 2561 |
|
* |
| 2562 |
|
* Results: |
| 2563 |
|
* None. |
| 2564 |
|
* |
| 2565 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2566 |
|
* Information will eventually be redrawn on the screen. |
| 2567 |
|
* |
| 2568 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2569 |
|
*/ |
| 2570 |
|
|
| 2571 |
|
/* ARGSUSED */ |
| 2572 |
|
void |
| 2573 |
|
TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, x, y, width, height) |
| 2574 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
| 2575 |
|
int x, y; /* Coordinates of upper-left corner of area |
| 2576 |
|
* to be redrawn, in pixels relative to |
| 2577 |
|
* textPtr's window. */ |
| 2578 |
|
int width, height; /* Width and height of area to be redrawn. */ |
| 2579 |
|
{ |
| 2580 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 2581 |
|
TkRegion damageRgn = TkCreateRegion(); |
| 2582 |
|
XRectangle rect; |
| 2583 |
|
|
| 2584 |
|
rect.x = x; |
| 2585 |
|
rect.y = y; |
| 2586 |
|
rect.width = width; |
| 2587 |
|
rect.height = height; |
| 2588 |
|
TkUnionRectWithRegion(&rect, damageRgn, damageRgn); |
| 2589 |
|
|
| 2590 |
|
TextInvalidateRegion(textPtr, damageRgn); |
| 2591 |
|
|
| 2592 |
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
| 2593 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING; |
| 2594 |
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
| 2595 |
|
} |
| 2596 |
|
TkDestroyRegion(damageRgn); |
| 2597 |
|
} |
| 2598 |
|
|
| 2599 |
|
/* |
| 2600 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2601 |
|
* |
| 2602 |
|
* TextInvalidateRegion -- |
| 2603 |
|
* |
| 2604 |
|
* Mark a region of text as invalid. |
| 2605 |
|
* |
| 2606 |
|
* Results: |
| 2607 |
|
* None. |
| 2608 |
|
* |
| 2609 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2610 |
|
* Updates the display information for the text widget. |
| 2611 |
|
* |
| 2612 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2613 |
|
*/ |
| 2614 |
|
|
| 2615 |
|
static void |
| 2616 |
|
TextInvalidateRegion(textPtr, region) |
| 2617 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
| 2618 |
|
TkRegion region; /* Region of area to redraw. */ |
| 2619 |
|
{ |
| 2620 |
|
register DLine *dlPtr; |
| 2621 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 2622 |
|
int maxY, inset; |
| 2623 |
|
XRectangle rect; |
| 2624 |
|
|
| 2625 |
|
/* |
| 2626 |
|
* Find all lines that overlap the given region and mark them for |
| 2627 |
|
* redisplay. |
| 2628 |
|
*/ |
| 2629 |
|
|
| 2630 |
|
TkClipBox(region, &rect); |
| 2631 |
|
maxY = rect.y + rect.height; |
| 2632 |
|
for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; |
| 2633 |
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 2634 |
|
if ((dlPtr->oldY != -1) && (TkRectInRegion(region, rect.x, dlPtr->y, |
| 2635 |
|
rect.width, (unsigned int) dlPtr->height) != RectangleOut)) { |
| 2636 |
|
dlPtr->oldY = -1; |
| 2637 |
|
} |
| 2638 |
|
} |
| 2639 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->topOfEof < maxY) { |
| 2640 |
|
dInfoPtr->topOfEof = maxY; |
| 2641 |
|
} |
| 2642 |
|
|
| 2643 |
|
/* |
| 2644 |
|
* Schedule the redisplay operation if there isn't one already |
| 2645 |
|
* scheduled. |
| 2646 |
|
*/ |
| 2647 |
|
|
| 2648 |
|
inset = textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->highlightWidth; |
| 2649 |
|
if ((rect.x < (inset + textPtr->padX)) |
| 2650 |
|
|| (rect.y < (inset + textPtr->padY)) |
| 2651 |
|
|| ((int) (rect.x + rect.width) > (Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) |
| 2652 |
|
- inset - textPtr->padX)) |
| 2653 |
|
|| (maxY > (Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - inset - textPtr->padY))) { |
| 2654 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_BORDERS; |
| 2655 |
|
} |
| 2656 |
|
} |
| 2657 |
|
|
| 2658 |
|
/* |
| 2659 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2660 |
|
* |
| 2661 |
|
* TkTextChanged -- |
| 2662 |
|
* |
| 2663 |
|
* This procedure is invoked when info in a text widget is about |
| 2664 |
|
* to be modified in a way that changes how it is displayed (e.g. |
| 2665 |
|
* characters were inserted or deleted, or tag information was |
| 2666 |
|
* changed). This procedure must be called *before* a change is |
| 2667 |
|
* made, so that indexes in the display information are still |
| 2668 |
|
* valid. |
| 2669 |
|
* |
| 2670 |
|
* Results: |
| 2671 |
|
* None. |
| 2672 |
|
* |
| 2673 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2674 |
|
* The range of character between index1Ptr (inclusive) and |
| 2675 |
|
* index2Ptr (exclusive) will be redisplayed at some point in the |
| 2676 |
|
* future (the actual redisplay is scheduled as a when-idle handler). |
| 2677 |
|
* |
| 2678 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2679 |
|
*/ |
| 2680 |
|
|
| 2681 |
|
void |
| 2682 |
|
TkTextChanged(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr) |
| 2683 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
| 2684 |
|
TkTextIndex *index1Ptr; /* Index of first character to redisplay. */ |
| 2685 |
|
TkTextIndex *index2Ptr; /* Index of character just after last one |
| 2686 |
|
* to redisplay. */ |
| 2687 |
|
{ |
| 2688 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 2689 |
|
DLine *firstPtr, *lastPtr; |
| 2690 |
|
TkTextIndex rounded; |
| 2691 |
|
|
| 2692 |
|
/* |
| 2693 |
|
* Schedule both a redisplay and a recomputation of display information. |
| 2694 |
|
* It's done here rather than the end of the procedure for two reasons: |
| 2695 |
|
* |
| 2696 |
|
* 1. If there are no display lines to update we'll want to return |
| 2697 |
|
* immediately, well before the end of the procedure. |
| 2698 |
|
* 2. It's important to arrange for the redisplay BEFORE calling |
| 2699 |
|
* FreeDLines. The reason for this is subtle and has to do with |
| 2700 |
|
* embedded windows. The chunk delete procedure for an embedded |
| 2701 |
|
* window will schedule an idle handler to unmap the window. |
| 2702 |
|
* However, we want the idle handler for redisplay to be called |
| 2703 |
|
* first, so that it can put the embedded window back on the screen |
| 2704 |
|
* again (if appropriate). This will prevent the window from ever |
| 2705 |
|
* being unmapped, and thereby avoid flashing. |
| 2706 |
|
*/ |
| 2707 |
|
|
| 2708 |
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
| 2709 |
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
| 2710 |
|
} |
| 2711 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED; |
| 2712 |
|
|
| 2713 |
|
/* |
| 2714 |
|
* Find the DLines corresponding to index1Ptr and index2Ptr. There |
| 2715 |
|
* is one tricky thing here, which is that we have to relayout in |
| 2716 |
|
* units of whole text lines: round index1Ptr back to the beginning |
| 2717 |
|
* of its text line, and include all the display lines after index2, |
| 2718 |
|
* up to the end of its text line. This is necessary because the |
| 2719 |
|
* indices stored in the display lines will no longer be valid. It's |
| 2720 |
|
* also needed because any edit could change the way lines wrap. |
| 2721 |
|
*/ |
| 2722 |
|
|
| 2723 |
|
rounded = *index1Ptr; |
| 2724 |
|
rounded.byteIndex = 0; |
| 2725 |
|
firstPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, &rounded); |
| 2726 |
|
if (firstPtr == NULL) { |
| 2727 |
|
return; |
| 2728 |
|
} |
| 2729 |
|
lastPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, index2Ptr); |
| 2730 |
|
while ((lastPtr != NULL) |
| 2731 |
|
&& (lastPtr->index.linePtr == index2Ptr->linePtr)) { |
| 2732 |
|
lastPtr = lastPtr->nextPtr; |
| 2733 |
|
} |
| 2734 |
|
|
| 2735 |
|
/* |
| 2736 |
|
* Delete all the DLines from firstPtr up to but not including lastPtr. |
| 2737 |
|
*/ |
| 2738 |
|
|
| 2739 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr, 1); |
| 2740 |
|
} |
| 2741 |
|
|
| 2742 |
|
/* |
| 2743 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2744 |
|
* |
| 2745 |
|
* TkTextRedrawTag -- |
| 2746 |
|
* |
| 2747 |
|
* This procedure is invoked to request a redraw of all characters |
| 2748 |
|
* in a given range that have a particular tag on or off. It's |
| 2749 |
|
* called, for example, when tag options change. |
| 2750 |
|
* |
| 2751 |
|
* Results: |
| 2752 |
|
* None. |
| 2753 |
|
* |
| 2754 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2755 |
|
* Information on the screen may be redrawn, and the layout of |
| 2756 |
|
* the screen may change. |
| 2757 |
|
* |
| 2758 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2759 |
|
*/ |
| 2760 |
|
|
| 2761 |
|
void |
| 2762 |
|
TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, withTag) |
| 2763 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
| 2764 |
|
TkTextIndex *index1Ptr; /* First character in range to consider |
| 2765 |
|
* for redisplay. NULL means start at |
| 2766 |
|
* beginning of text. */ |
| 2767 |
|
TkTextIndex *index2Ptr; /* Character just after last one to consider |
| 2768 |
|
* for redisplay. NULL means process all |
| 2769 |
|
* the characters in the text. */ |
| 2770 |
|
TkTextTag *tagPtr; /* Information about tag. */ |
| 2771 |
|
int withTag; /* 1 means redraw characters that have the |
| 2772 |
|
* tag, 0 means redraw those without. */ |
| 2773 |
|
{ |
| 2774 |
|
register DLine *dlPtr; |
| 2775 |
|
DLine *endPtr; |
| 2776 |
|
int tagOn; |
| 2777 |
|
TkTextSearch search; |
| 2778 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 2779 |
|
TkTextIndex *curIndexPtr; |
| 2780 |
|
TkTextIndex endOfText, *endIndexPtr; |
| 2781 |
|
|
| 2782 |
|
/* |
| 2783 |
|
* Round up the starting position if it's before the first line |
| 2784 |
|
* visible on the screen (we only care about what's on the screen). |
| 2785 |
|
*/ |
| 2786 |
|
|
| 2787 |
|
dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
| 2788 |
|
if (dlPtr == NULL) { |
| 2789 |
|
return; |
| 2790 |
|
} |
| 2791 |
|
if ((index1Ptr == NULL) || (TkTextIndexCmp(&dlPtr->index, index1Ptr) > 0)) { |
| 2792 |
|
index1Ptr = &dlPtr->index; |
| 2793 |
|
} |
| 2794 |
|
|
| 2795 |
|
/* |
| 2796 |
|
* Set the stopping position if it wasn't specified. |
| 2797 |
|
*/ |
| 2798 |
|
|
| 2799 |
|
if (index2Ptr == NULL) { |
| 2800 |
|
index2Ptr = TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, |
| 2801 |
|
TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree), 0, &endOfText); |
| 2802 |
|
} |
| 2803 |
|
|
| 2804 |
|
/* |
| 2805 |
|
* Initialize a search through all transitions on the tag, starting |
| 2806 |
|
* with the first transition where the tag's current state is different |
| 2807 |
|
* from what it will eventually be. |
| 2808 |
|
*/ |
| 2809 |
|
|
| 2810 |
|
TkBTreeStartSearch(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, &search); |
| 2811 |
|
/* |
| 2812 |
|
* Make our own curIndex because at this point search.curIndex |
| 2813 |
|
* may not equal index1Ptr->curIndex in the case the first tag toggle |
| 2814 |
|
* comes after index1Ptr (See the use of FindTagStart in TkBTreeStartSearch) |
| 2815 |
|
*/ |
| 2816 |
|
curIndexPtr = index1Ptr; |
| 2817 |
|
tagOn = TkBTreeCharTagged(index1Ptr, tagPtr); |
| 2818 |
|
if (tagOn != withTag) { |
| 2819 |
|
if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) { |
| 2820 |
|
return; |
| 2821 |
|
} |
| 2822 |
|
curIndexPtr = &search.curIndex; |
| 2823 |
|
} |
| 2824 |
|
|
| 2825 |
|
/* |
| 2826 |
|
* Schedule a redisplay and layout recalculation if they aren't |
| 2827 |
|
* already pending. This has to be done before calling FreeDLines, |
| 2828 |
|
* for the reason given in TkTextChanged. |
| 2829 |
|
*/ |
| 2830 |
|
|
| 2831 |
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
| 2832 |
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
| 2833 |
|
} |
| 2834 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED; |
| 2835 |
|
|
| 2836 |
|
/* |
| 2837 |
|
* Each loop through the loop below is for one range of characters |
| 2838 |
|
* where the tag's current state is different than its eventual |
| 2839 |
|
* state. At the top of the loop, search contains information about |
| 2840 |
|
* the first character in the range. |
| 2841 |
|
*/ |
| 2842 |
|
|
| 2843 |
|
while (1) { |
| 2844 |
|
/* |
| 2845 |
|
* Find the first DLine structure in the range. Note: if the |
| 2846 |
|
* desired character isn't the first in its text line, then look |
| 2847 |
|
* for the character just before it instead. This is needed to |
| 2848 |
|
* handle the case where the first character of a wrapped |
| 2849 |
|
* display line just got smaller, so that it now fits on the |
| 2850 |
|
* line before: need to relayout the line containing the |
| 2851 |
|
* previous character. |
| 2852 |
|
*/ |
| 2853 |
|
|
| 2854 |
|
if (curIndexPtr->byteIndex == 0) { |
| 2855 |
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dlPtr, curIndexPtr); |
| 2856 |
|
} else { |
| 2857 |
|
TkTextIndex tmp; |
| 2858 |
|
|
| 2859 |
|
tmp = *curIndexPtr; |
| 2860 |
|
tmp.byteIndex -= 1; |
| 2861 |
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dlPtr, &tmp); |
| 2862 |
|
} |
| 2863 |
|
if (dlPtr == NULL) { |
| 2864 |
|
break; |
| 2865 |
|
} |
| 2866 |
|
|
| 2867 |
|
/* |
| 2868 |
|
* Find the first DLine structure that's past the end of the range. |
| 2869 |
|
*/ |
| 2870 |
|
|
| 2871 |
|
if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) { |
| 2872 |
|
endIndexPtr = index2Ptr; |
| 2873 |
|
} else { |
| 2874 |
|
curIndexPtr = &search.curIndex; |
| 2875 |
|
endIndexPtr = curIndexPtr; |
| 2876 |
|
} |
| 2877 |
|
endPtr = FindDLine(dlPtr, endIndexPtr); |
| 2878 |
|
if ((endPtr != NULL) && (endPtr->index.linePtr == endIndexPtr->linePtr) |
| 2879 |
|
&& (endPtr->index.byteIndex < endIndexPtr->byteIndex)) { |
| 2880 |
|
endPtr = endPtr->nextPtr; |
| 2881 |
|
} |
| 2882 |
|
|
| 2883 |
|
/* |
| 2884 |
|
* Delete all of the display lines in the range, so that they'll |
| 2885 |
|
* be re-layed out and redrawn. |
| 2886 |
|
*/ |
| 2887 |
|
|
| 2888 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, endPtr, 1); |
| 2889 |
|
dlPtr = endPtr; |
| 2890 |
|
|
| 2891 |
|
/* |
| 2892 |
|
* Find the first text line in the next range. |
| 2893 |
|
*/ |
| 2894 |
|
|
| 2895 |
|
if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) { |
| 2896 |
|
break; |
| 2897 |
|
} |
| 2898 |
|
} |
| 2899 |
|
} |
| 2900 |
|
|
| 2901 |
|
/* |
| 2902 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2903 |
|
* |
| 2904 |
|
* TkTextRelayoutWindow -- |
| 2905 |
|
* |
| 2906 |
|
* This procedure is called when something has happened that |
| 2907 |
|
* invalidates the whole layout of characters on the screen, such |
| 2908 |
|
* as a change in a configuration option for the overall text |
| 2909 |
|
* widget or a change in the window size. It causes all display |
| 2910 |
|
* information to be recomputed and the window to be redrawn. |
| 2911 |
|
* |
| 2912 |
|
* Results: |
| 2913 |
|
* None. |
| 2914 |
|
* |
| 2915 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2916 |
|
* All the display information will be recomputed for the window |
| 2917 |
|
* and the window will be redrawn. |
| 2918 |
|
* |
| 2919 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2920 |
|
*/ |
| 2921 |
|
|
| 2922 |
|
void |
| 2923 |
|
TkTextRelayoutWindow(textPtr) |
| 2924 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
| 2925 |
|
{ |
| 2926 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 2927 |
|
GC new; |
| 2928 |
|
XGCValues gcValues; |
| 2929 |
|
|
| 2930 |
|
/* |
| 2931 |
|
* Schedule the window redisplay. See TkTextChanged for the |
| 2932 |
|
* reason why this has to be done before any calls to FreeDLines. |
| 2933 |
|
*/ |
| 2934 |
|
|
| 2935 |
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
| 2936 |
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
| 2937 |
|
} |
| 2938 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|REDRAW_BORDERS|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE |
| 2939 |
|
|REPICK_NEEDED; |
| 2940 |
|
|
| 2941 |
|
/* |
| 2942 |
|
* (Re-)create the graphics context for drawing the traversal |
| 2943 |
|
* highlight. |
| 2944 |
|
*/ |
| 2945 |
|
|
| 2946 |
|
gcValues.graphics_exposures = False; |
| 2947 |
|
new = Tk_GetGC(textPtr->tkwin, GCGraphicsExposures, &gcValues); |
| 2948 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->copyGC != None) { |
| 2949 |
|
Tk_FreeGC(textPtr->display, dInfoPtr->copyGC); |
| 2950 |
|
} |
| 2951 |
|
dInfoPtr->copyGC = new; |
| 2952 |
|
|
| 2953 |
|
/* |
| 2954 |
|
* Throw away all the current layout information. |
| 2955 |
|
*/ |
| 2956 |
|
|
| 2957 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, (DLine *) NULL, 1); |
| 2958 |
|
dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = NULL; |
| 2959 |
|
|
| 2960 |
|
/* |
| 2961 |
|
* Recompute some overall things for the layout. Even if the |
| 2962 |
|
* window gets very small, pretend that there's at least one |
| 2963 |
|
* pixel of drawing space in it. |
| 2964 |
|
*/ |
| 2965 |
|
|
| 2966 |
|
if (textPtr->highlightWidth < 0) { |
| 2967 |
|
textPtr->highlightWidth = 0; |
| 2968 |
|
} |
| 2969 |
|
dInfoPtr->x = textPtr->highlightWidth + textPtr->borderWidth |
| 2970 |
|
+ textPtr->padX; |
| 2971 |
|
dInfoPtr->y = textPtr->highlightWidth + textPtr->borderWidth |
| 2972 |
|
+ textPtr->padY; |
| 2973 |
|
dInfoPtr->maxX = Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin) - textPtr->highlightWidth |
| 2974 |
|
- textPtr->borderWidth - textPtr->padX; |
| 2975 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->maxX <= dInfoPtr->x) { |
| 2976 |
|
dInfoPtr->maxX = dInfoPtr->x + 1; |
| 2977 |
|
} |
| 2978 |
|
dInfoPtr->maxY = Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - textPtr->highlightWidth |
| 2979 |
|
- textPtr->borderWidth - textPtr->padY; |
| 2980 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->maxY <= dInfoPtr->y) { |
| 2981 |
|
dInfoPtr->maxY = dInfoPtr->y + 1; |
| 2982 |
|
} |
| 2983 |
|
dInfoPtr->topOfEof = dInfoPtr->maxY; |
| 2984 |
|
|
| 2985 |
|
/* |
| 2986 |
|
* If the upper-left character isn't the first in a line, recompute |
| 2987 |
|
* it. This is necessary because a change in the window's size |
| 2988 |
|
* or options could change the way lines wrap. |
| 2989 |
|
*/ |
| 2990 |
|
|
| 2991 |
|
if (textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex != 0) { |
| 2992 |
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, 0, &textPtr->topIndex); |
| 2993 |
|
} |
| 2994 |
|
|
| 2995 |
|
/* |
| 2996 |
|
* Invalidate cached scrollbar positions, so that scrollbars |
| 2997 |
|
* sliders will be udpated. |
| 2998 |
|
*/ |
| 2999 |
|
|
| 3000 |
|
dInfoPtr->xScrollFirst = dInfoPtr->xScrollLast = -1; |
| 3001 |
|
dInfoPtr->yScrollFirst = dInfoPtr->yScrollLast = -1; |
| 3002 |
|
} |
| 3003 |
|
|
| 3004 |
|
/* |
| 3005 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3006 |
|
* |
| 3007 |
|
* TkTextSetYView -- |
| 3008 |
|
* |
| 3009 |
|
* This procedure is called to specify what lines are to be |
| 3010 |
|
* displayed in a text widget. |
| 3011 |
|
* |
| 3012 |
|
* Results: |
| 3013 |
|
* None. |
| 3014 |
|
* |
| 3015 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3016 |
|
* The display will (eventually) be updated so that the position |
| 3017 |
|
* given by "indexPtr" is visible on the screen at the position |
| 3018 |
|
* determined by "pickPlace". |
| 3019 |
|
* |
| 3020 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3021 |
|
*/ |
| 3022 |
|
|
| 3023 |
|
void |
| 3024 |
|
TkTextSetYView(textPtr, indexPtr, pickPlace) |
| 3025 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
| 3026 |
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Position that is to appear somewhere |
| 3027 |
|
* in the view. */ |
| 3028 |
|
int pickPlace; /* 0 means topLine must appear at top of |
| 3029 |
|
* screen. 1 means we get to pick where it |
| 3030 |
|
* appears: minimize screen motion or else |
| 3031 |
|
* display line at center of screen. */ |
| 3032 |
|
{ |
| 3033 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 3034 |
|
register DLine *dlPtr; |
| 3035 |
|
int bottomY, close, lineIndex; |
| 3036 |
|
TkTextIndex tmpIndex, rounded; |
| 3037 |
|
Tk_FontMetrics fm; |
| 3038 |
|
|
| 3039 |
|
/* |
| 3040 |
|
* If the specified position is the extra line at the end of the |
| 3041 |
|
* text, round it back to the last real line. |
| 3042 |
|
*/ |
| 3043 |
|
|
| 3044 |
|
lineIndex = TkBTreeLineIndex(indexPtr->linePtr); |
| 3045 |
|
if (lineIndex == TkBTreeNumLines(indexPtr->tree)) { |
| 3046 |
|
TkTextIndexBackChars(indexPtr, 1, &rounded); |
| 3047 |
|
indexPtr = &rounded; |
| 3048 |
|
} |
| 3049 |
|
|
| 3050 |
|
if (!pickPlace) { |
| 3051 |
|
/* |
| 3052 |
|
* The specified position must go at the top of the screen. |
| 3053 |
|
* Just leave all the DLine's alone: we may be able to reuse |
| 3054 |
|
* some of the information that's currently on the screen |
| 3055 |
|
* without redisplaying it all. |
| 3056 |
|
*/ |
| 3057 |
|
|
| 3058 |
|
if (indexPtr->byteIndex == 0) { |
| 3059 |
|
textPtr->topIndex = *indexPtr; |
| 3060 |
|
} else { |
| 3061 |
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, &textPtr->topIndex); |
| 3062 |
|
} |
| 3063 |
|
goto scheduleUpdate; |
| 3064 |
|
} |
| 3065 |
|
|
| 3066 |
|
/* |
| 3067 |
|
* We have to pick where to display the index. First, bring |
| 3068 |
|
* the display information up to date and see if the index will be |
| 3069 |
|
* completely visible in the current screen configuration. If so |
| 3070 |
|
* then there's nothing to do. |
| 3071 |
|
*/ |
| 3072 |
|
|
| 3073 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
| 3074 |
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
| 3075 |
|
} |
| 3076 |
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, indexPtr); |
| 3077 |
|
if (dlPtr != NULL) { |
| 3078 |
|
if ((dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
| 3079 |
|
/* |
| 3080 |
|
* Part of the line hangs off the bottom of the screen; |
| 3081 |
|
* pretend the whole line is off-screen. |
| 3082 |
|
*/ |
| 3083 |
|
|
| 3084 |
|
dlPtr = NULL; |
| 3085 |
|
} else if ((dlPtr->index.linePtr == indexPtr->linePtr) |
| 3086 |
|
&& (dlPtr->index.byteIndex <= indexPtr->byteIndex)) { |
| 3087 |
|
return; |
| 3088 |
|
} |
| 3089 |
|
} |
| 3090 |
|
|
| 3091 |
|
/* |
| 3092 |
|
* The desired line isn't already on-screen. Figure out what |
| 3093 |
|
* it means to be "close" to the top or bottom of the screen. |
| 3094 |
|
* Close means within 1/3 of the screen height or within three |
| 3095 |
|
* lines, whichever is greater. Add one extra line also, to |
| 3096 |
|
* account for the way MeasureUp rounds. |
| 3097 |
|
*/ |
| 3098 |
|
|
| 3099 |
|
Tk_GetFontMetrics(textPtr->tkfont, &fm); |
| 3100 |
|
bottomY = (dInfoPtr->y + dInfoPtr->maxY + fm.linespace)/2; |
| 3101 |
|
close = (dInfoPtr->maxY - dInfoPtr->y)/3; |
| 3102 |
|
if (close < 3*fm.linespace) { |
| 3103 |
|
close = 3*fm.linespace; |
| 3104 |
|
} |
| 3105 |
|
close += fm.linespace; |
| 3106 |
|
if (dlPtr != NULL) { |
| 3107 |
|
/* |
| 3108 |
|
* The desired line is above the top of screen. If it is |
| 3109 |
|
* "close" to the top of the window then make it the top |
| 3110 |
|
* line on the screen. |
| 3111 |
|
*/ |
| 3112 |
|
|
| 3113 |
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, close, &tmpIndex); |
| 3114 |
|
if (TkTextIndexCmp(&tmpIndex, indexPtr) <= 0) { |
| 3115 |
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, &textPtr->topIndex); |
| 3116 |
|
goto scheduleUpdate; |
| 3117 |
|
} |
| 3118 |
|
} else { |
| 3119 |
|
/* |
| 3120 |
|
* The desired line is below the bottom of the screen. If it is |
| 3121 |
|
* "close" to the bottom of the screen then position it at the |
| 3122 |
|
* bottom of the screen. |
| 3123 |
|
*/ |
| 3124 |
|
|
| 3125 |
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, close, &tmpIndex); |
| 3126 |
|
if (FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, &tmpIndex) != NULL) { |
| 3127 |
|
bottomY = dInfoPtr->maxY - dInfoPtr->y; |
| 3128 |
|
} |
| 3129 |
|
} |
| 3130 |
|
|
| 3131 |
|
/* |
| 3132 |
|
* Our job now is to arrange the display so that indexPtr appears |
| 3133 |
|
* as low on the screen as possible but with its bottom no lower |
| 3134 |
|
* than bottomY. BottomY is the bottom of the window if the |
| 3135 |
|
* desired line is just below the current screen, otherwise it |
| 3136 |
|
* is a half-line lower than the center of the window. |
| 3137 |
|
*/ |
| 3138 |
|
|
| 3139 |
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, bottomY, &textPtr->topIndex); |
| 3140 |
|
|
| 3141 |
|
scheduleUpdate: |
| 3142 |
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
| 3143 |
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
| 3144 |
|
} |
| 3145 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED; |
| 3146 |
|
} |
| 3147 |
|
|
| 3148 |
|
/* |
| 3149 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3150 |
|
* |
| 3151 |
|
* MeasureUp -- |
| 3152 |
|
* |
| 3153 |
|
* Given one index, find the index of the first character |
| 3154 |
|
* on the highest display line that would be displayed no more |
| 3155 |
|
* than "distance" pixels above the given index. |
| 3156 |
|
* |
| 3157 |
|
* Results: |
| 3158 |
|
* *dstPtr is filled in with the index of the first character |
| 3159 |
|
* on a display line. The display line is found by measuring |
| 3160 |
|
* up "distance" pixels above the pixel just below an imaginary |
| 3161 |
|
* display line that contains srcPtr. If the display line |
| 3162 |
|
* that covers this coordinate actually extends above the |
| 3163 |
|
* coordinate, then return the index of the next lower line |
| 3164 |
|
* instead (i.e. the returned index will be completely visible |
| 3165 |
|
* at or below the given y-coordinate). |
| 3166 |
|
* |
| 3167 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3168 |
|
* None. |
| 3169 |
|
* |
| 3170 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3171 |
|
*/ |
| 3172 |
|
|
| 3173 |
|
static void |
| 3174 |
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, srcPtr, distance, dstPtr) |
| 3175 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Text widget in which to measure. */ |
| 3176 |
|
TkTextIndex *srcPtr; /* Index of character from which to start |
| 3177 |
|
* measuring. */ |
| 3178 |
|
int distance; /* Vertical distance in pixels measured |
| 3179 |
|
* from the pixel just below the lowest |
| 3180 |
|
* one in srcPtr's line. */ |
| 3181 |
|
TkTextIndex *dstPtr; /* Index to fill in with result. */ |
| 3182 |
|
{ |
| 3183 |
|
int lineNum; /* Number of current line. */ |
| 3184 |
|
int bytesToCount; /* Maximum number of bytes to measure in |
| 3185 |
|
* current line. */ |
| 3186 |
|
TkTextIndex bestIndex; /* Best candidate seen so far for result. */ |
| 3187 |
|
TkTextIndex index; |
| 3188 |
|
DLine *dlPtr, *lowestPtr; |
| 3189 |
|
int noBestYet; /* 1 means bestIndex hasn't been set. */ |
| 3190 |
|
|
| 3191 |
|
noBestYet = 1; |
| 3192 |
|
bytesToCount = srcPtr->byteIndex + 1; |
| 3193 |
|
index.tree = srcPtr->tree; |
| 3194 |
|
for (lineNum = TkBTreeLineIndex(srcPtr->linePtr); lineNum >= 0; |
| 3195 |
|
lineNum--) { |
| 3196 |
|
/* |
| 3197 |
|
* Layout an entire text line (potentially > 1 display line). |
| 3198 |
|
* For the first line, which contains srcPtr, only layout the |
| 3199 |
|
* part up through srcPtr (bytesToCount is non-infinite to |
| 3200 |
|
* accomplish this). Make a list of all the display lines |
| 3201 |
|
* in backwards order (the lowest DLine on the screen is first |
| 3202 |
|
* in the list). |
| 3203 |
|
*/ |
| 3204 |
|
|
| 3205 |
|
index.linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(srcPtr->tree, lineNum); |
| 3206 |
|
index.byteIndex = 0; |
| 3207 |
|
lowestPtr = NULL; |
| 3208 |
|
do { |
| 3209 |
|
dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index); |
| 3210 |
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = lowestPtr; |
| 3211 |
|
lowestPtr = dlPtr; |
| 3212 |
|
TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index); |
| 3213 |
|
bytesToCount -= dlPtr->byteCount; |
| 3214 |
|
} while ((bytesToCount > 0) && (index.linePtr == dlPtr->index.linePtr)); |
| 3215 |
|
|
| 3216 |
|
/* |
| 3217 |
|
* Scan through the display lines to see if we've covered enough |
| 3218 |
|
* vertical distance. If so, save the starting index for the |
| 3219 |
|
* line at the desired location. |
| 3220 |
|
*/ |
| 3221 |
|
|
| 3222 |
|
for (dlPtr = lowestPtr; dlPtr != NULL; dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 3223 |
|
distance -= dlPtr->height; |
| 3224 |
|
if (distance < 0) { |
| 3225 |
|
*dstPtr = (noBestYet) ? dlPtr->index : bestIndex; |
| 3226 |
|
break; |
| 3227 |
|
} |
| 3228 |
|
bestIndex = dlPtr->index; |
| 3229 |
|
noBestYet = 0; |
| 3230 |
|
} |
| 3231 |
|
|
| 3232 |
|
/* |
| 3233 |
|
* Discard the display lines, then either return or prepare |
| 3234 |
|
* for the next display line to lay out. |
| 3235 |
|
*/ |
| 3236 |
|
|
| 3237 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, lowestPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0); |
| 3238 |
|
if (distance < 0) { |
| 3239 |
|
return; |
| 3240 |
|
} |
| 3241 |
|
bytesToCount = INT_MAX; /* Consider all chars. in next line. */ |
| 3242 |
|
} |
| 3243 |
|
|
| 3244 |
|
/* |
| 3245 |
|
* Ran off the beginning of the text. Return the first character |
| 3246 |
|
* in the text. |
| 3247 |
|
*/ |
| 3248 |
|
|
| 3249 |
|
TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, dstPtr); |
| 3250 |
|
} |
| 3251 |
|
|
| 3252 |
|
/* |
| 3253 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3254 |
|
* |
| 3255 |
|
* TkTextSeeCmd -- |
| 3256 |
|
* |
| 3257 |
|
* This procedure is invoked to process the "see" option for |
| 3258 |
|
* the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation |
| 3259 |
|
* for details on what it does. |
| 3260 |
|
* |
| 3261 |
|
* Results: |
| 3262 |
|
* A standard Tcl result. |
| 3263 |
|
* |
| 3264 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3265 |
|
* See the user documentation. |
| 3266 |
|
* |
| 3267 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3268 |
|
*/ |
| 3269 |
|
|
| 3270 |
|
int |
| 3271 |
|
TkTextSeeCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv) |
| 3272 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about text widget. */ |
| 3273 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Current interpreter. */ |
| 3274 |
|
int argc; /* Number of arguments. */ |
| 3275 |
|
char **argv; /* Argument strings. Someone else has already |
| 3276 |
|
* parsed this command enough to know that |
| 3277 |
|
* argv[1] is "see". */ |
| 3278 |
|
{ |
| 3279 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 3280 |
|
TkTextIndex index; |
| 3281 |
|
int x, y, width, height, lineWidth, byteCount, oneThird, delta; |
| 3282 |
|
DLine *dlPtr; |
| 3283 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; |
| 3284 |
|
|
| 3285 |
|
if (argc != 3) { |
| 3286 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"", |
| 3287 |
|
argv[0], " see index\"", (char *) NULL); |
| 3288 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3289 |
|
} |
| 3290 |
|
if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) { |
| 3291 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3292 |
|
} |
| 3293 |
|
|
| 3294 |
|
/* |
| 3295 |
|
* If the specified position is the extra line at the end of the |
| 3296 |
|
* text, round it back to the last real line. |
| 3297 |
|
*/ |
| 3298 |
|
|
| 3299 |
|
if (TkBTreeLineIndex(index.linePtr) == TkBTreeNumLines(index.tree)) { |
| 3300 |
|
TkTextIndexBackChars(&index, 1, &index); |
| 3301 |
|
} |
| 3302 |
|
|
| 3303 |
|
/* |
| 3304 |
|
* First get the desired position into the vertical range of the window. |
| 3305 |
|
*/ |
| 3306 |
|
|
| 3307 |
|
TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, 1); |
| 3308 |
|
|
| 3309 |
|
/* |
| 3310 |
|
* Now make sure that the character is in view horizontally. |
| 3311 |
|
*/ |
| 3312 |
|
|
| 3313 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
| 3314 |
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
| 3315 |
|
} |
| 3316 |
|
lineWidth = dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x; |
| 3317 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->maxLength < lineWidth) { |
| 3318 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3319 |
|
} |
| 3320 |
|
|
| 3321 |
|
/* |
| 3322 |
|
* Find the chunk that contains the desired index. |
| 3323 |
|
*/ |
| 3324 |
|
|
| 3325 |
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, &index); |
| 3326 |
|
byteCount = index.byteIndex - dlPtr->index.byteIndex; |
| 3327 |
|
for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; chunkPtr!=NULL ; chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 3328 |
|
if (byteCount < chunkPtr->numBytes) { |
| 3329 |
|
break; |
| 3330 |
|
} |
| 3331 |
|
byteCount -= chunkPtr->numBytes; |
| 3332 |
|
} |
| 3333 |
|
|
| 3334 |
|
/* |
| 3335 |
|
* Call a chunk-specific procedure to find the horizontal range of |
| 3336 |
|
* the character within the chunk. |
| 3337 |
|
*/ |
| 3338 |
|
|
| 3339 |
|
if (chunkPtr!=NULL) { /* chunkPtr==NULL iff trying to see in elided region */ |
| 3340 |
|
(*chunkPtr->bboxProc)(chunkPtr, byteCount, dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove, |
| 3341 |
|
dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow, |
| 3342 |
|
dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, &x, &y, &width, |
| 3343 |
|
&height); |
| 3344 |
|
delta = x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset; |
| 3345 |
|
oneThird = lineWidth/3; |
| 3346 |
|
if (delta < 0) { |
| 3347 |
|
if (delta < -oneThird) { |
| 3348 |
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = (x - lineWidth/2)/textPtr->charWidth; |
| 3349 |
|
} else { |
| 3350 |
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset -= ((-delta) + textPtr->charWidth - 1) |
| 3351 |
|
/ textPtr->charWidth; |
| 3352 |
|
} |
| 3353 |
|
} else { |
| 3354 |
|
delta -= (lineWidth - width); |
| 3355 |
|
if (delta > 0) { |
| 3356 |
|
if (delta > oneThird) { |
| 3357 |
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = (x - lineWidth/2)/textPtr->charWidth; |
| 3358 |
|
} else { |
| 3359 |
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset += (delta + textPtr->charWidth - 1) |
| 3360 |
|
/ textPtr->charWidth; |
| 3361 |
|
} |
| 3362 |
|
} else { |
| 3363 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3364 |
|
} |
| 3365 |
|
}} |
| 3366 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE; |
| 3367 |
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
| 3368 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING; |
| 3369 |
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
| 3370 |
|
} |
| 3371 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3372 |
|
} |
| 3373 |
|
|
| 3374 |
|
/* |
| 3375 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3376 |
|
* |
| 3377 |
|
* TkTextXviewCmd -- |
| 3378 |
|
* |
| 3379 |
|
* This procedure is invoked to process the "xview" option for |
| 3380 |
|
* the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation |
| 3381 |
|
* for details on what it does. |
| 3382 |
|
* |
| 3383 |
|
* Results: |
| 3384 |
|
* A standard Tcl result. |
| 3385 |
|
* |
| 3386 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3387 |
|
* See the user documentation. |
| 3388 |
|
* |
| 3389 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3390 |
|
*/ |
| 3391 |
|
|
| 3392 |
|
int |
| 3393 |
|
TkTextXviewCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv) |
| 3394 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about text widget. */ |
| 3395 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Current interpreter. */ |
| 3396 |
|
int argc; /* Number of arguments. */ |
| 3397 |
|
char **argv; /* Argument strings. Someone else has already |
| 3398 |
|
* parsed this command enough to know that |
| 3399 |
|
* argv[1] is "xview". */ |
| 3400 |
|
{ |
| 3401 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 3402 |
|
int type, charsPerPage, count, newOffset; |
| 3403 |
|
double fraction; |
| 3404 |
|
|
| 3405 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
| 3406 |
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
| 3407 |
|
} |
| 3408 |
|
|
| 3409 |
|
if (argc == 2) { |
| 3410 |
|
GetXView(interp, textPtr, 0); |
| 3411 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3412 |
|
} |
| 3413 |
|
|
| 3414 |
|
newOffset = dInfoPtr->newByteOffset; |
| 3415 |
|
type = Tk_GetScrollInfo(interp, argc, argv, &fraction, &count); |
| 3416 |
|
switch (type) { |
| 3417 |
|
case TK_SCROLL_ERROR: |
| 3418 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3419 |
|
case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO: |
| 3420 |
|
if (fraction > 1.0) { |
| 3421 |
|
fraction = 1.0; |
| 3422 |
|
} |
| 3423 |
|
if (fraction < 0) { |
| 3424 |
|
fraction = 0; |
| 3425 |
|
} |
| 3426 |
|
newOffset = (int) (((fraction * dInfoPtr->maxLength) / textPtr->charWidth) |
| 3427 |
|
+ 0.5); |
| 3428 |
|
break; |
| 3429 |
|
case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: |
| 3430 |
|
charsPerPage = ((dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x) / textPtr->charWidth) |
| 3431 |
|
- 2; |
| 3432 |
|
if (charsPerPage < 1) { |
| 3433 |
|
charsPerPage = 1; |
| 3434 |
|
} |
| 3435 |
|
newOffset += charsPerPage * count; |
| 3436 |
|
break; |
| 3437 |
|
case TK_SCROLL_UNITS: |
| 3438 |
|
newOffset += count; |
| 3439 |
|
break; |
| 3440 |
|
} |
| 3441 |
|
|
| 3442 |
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = newOffset; |
| 3443 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE; |
| 3444 |
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
| 3445 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING; |
| 3446 |
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
| 3447 |
|
} |
| 3448 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3449 |
|
} |
| 3450 |
|
|
| 3451 |
|
/* |
| 3452 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3453 |
|
* |
| 3454 |
|
* ScrollByLines -- |
| 3455 |
|
* |
| 3456 |
|
* This procedure is called to scroll a text widget up or down |
| 3457 |
|
* by a given number of lines. |
| 3458 |
|
* |
| 3459 |
|
* Results: |
| 3460 |
|
* None. |
| 3461 |
|
* |
| 3462 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3463 |
|
* The view in textPtr's window changes to reflect the value |
| 3464 |
|
* of "offset". |
| 3465 |
|
* |
| 3466 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3467 |
|
*/ |
| 3468 |
|
|
| 3469 |
|
static void |
| 3470 |
|
ScrollByLines(textPtr, offset) |
| 3471 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget to scroll. */ |
| 3472 |
|
int offset; /* Amount by which to scroll, in *screen* |
| 3473 |
|
* lines. Positive means that information |
| 3474 |
|
* later in text becomes visible, negative |
| 3475 |
|
* means that information earlier in the |
| 3476 |
|
* text becomes visible. */ |
| 3477 |
|
{ |
| 3478 |
|
int i, bytesToCount, lineNum; |
| 3479 |
|
TkTextIndex new, index; |
| 3480 |
|
TkTextLine *lastLinePtr; |
| 3481 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 3482 |
|
DLine *dlPtr, *lowestPtr; |
| 3483 |
|
|
| 3484 |
|
if (offset < 0) { |
| 3485 |
|
/* |
| 3486 |
|
* Must scroll up (to show earlier information in the text). |
| 3487 |
|
* The code below is similar to that in MeasureUp, except that |
| 3488 |
|
* it counts lines instead of pixels. |
| 3489 |
|
*/ |
| 3490 |
|
|
| 3491 |
|
bytesToCount = textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex + 1; |
| 3492 |
|
index.tree = textPtr->tree; |
| 3493 |
|
offset--; /* Skip line containing topIndex. */ |
| 3494 |
|
for (lineNum = TkBTreeLineIndex(textPtr->topIndex.linePtr); |
| 3495 |
|
lineNum >= 0; lineNum--) { |
| 3496 |
|
index.linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree, lineNum); |
| 3497 |
|
index.byteIndex = 0; |
| 3498 |
|
lowestPtr = NULL; |
| 3499 |
|
do { |
| 3500 |
|
dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index); |
| 3501 |
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = lowestPtr; |
| 3502 |
|
lowestPtr = dlPtr; |
| 3503 |
|
TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index); |
| 3504 |
|
bytesToCount -= dlPtr->byteCount; |
| 3505 |
|
} while ((bytesToCount > 0) |
| 3506 |
|
&& (index.linePtr == dlPtr->index.linePtr)); |
| 3507 |
|
|
| 3508 |
|
for (dlPtr = lowestPtr; dlPtr != NULL; dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 3509 |
|
offset++; |
| 3510 |
|
if (offset == 0) { |
| 3511 |
|
textPtr->topIndex = dlPtr->index; |
| 3512 |
|
break; |
| 3513 |
|
} |
| 3514 |
|
} |
| 3515 |
|
|
| 3516 |
|
/* |
| 3517 |
|
* Discard the display lines, then either return or prepare |
| 3518 |
|
* for the next display line to lay out. |
| 3519 |
|
*/ |
| 3520 |
|
|
| 3521 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, lowestPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0); |
| 3522 |
|
if (offset >= 0) { |
| 3523 |
|
goto scheduleUpdate; |
| 3524 |
|
} |
| 3525 |
|
bytesToCount = INT_MAX; |
| 3526 |
|
} |
| 3527 |
|
|
| 3528 |
|
/* |
| 3529 |
|
* Ran off the beginning of the text. Return the first character |
| 3530 |
|
* in the text. |
| 3531 |
|
*/ |
| 3532 |
|
|
| 3533 |
|
TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, &textPtr->topIndex); |
| 3534 |
|
} else { |
| 3535 |
|
/* |
| 3536 |
|
* Scrolling down, to show later information in the text. |
| 3537 |
|
* Just count lines from the current top of the window. |
| 3538 |
|
*/ |
| 3539 |
|
|
| 3540 |
|
lastLinePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree, |
| 3541 |
|
TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree)); |
| 3542 |
|
for (i = 0; i < offset; i++) { |
| 3543 |
|
dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex); |
| 3544 |
|
if (dlPtr->length == 0 && dlPtr->height == 0) offset++; |
| 3545 |
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = NULL; |
| 3546 |
|
TkTextIndexForwBytes(&textPtr->topIndex, dlPtr->byteCount, &new); |
| 3547 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0); |
| 3548 |
|
if (new.linePtr == lastLinePtr) { |
| 3549 |
|
break; |
| 3550 |
|
} |
| 3551 |
|
textPtr->topIndex = new; |
| 3552 |
|
} |
| 3553 |
|
} |
| 3554 |
|
|
| 3555 |
|
scheduleUpdate: |
| 3556 |
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
| 3557 |
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
| 3558 |
|
} |
| 3559 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED; |
| 3560 |
|
} |
| 3561 |
|
|
| 3562 |
|
/* |
| 3563 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3564 |
|
* |
| 3565 |
|
* TkTextYviewCmd -- |
| 3566 |
|
* |
| 3567 |
|
* This procedure is invoked to process the "yview" option for |
| 3568 |
|
* the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation |
| 3569 |
|
* for details on what it does. |
| 3570 |
|
* |
| 3571 |
|
* Results: |
| 3572 |
|
* A standard Tcl result. |
| 3573 |
|
* |
| 3574 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3575 |
|
* See the user documentation. |
| 3576 |
|
* |
| 3577 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3578 |
|
*/ |
| 3579 |
|
|
| 3580 |
|
int |
| 3581 |
|
TkTextYviewCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv) |
| 3582 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about text widget. */ |
| 3583 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Current interpreter. */ |
| 3584 |
|
int argc; /* Number of arguments. */ |
| 3585 |
|
char **argv; /* Argument strings. Someone else has already |
| 3586 |
|
* parsed this command enough to know that |
| 3587 |
|
* argv[1] is "yview". */ |
| 3588 |
|
{ |
| 3589 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 3590 |
|
int pickPlace, lineNum, type, bytesInLine; |
| 3591 |
|
Tk_FontMetrics fm; |
| 3592 |
|
int pixels, count; |
| 3593 |
|
size_t switchLength; |
| 3594 |
|
double fraction; |
| 3595 |
|
TkTextIndex index, new; |
| 3596 |
|
TkTextLine *lastLinePtr; |
| 3597 |
|
DLine *dlPtr; |
| 3598 |
|
|
| 3599 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
| 3600 |
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
| 3601 |
|
} |
| 3602 |
|
|
| 3603 |
|
if (argc == 2) { |
| 3604 |
|
GetYView(interp, textPtr, 0); |
| 3605 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3606 |
|
} |
| 3607 |
|
|
| 3608 |
|
/* |
| 3609 |
|
* Next, handle the old syntax: "pathName yview ?-pickplace? where" |
| 3610 |
|
*/ |
| 3611 |
|
|
| 3612 |
|
pickPlace = 0; |
| 3613 |
|
if (argv[2][0] == '-') { |
| 3614 |
|
switchLength = strlen(argv[2]); |
| 3615 |
|
if ((switchLength >= 2) |
| 3616 |
|
&& (strncmp(argv[2], "-pickplace", switchLength) == 0)) { |
| 3617 |
|
pickPlace = 1; |
| 3618 |
|
if (argc != 4) { |
| 3619 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"", |
| 3620 |
|
argv[0], " yview -pickplace lineNum|index\"", |
| 3621 |
|
(char *) NULL); |
| 3622 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3623 |
|
} |
| 3624 |
|
} |
| 3625 |
|
} |
| 3626 |
|
if ((argc == 3) || pickPlace) { |
| 3627 |
|
if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[2+pickPlace], &lineNum) == TCL_OK) { |
| 3628 |
|
TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineNum, 0, &index); |
| 3629 |
|
TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, 0); |
| 3630 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3631 |
|
} |
| 3632 |
|
|
| 3633 |
|
/* |
| 3634 |
|
* The argument must be a regular text index. |
| 3635 |
|
*/ |
| 3636 |
|
|
| 3637 |
|
Tcl_ResetResult(interp); |
| 3638 |
|
if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[2+pickPlace], |
| 3639 |
|
&index) != TCL_OK) { |
| 3640 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3641 |
|
} |
| 3642 |
|
TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, pickPlace); |
| 3643 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3644 |
|
} |
| 3645 |
|
|
| 3646 |
|
/* |
| 3647 |
|
* New syntax: dispatch based on argv[2]. |
| 3648 |
|
*/ |
| 3649 |
|
|
| 3650 |
|
type = Tk_GetScrollInfo(interp, argc, argv, &fraction, &count); |
| 3651 |
|
switch (type) { |
| 3652 |
|
case TK_SCROLL_ERROR: |
| 3653 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3654 |
|
case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO: |
| 3655 |
|
if (fraction > 1.0) { |
| 3656 |
|
fraction = 1.0; |
| 3657 |
|
} |
| 3658 |
|
if (fraction < 0) { |
| 3659 |
|
fraction = 0; |
| 3660 |
|
} |
| 3661 |
|
fraction *= TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree); |
| 3662 |
|
lineNum = (int) fraction; |
| 3663 |
|
TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineNum, 0, &index); |
| 3664 |
|
bytesInLine = TkBTreeBytesInLine(index.linePtr); |
| 3665 |
|
index.byteIndex = (int)((bytesInLine * (fraction-lineNum)) + 0.5); |
| 3666 |
|
if (index.byteIndex >= bytesInLine) { |
| 3667 |
|
TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineNum + 1, 0, &index); |
| 3668 |
|
} |
| 3669 |
|
TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, 0); |
| 3670 |
|
break; |
| 3671 |
|
case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: |
| 3672 |
|
/* |
| 3673 |
|
* Scroll up or down by screenfuls. Actually, use the |
| 3674 |
|
* window height minus two lines, so that there's some |
| 3675 |
|
* overlap between adjacent pages. |
| 3676 |
|
*/ |
| 3677 |
|
|
| 3678 |
|
Tk_GetFontMetrics(textPtr->tkfont, &fm); |
| 3679 |
|
if (count < 0) { |
| 3680 |
|
pixels = (dInfoPtr->maxY - 2*fm.linespace - dInfoPtr->y)*(-count) |
| 3681 |
|
+ fm.linespace; |
| 3682 |
|
MeasureUp(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, pixels, &new); |
| 3683 |
|
if (TkTextIndexCmp(&textPtr->topIndex, &new) == 0) { |
| 3684 |
|
/* |
| 3685 |
|
* A page of scrolling ended up being less than one line. |
| 3686 |
|
* Scroll one line anyway. |
| 3687 |
|
*/ |
| 3688 |
|
|
| 3689 |
|
count = -1; |
| 3690 |
|
goto scrollByLines; |
| 3691 |
|
} |
| 3692 |
|
textPtr->topIndex = new; |
| 3693 |
|
} else { |
| 3694 |
|
/* |
| 3695 |
|
* Scrolling down by pages. Layout lines starting at the |
| 3696 |
|
* top index and count through the desired vertical distance. |
| 3697 |
|
*/ |
| 3698 |
|
|
| 3699 |
|
pixels = (dInfoPtr->maxY - 2*fm.linespace - dInfoPtr->y)*count; |
| 3700 |
|
lastLinePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree, |
| 3701 |
|
TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree)); |
| 3702 |
|
do { |
| 3703 |
|
dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex); |
| 3704 |
|
dlPtr->nextPtr = NULL; |
| 3705 |
|
TkTextIndexForwBytes(&textPtr->topIndex, dlPtr->byteCount, |
| 3706 |
|
&new); |
| 3707 |
|
pixels -= dlPtr->height; |
| 3708 |
|
FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0); |
| 3709 |
|
if (new.linePtr == lastLinePtr) { |
| 3710 |
|
break; |
| 3711 |
|
} |
| 3712 |
|
textPtr->topIndex = new; |
| 3713 |
|
} while (pixels > 0); |
| 3714 |
|
} |
| 3715 |
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
| 3716 |
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
| 3717 |
|
} |
| 3718 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED; |
| 3719 |
|
break; |
| 3720 |
|
case TK_SCROLL_UNITS: |
| 3721 |
|
scrollByLines: |
| 3722 |
|
ScrollByLines(textPtr, count); |
| 3723 |
|
break; |
| 3724 |
|
} |
| 3725 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3726 |
|
} |
| 3727 |
|
|
| 3728 |
|
/* |
| 3729 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3730 |
|
* |
| 3731 |
|
* TkTextScanCmd -- |
| 3732 |
|
* |
| 3733 |
|
* This procedure is invoked to process the "scan" option for |
| 3734 |
|
* the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation |
| 3735 |
|
* for details on what it does. |
| 3736 |
|
* |
| 3737 |
|
* Results: |
| 3738 |
|
* A standard Tcl result. |
| 3739 |
|
* |
| 3740 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3741 |
|
* See the user documentation. |
| 3742 |
|
* |
| 3743 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3744 |
|
*/ |
| 3745 |
|
|
| 3746 |
|
int |
| 3747 |
|
TkTextScanCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv) |
| 3748 |
|
register TkText *textPtr; /* Information about text widget. */ |
| 3749 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Current interpreter. */ |
| 3750 |
|
int argc; /* Number of arguments. */ |
| 3751 |
|
char **argv; /* Argument strings. Someone else has already |
| 3752 |
|
* parsed this command enough to know that |
| 3753 |
|
* argv[1] is "scan". */ |
| 3754 |
|
{ |
| 3755 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 3756 |
|
TkTextIndex index; |
| 3757 |
|
int c, x, y, totalScroll, newByte, maxByte, gain=10; |
| 3758 |
|
Tk_FontMetrics fm; |
| 3759 |
|
size_t length; |
| 3760 |
|
|
| 3761 |
|
if ((argc != 5) && (argc != 6)) { |
| 3762 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"", |
| 3763 |
|
argv[0], " scan mark x y\" or \"", |
| 3764 |
|
argv[0], " scan dragto x y ?gain?\"", (char *) NULL); |
| 3765 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3766 |
|
} |
| 3767 |
|
if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) { |
| 3768 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3769 |
|
} |
| 3770 |
|
if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &y) != TCL_OK) { |
| 3771 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3772 |
|
} |
| 3773 |
|
if ((argc == 6) && (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[5], &gain) != TCL_OK)) |
| 3774 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3775 |
|
c = argv[2][0]; |
| 3776 |
|
length = strlen(argv[2]); |
| 3777 |
|
if ((c == 'd') && (strncmp(argv[2], "dragto", length) == 0)) { |
| 3778 |
|
/* |
| 3779 |
|
* Amplify the difference between the current position and the |
| 3780 |
|
* mark position to compute how much the view should shift, then |
| 3781 |
|
* update the mark position to correspond to the new view. If we |
| 3782 |
|
* run off the edge of the text, reset the mark point so that the |
| 3783 |
|
* current position continues to correspond to the edge of the |
| 3784 |
|
* window. This means that the picture will start dragging as |
| 3785 |
|
* soon as the mouse reverses direction (without this reset, might |
| 3786 |
|
* have to slide mouse a long ways back before the picture starts |
| 3787 |
|
* moving again). |
| 3788 |
|
*/ |
| 3789 |
|
|
| 3790 |
|
newByte = dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex + (gain*(dInfoPtr->scanMarkX - x)) |
| 3791 |
|
/ (textPtr->charWidth); |
| 3792 |
|
maxByte = 1 + (dInfoPtr->maxLength - (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x) |
| 3793 |
|
+ textPtr->charWidth - 1)/textPtr->charWidth; |
| 3794 |
|
if (newByte < 0) { |
| 3795 |
|
newByte = 0; |
| 3796 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex = 0; |
| 3797 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkX = x; |
| 3798 |
|
} else if (newByte > maxByte) { |
| 3799 |
|
newByte = maxByte; |
| 3800 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex = maxByte; |
| 3801 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkX = x; |
| 3802 |
|
} |
| 3803 |
|
dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = newByte; |
| 3804 |
|
|
| 3805 |
|
Tk_GetFontMetrics(textPtr->tkfont, &fm); |
| 3806 |
|
totalScroll = (gain*(dInfoPtr->scanMarkY - y)) / fm.linespace; |
| 3807 |
|
if (totalScroll != dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll) { |
| 3808 |
|
index = textPtr->topIndex; |
| 3809 |
|
ScrollByLines(textPtr, totalScroll-dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll); |
| 3810 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll = totalScroll; |
| 3811 |
|
if ((index.linePtr == textPtr->topIndex.linePtr) && |
| 3812 |
|
(index.byteIndex == textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex)) { |
| 3813 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll = 0; |
| 3814 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkY = y; |
| 3815 |
|
} |
| 3816 |
|
} |
| 3817 |
|
} else if ((c == 'm') && (strncmp(argv[2], "mark", length) == 0)) { |
| 3818 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex = dInfoPtr->newByteOffset; |
| 3819 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkX = x; |
| 3820 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll = 0; |
| 3821 |
|
dInfoPtr->scanMarkY = y; |
| 3822 |
|
} else { |
| 3823 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad scan option \"", argv[2], |
| 3824 |
|
"\": must be mark or dragto", (char *) NULL); |
| 3825 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3826 |
|
} |
| 3827 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE; |
| 3828 |
|
if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) { |
| 3829 |
|
dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING; |
| 3830 |
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr); |
| 3831 |
|
} |
| 3832 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3833 |
|
} |
| 3834 |
|
|
| 3835 |
|
/* |
| 3836 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3837 |
|
* |
| 3838 |
|
* GetXView -- |
| 3839 |
|
* |
| 3840 |
|
* This procedure computes the fractions that indicate what's |
| 3841 |
|
* visible in a text window and, optionally, evaluates a |
| 3842 |
|
* Tcl script to report them to the text's associated scrollbar. |
| 3843 |
|
* |
| 3844 |
|
* Results: |
| 3845 |
|
* If report is zero, then the interp's result is filled in with |
| 3846 |
|
* two real numbers separated by a space, giving the position of |
| 3847 |
|
* the left and right edges of the window as fractions from 0 to |
| 3848 |
|
* 1, where 0 means the left edge of the text and 1 means the right |
| 3849 |
|
* edge. If report is non-zero, then the interp's result isn't modified |
| 3850 |
|
* directly, but instead a script is evaluated in interp to report |
| 3851 |
|
* the new horizontal scroll position to the scrollbar (if the scroll |
| 3852 |
|
* position hasn't changed then no script is invoked). |
| 3853 |
|
* |
| 3854 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3855 |
|
* None. |
| 3856 |
|
* |
| 3857 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3858 |
|
*/ |
| 3859 |
|
|
| 3860 |
|
static void |
| 3861 |
|
GetXView(interp, textPtr, report) |
| 3862 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* If "report" is FALSE, string |
| 3863 |
|
* describing visible range gets |
| 3864 |
|
* stored in the interp's result. */ |
| 3865 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about text widget. */ |
| 3866 |
|
int report; /* Non-zero means report info to |
| 3867 |
|
* scrollbar if it has changed. */ |
| 3868 |
|
{ |
| 3869 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 3870 |
|
char buffer[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2]; |
| 3871 |
|
double first, last; |
| 3872 |
|
int code; |
| 3873 |
|
|
| 3874 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->maxLength > 0) { |
| 3875 |
|
first = ((double) dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset) |
| 3876 |
|
/ dInfoPtr->maxLength; |
| 3877 |
|
last = first + ((double) (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x)) |
| 3878 |
|
/ dInfoPtr->maxLength; |
| 3879 |
|
if (last > 1.0) { |
| 3880 |
|
last = 1.0; |
| 3881 |
|
} |
| 3882 |
|
} else { |
| 3883 |
|
first = 0; |
| 3884 |
|
last = 1.0; |
| 3885 |
|
} |
| 3886 |
|
if (!report) { |
| 3887 |
|
sprintf(buffer, "%g %g", first, last); |
| 3888 |
|
Tcl_SetResult(interp, buffer, TCL_VOLATILE); |
| 3889 |
|
return; |
| 3890 |
|
} |
| 3891 |
|
if ((first == dInfoPtr->xScrollFirst) && (last == dInfoPtr->xScrollLast)) { |
| 3892 |
|
return; |
| 3893 |
|
} |
| 3894 |
|
dInfoPtr->xScrollFirst = first; |
| 3895 |
|
dInfoPtr->xScrollLast = last; |
| 3896 |
|
sprintf(buffer, " %g %g", first, last); |
| 3897 |
|
code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, textPtr->xScrollCmd, |
| 3898 |
|
buffer, (char *) NULL); |
| 3899 |
|
if (code != TCL_OK) { |
| 3900 |
|
Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, |
| 3901 |
|
"\n (horizontal scrolling command executed by text)"); |
| 3902 |
|
Tcl_BackgroundError(interp); |
| 3903 |
|
} |
| 3904 |
|
} |
| 3905 |
|
|
| 3906 |
|
/* |
| 3907 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3908 |
|
* |
| 3909 |
|
* GetYView -- |
| 3910 |
|
* |
| 3911 |
|
* This procedure computes the fractions that indicate what's |
| 3912 |
|
* visible in a text window and, optionally, evaluates a |
| 3913 |
|
* Tcl script to report them to the text's associated scrollbar. |
| 3914 |
|
* |
| 3915 |
|
* Results: |
| 3916 |
|
* If report is zero, then the interp's result is filled in with |
| 3917 |
|
* two real numbers separated by a space, giving the position of |
| 3918 |
|
* the top and bottom of the window as fractions from 0 to 1, where |
| 3919 |
|
* 0 means the beginning of the text and 1 means the end. If |
| 3920 |
|
* report is non-zero, then the interp's result isn't modified directly, |
| 3921 |
|
* but a script is evaluated in interp to report the new scroll |
| 3922 |
|
* position to the scrollbar (if the scroll position hasn't changed |
| 3923 |
|
* then no script is invoked). |
| 3924 |
|
* |
| 3925 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3926 |
|
* None. |
| 3927 |
|
* |
| 3928 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3929 |
|
*/ |
| 3930 |
|
|
| 3931 |
|
static void |
| 3932 |
|
GetYView(interp, textPtr, report) |
| 3933 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* If "report" is FALSE, string |
| 3934 |
|
* describing visible range gets |
| 3935 |
|
* stored in the interp's result. */ |
| 3936 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about text widget. */ |
| 3937 |
|
int report; /* Non-zero means report info to |
| 3938 |
|
* scrollbar if it has changed. */ |
| 3939 |
|
{ |
| 3940 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 3941 |
|
char buffer[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2]; |
| 3942 |
|
double first, last; |
| 3943 |
|
DLine *dlPtr; |
| 3944 |
|
int totalLines, code, count; |
| 3945 |
|
|
| 3946 |
|
dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; |
| 3947 |
|
totalLines = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree); |
| 3948 |
|
first = (double) TkBTreeLineIndex(dlPtr->index.linePtr) |
| 3949 |
|
+ (double) dlPtr->index.byteIndex |
| 3950 |
|
/ TkBTreeBytesInLine(dlPtr->index.linePtr); |
| 3951 |
|
first /= totalLines; |
| 3952 |
|
while (1) { |
| 3953 |
|
if ((dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
| 3954 |
|
/* |
| 3955 |
|
* The last line is only partially visible, so don't |
| 3956 |
|
* count its characters in what's visible. |
| 3957 |
|
*/ |
| 3958 |
|
count = 0; |
| 3959 |
|
break; |
| 3960 |
|
} |
| 3961 |
|
if (dlPtr->nextPtr == NULL) { |
| 3962 |
|
count = dlPtr->byteCount; |
| 3963 |
|
break; |
| 3964 |
|
} |
| 3965 |
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
| 3966 |
|
} |
| 3967 |
|
last = ((double) TkBTreeLineIndex(dlPtr->index.linePtr)) |
| 3968 |
|
+ ((double) (dlPtr->index.byteIndex + count)) |
| 3969 |
|
/ (TkBTreeBytesInLine(dlPtr->index.linePtr)); |
| 3970 |
|
last /= totalLines; |
| 3971 |
|
if (!report) { |
| 3972 |
|
sprintf(buffer, "%g %g", first, last); |
| 3973 |
|
Tcl_SetResult(interp, buffer, TCL_VOLATILE); |
| 3974 |
|
return; |
| 3975 |
|
} |
| 3976 |
|
if ((first == dInfoPtr->yScrollFirst) && (last == dInfoPtr->yScrollLast)) { |
| 3977 |
|
return; |
| 3978 |
|
} |
| 3979 |
|
dInfoPtr->yScrollFirst = first; |
| 3980 |
|
dInfoPtr->yScrollLast = last; |
| 3981 |
|
sprintf(buffer, " %g %g", first, last); |
| 3982 |
|
code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, textPtr->yScrollCmd, buffer, (char *) NULL); |
| 3983 |
|
if (code != TCL_OK) { |
| 3984 |
|
Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, |
| 3985 |
|
"\n (vertical scrolling command executed by text)"); |
| 3986 |
|
Tcl_BackgroundError(interp); |
| 3987 |
|
} |
| 3988 |
|
} |
| 3989 |
|
|
| 3990 |
|
/* |
| 3991 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3992 |
|
* |
| 3993 |
|
* FindDLine -- |
| 3994 |
|
* |
| 3995 |
|
* This procedure is called to find the DLine corresponding to a |
| 3996 |
|
* given text index. |
| 3997 |
|
* |
| 3998 |
|
* Results: |
| 3999 |
|
* The return value is a pointer to the first DLine found in the |
| 4000 |
|
* list headed by dlPtr that displays information at or after the |
| 4001 |
|
* specified position. If there is no such line in the list then |
| 4002 |
|
* NULL is returned. |
| 4003 |
|
* |
| 4004 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 4005 |
|
* None. |
| 4006 |
|
* |
| 4007 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4008 |
|
*/ |
| 4009 |
|
|
| 4010 |
|
static DLine * |
| 4011 |
|
FindDLine(dlPtr, indexPtr) |
| 4012 |
|
register DLine *dlPtr; /* Pointer to first in list of DLines |
| 4013 |
|
* to search. */ |
| 4014 |
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Index of desired character. */ |
| 4015 |
|
{ |
| 4016 |
|
TkTextLine *linePtr; |
| 4017 |
|
|
| 4018 |
|
if (dlPtr == NULL) { |
| 4019 |
|
return NULL; |
| 4020 |
|
} |
| 4021 |
|
if (TkBTreeLineIndex(indexPtr->linePtr) |
| 4022 |
|
< TkBTreeLineIndex(dlPtr->index.linePtr)) { |
| 4023 |
|
/* |
| 4024 |
|
* The first display line is already past the desired line. |
| 4025 |
|
*/ |
| 4026 |
|
return dlPtr; |
| 4027 |
|
} |
| 4028 |
|
|
| 4029 |
|
/* |
| 4030 |
|
* Find the first display line that covers the desired text line. |
| 4031 |
|
*/ |
| 4032 |
|
|
| 4033 |
|
linePtr = dlPtr->index.linePtr; |
| 4034 |
|
while (linePtr != indexPtr->linePtr) { |
| 4035 |
|
while (dlPtr->index.linePtr == linePtr) { |
| 4036 |
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
| 4037 |
|
if (dlPtr == NULL) { |
| 4038 |
|
return NULL; |
| 4039 |
|
} |
| 4040 |
|
} |
| 4041 |
|
linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(linePtr); |
| 4042 |
|
if (linePtr == NULL) { |
| 4043 |
|
panic("FindDLine reached end of text"); |
| 4044 |
|
} |
| 4045 |
|
} |
| 4046 |
|
if (indexPtr->linePtr != dlPtr->index.linePtr) { |
| 4047 |
|
return dlPtr; |
| 4048 |
|
} |
| 4049 |
|
|
| 4050 |
|
/* |
| 4051 |
|
* Now get to the right position within the text line. |
| 4052 |
|
*/ |
| 4053 |
|
|
| 4054 |
|
while (indexPtr->byteIndex >= (dlPtr->index.byteIndex + dlPtr->byteCount)) { |
| 4055 |
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr; |
| 4056 |
|
if ((dlPtr == NULL) || (dlPtr->index.linePtr != indexPtr->linePtr)) { |
| 4057 |
|
break; |
| 4058 |
|
} |
| 4059 |
|
} |
| 4060 |
|
return dlPtr; |
| 4061 |
|
} |
| 4062 |
|
|
| 4063 |
|
/* |
| 4064 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4065 |
|
* |
| 4066 |
|
* TkTextPixelIndex -- |
| 4067 |
|
* |
| 4068 |
|
* Given an (x,y) coordinate on the screen, find the location of |
| 4069 |
|
* the character closest to that location. |
| 4070 |
|
* |
| 4071 |
|
* Results: |
| 4072 |
|
* The index at *indexPtr is modified to refer to the character |
| 4073 |
|
* on the display that is closest to (x,y). |
| 4074 |
|
* |
| 4075 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 4076 |
|
* None. |
| 4077 |
|
* |
| 4078 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4079 |
|
*/ |
| 4080 |
|
|
| 4081 |
|
void |
| 4082 |
|
TkTextPixelIndex(textPtr, x, y, indexPtr) |
| 4083 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
| 4084 |
|
int x, y; /* Pixel coordinates of point in widget's |
| 4085 |
|
* window. */ |
| 4086 |
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* This index gets filled in with the |
| 4087 |
|
* index of the character nearest to (x,y). */ |
| 4088 |
|
{ |
| 4089 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 4090 |
|
register DLine *dlPtr, *validdlPtr; |
| 4091 |
|
register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; |
| 4092 |
|
|
| 4093 |
|
/* |
| 4094 |
|
* Make sure that all of the layout information about what's |
| 4095 |
|
* displayed where on the screen is up-to-date. |
| 4096 |
|
*/ |
| 4097 |
|
|
| 4098 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
| 4099 |
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
| 4100 |
|
} |
| 4101 |
|
|
| 4102 |
|
/* |
| 4103 |
|
* If the coordinates are above the top of the window, then adjust |
| 4104 |
|
* them to refer to the upper-right corner of the window. If they're |
| 4105 |
|
* off to one side or the other, then adjust to the closest side. |
| 4106 |
|
*/ |
| 4107 |
|
|
| 4108 |
|
if (y < dInfoPtr->y) { |
| 4109 |
|
y = dInfoPtr->y; |
| 4110 |
|
x = dInfoPtr->x; |
| 4111 |
|
} |
| 4112 |
|
if (x >= dInfoPtr->maxX) { |
| 4113 |
|
x = dInfoPtr->maxX - 1; |
| 4114 |
|
} |
| 4115 |
|
if (x < dInfoPtr->x) { |
| 4116 |
|
x = dInfoPtr->x; |
| 4117 |
|
} |
| 4118 |
|
|
| 4119 |
|
/* |
| 4120 |
|
* Find the display line containing the desired y-coordinate. |
| 4121 |
|
*/ |
| 4122 |
|
|
| 4123 |
|
for (dlPtr = validdlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; y >= (dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height); |
| 4124 |
|
dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 4125 |
|
if (dlPtr->chunkPtr !=NULL) validdlPtr = dlPtr; |
| 4126 |
|
if (dlPtr->nextPtr == NULL) { |
| 4127 |
|
/* |
| 4128 |
|
* Y-coordinate is off the bottom of the displayed text. |
| 4129 |
|
* Use the last character on the last line. |
| 4130 |
|
*/ |
| 4131 |
|
|
| 4132 |
|
x = dInfoPtr->maxX - 1; |
| 4133 |
|
break; |
| 4134 |
|
} |
| 4135 |
|
} |
| 4136 |
|
if (dlPtr->chunkPtr == NULL) dlPtr = validdlPtr; |
| 4137 |
|
|
| 4138 |
|
|
| 4139 |
|
/* |
| 4140 |
|
* Scan through the line's chunks to find the one that contains |
| 4141 |
|
* the desired x-coordinate. Before doing this, translate the |
| 4142 |
|
* x-coordinate from the coordinate system of the window to the |
| 4143 |
|
* coordinate system of the line (to take account of x-scrolling). |
| 4144 |
|
*/ |
| 4145 |
|
|
| 4146 |
|
*indexPtr = dlPtr->index; |
| 4147 |
|
x = x - dInfoPtr->x + dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset; |
| 4148 |
|
for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; x >= (chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width); |
| 4149 |
|
indexPtr->byteIndex += chunkPtr->numBytes, |
| 4150 |
|
chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 4151 |
|
if (chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) { |
| 4152 |
|
indexPtr->byteIndex += chunkPtr->numBytes; |
| 4153 |
|
TkTextIndexBackChars(indexPtr, 1, indexPtr); |
| 4154 |
|
return; |
| 4155 |
|
} |
| 4156 |
|
} |
| 4157 |
|
|
| 4158 |
|
/* |
| 4159 |
|
* If the chunk has more than one byte in it, ask it which |
| 4160 |
|
* character is at the desired location. |
| 4161 |
|
*/ |
| 4162 |
|
|
| 4163 |
|
if (chunkPtr->numBytes > 1) { |
| 4164 |
|
indexPtr->byteIndex += (*chunkPtr->measureProc)(chunkPtr, x); |
| 4165 |
|
} |
| 4166 |
|
} |
| 4167 |
|
|
| 4168 |
|
/* |
| 4169 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4170 |
|
* |
| 4171 |
|
* TkTextCharBbox -- |
| 4172 |
|
* |
| 4173 |
|
* Given an index, find the bounding box of the screen area |
| 4174 |
|
* occupied by that character. |
| 4175 |
|
* |
| 4176 |
|
* Results: |
| 4177 |
|
* Zero is returned if the character is on the screen. -1 |
| 4178 |
|
* means the character isn't on the screen. If the return value |
| 4179 |
|
* is 0, then the bounding box of the part of the character that's |
| 4180 |
|
* visible on the screen is returned to *xPtr, *yPtr, *widthPtr, |
| 4181 |
|
* and *heightPtr. |
| 4182 |
|
* |
| 4183 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 4184 |
|
* None. |
| 4185 |
|
* |
| 4186 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4187 |
|
*/ |
| 4188 |
|
|
| 4189 |
|
int |
| 4190 |
|
TkTextCharBbox(textPtr, indexPtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr) |
| 4191 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
| 4192 |
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Index of character whose bounding |
| 4193 |
|
* box is desired. */ |
| 4194 |
|
int *xPtr, *yPtr; /* Filled with character's upper-left |
| 4195 |
|
* coordinate. */ |
| 4196 |
|
int *widthPtr, *heightPtr; /* Filled in with character's dimensions. */ |
| 4197 |
|
{ |
| 4198 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 4199 |
|
DLine *dlPtr; |
| 4200 |
|
register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; |
| 4201 |
|
int byteIndex; |
| 4202 |
|
|
| 4203 |
|
/* |
| 4204 |
|
* Make sure that all of the screen layout information is up to date. |
| 4205 |
|
*/ |
| 4206 |
|
|
| 4207 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
| 4208 |
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
| 4209 |
|
} |
| 4210 |
|
|
| 4211 |
|
/* |
| 4212 |
|
* Find the display line containing the desired index. |
| 4213 |
|
*/ |
| 4214 |
|
|
| 4215 |
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, indexPtr); |
| 4216 |
|
if ((dlPtr == NULL) || (TkTextIndexCmp(&dlPtr->index, indexPtr) > 0)) { |
| 4217 |
|
return -1; |
| 4218 |
|
} |
| 4219 |
|
|
| 4220 |
|
/* |
| 4221 |
|
* Find the chunk within the line that contains the desired |
| 4222 |
|
* index. |
| 4223 |
|
*/ |
| 4224 |
|
|
| 4225 |
|
byteIndex = indexPtr->byteIndex - dlPtr->index.byteIndex; |
| 4226 |
|
for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; ; chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 4227 |
|
if (chunkPtr == NULL) { |
| 4228 |
|
return -1; |
| 4229 |
|
} |
| 4230 |
|
if (byteIndex < chunkPtr->numBytes) { |
| 4231 |
|
break; |
| 4232 |
|
} |
| 4233 |
|
byteIndex -= chunkPtr->numBytes; |
| 4234 |
|
} |
| 4235 |
|
|
| 4236 |
|
/* |
| 4237 |
|
* Call a chunk-specific procedure to find the horizontal range of |
| 4238 |
|
* the character within the chunk, then fill in the vertical range. |
| 4239 |
|
* The x-coordinate returned by bboxProc is a coordinate within a |
| 4240 |
|
* line, not a coordinate on the screen. Translate it to reflect |
| 4241 |
|
* horizontal scrolling. |
| 4242 |
|
*/ |
| 4243 |
|
|
| 4244 |
|
(*chunkPtr->bboxProc)(chunkPtr, byteIndex, dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove, |
| 4245 |
|
dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow, |
| 4246 |
|
dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, |
| 4247 |
|
heightPtr); |
| 4248 |
|
*xPtr = *xPtr + dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset; |
| 4249 |
|
if ((byteIndex == (chunkPtr->numBytes - 1)) && (chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL)) { |
| 4250 |
|
/* |
| 4251 |
|
* Last character in display line. Give it all the space up to |
| 4252 |
|
* the line. |
| 4253 |
|
*/ |
| 4254 |
|
|
| 4255 |
|
if (*xPtr > dInfoPtr->maxX) { |
| 4256 |
|
*xPtr = dInfoPtr->maxX; |
| 4257 |
|
} |
| 4258 |
|
*widthPtr = dInfoPtr->maxX - *xPtr; |
| 4259 |
|
} |
| 4260 |
|
if ((*xPtr + *widthPtr) <= dInfoPtr->x) { |
| 4261 |
|
return -1; |
| 4262 |
|
} |
| 4263 |
|
if ((*xPtr + *widthPtr) > dInfoPtr->maxX) { |
| 4264 |
|
*widthPtr = dInfoPtr->maxX - *xPtr; |
| 4265 |
|
if (*widthPtr <= 0) { |
| 4266 |
|
return -1; |
| 4267 |
|
} |
| 4268 |
|
} |
| 4269 |
|
if ((*yPtr + *heightPtr) > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
| 4270 |
|
*heightPtr = dInfoPtr->maxY - *yPtr; |
| 4271 |
|
if (*heightPtr <= 0) { |
| 4272 |
|
return -1; |
| 4273 |
|
} |
| 4274 |
|
} |
| 4275 |
|
return 0; |
| 4276 |
|
} |
| 4277 |
|
|
| 4278 |
|
/* |
| 4279 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4280 |
|
* |
| 4281 |
|
* TkTextDLineInfo -- |
| 4282 |
|
* |
| 4283 |
|
* Given an index, return information about the display line |
| 4284 |
|
* containing that character. |
| 4285 |
|
* |
| 4286 |
|
* Results: |
| 4287 |
|
* Zero is returned if the character is on the screen. -1 |
| 4288 |
|
* means the character isn't on the screen. If the return value |
| 4289 |
|
* is 0, then information is returned in the variables pointed |
| 4290 |
|
* to by xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, and basePtr. |
| 4291 |
|
* |
| 4292 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 4293 |
|
* None. |
| 4294 |
|
* |
| 4295 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4296 |
|
*/ |
| 4297 |
|
|
| 4298 |
|
int |
| 4299 |
|
TkTextDLineInfo(textPtr, indexPtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, basePtr) |
| 4300 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Widget record for text widget. */ |
| 4301 |
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Index of character whose bounding |
| 4302 |
|
* box is desired. */ |
| 4303 |
|
int *xPtr, *yPtr; /* Filled with line's upper-left |
| 4304 |
|
* coordinate. */ |
| 4305 |
|
int *widthPtr, *heightPtr; /* Filled in with line's dimensions. */ |
| 4306 |
|
int *basePtr; /* Filled in with the baseline position, |
| 4307 |
|
* measured as an offset down from *yPtr. */ |
| 4308 |
|
{ |
| 4309 |
|
TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr; |
| 4310 |
|
DLine *dlPtr; |
| 4311 |
|
int dlx; |
| 4312 |
|
|
| 4313 |
|
/* |
| 4314 |
|
* Make sure that all of the screen layout information is up to date. |
| 4315 |
|
*/ |
| 4316 |
|
|
| 4317 |
|
if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) { |
| 4318 |
|
UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr); |
| 4319 |
|
} |
| 4320 |
|
|
| 4321 |
|
/* |
| 4322 |
|
* Find the display line containing the desired index. |
| 4323 |
|
*/ |
| 4324 |
|
|
| 4325 |
|
dlPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, indexPtr); |
| 4326 |
|
if ((dlPtr == NULL) || (TkTextIndexCmp(&dlPtr->index, indexPtr) > 0)) { |
| 4327 |
|
return -1; |
| 4328 |
|
} |
| 4329 |
|
|
| 4330 |
|
dlx = (dlPtr->chunkPtr != NULL? dlPtr->chunkPtr->x: 0); |
| 4331 |
|
*xPtr = dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset + dlx; |
| 4332 |
|
*widthPtr = dlPtr->length - dlx; |
| 4333 |
|
*yPtr = dlPtr->y; |
| 4334 |
|
if ((dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY) { |
| 4335 |
|
*heightPtr = dInfoPtr->maxY - dlPtr->y; |
| 4336 |
|
} else { |
| 4337 |
|
*heightPtr = dlPtr->height; |
| 4338 |
|
} |
| 4339 |
|
*basePtr = dlPtr->baseline; |
| 4340 |
|
return 0; |
| 4341 |
|
} |
| 4342 |
|
|
| 4343 |
|
static void |
| 4344 |
|
ElideBboxProc(chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr, |
| 4345 |
|
widthPtr, heightPtr) |
| 4346 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk containing desired char. */ |
| 4347 |
|
int index; /* Index of desired character within |
| 4348 |
|
* the chunk. */ |
| 4349 |
|
int y; /* Topmost pixel in area allocated |
| 4350 |
|
* for this line. */ |
| 4351 |
|
int lineHeight; /* Height of line, in pixels. */ |
| 4352 |
|
int baseline; /* Location of line's baseline, in |
| 4353 |
|
* pixels measured down from y. */ |
| 4354 |
|
int *xPtr, *yPtr; /* Gets filled in with coords of |
| 4355 |
|
* character's upper-left pixel. |
| 4356 |
|
* X-coord is in same coordinate |
| 4357 |
|
* system as chunkPtr->x. */ |
| 4358 |
|
int *widthPtr; /* Gets filled in with width of |
| 4359 |
|
* character, in pixels. */ |
| 4360 |
|
int *heightPtr; /* Gets filled in with height of |
| 4361 |
|
* character, in pixels. */ |
| 4362 |
|
{ |
| 4363 |
|
*xPtr = chunkPtr->x; |
| 4364 |
|
*yPtr = y; |
| 4365 |
|
*widthPtr = *heightPtr = 0; |
| 4366 |
|
} |
| 4367 |
|
|
| 4368 |
|
|
| 4369 |
|
static int |
| 4370 |
|
ElideMeasureProc(chunkPtr, x) |
| 4371 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk containing desired coord. */ |
| 4372 |
|
int x; /* X-coordinate, in same coordinate |
| 4373 |
|
* system as chunkPtr->x. */ |
| 4374 |
|
{ |
| 4375 |
|
return 0 /*chunkPtr->numBytes - 1*/; |
| 4376 |
|
} |
| 4377 |
|
|
| 4378 |
|
/* |
| 4379 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4380 |
|
* |
| 4381 |
|
* TkTextCharLayoutProc -- |
| 4382 |
|
* |
| 4383 |
|
* This procedure is the "layoutProc" for character segments. |
| 4384 |
|
* |
| 4385 |
|
n * Results: |
| 4386 |
|
* If there is something to display for the chunk then a |
| 4387 |
|
* non-zero value is returned and the fields of chunkPtr |
| 4388 |
|
* will be filled in (see the declaration of TkTextDispChunk |
| 4389 |
|
* in tkText.h for details). If zero is returned it means |
| 4390 |
|
* that no characters from this chunk fit in the window. |
| 4391 |
|
* If -1 is returned it means that this segment just doesn't |
| 4392 |
|
* need to be displayed (never happens for text). |
| 4393 |
|
* |
| 4394 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 4395 |
|
* Memory is allocated to hold additional information about |
| 4396 |
|
* the chunk. |
| 4397 |
|
* |
| 4398 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4399 |
|
*/ |
| 4400 |
|
|
| 4401 |
|
int |
| 4402 |
|
TkTextCharLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, byteOffset, maxX, maxBytes, |
| 4403 |
|
noCharsYet, wrapMode, chunkPtr) |
| 4404 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Text widget being layed out. */ |
| 4405 |
|
TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Index of first character to lay out |
| 4406 |
|
* (corresponds to segPtr and offset). */ |
| 4407 |
|
TkTextSegment *segPtr; /* Segment being layed out. */ |
| 4408 |
|
int byteOffset; /* Byte offset within segment of first |
| 4409 |
|
* character to consider. */ |
| 4410 |
|
int maxX; /* Chunk must not occupy pixels at this |
| 4411 |
|
* position or higher. */ |
| 4412 |
|
int maxBytes; /* Chunk must not include more than this |
| 4413 |
|
* many characters. */ |
| 4414 |
|
int noCharsYet; /* Non-zero means no characters have been |
| 4415 |
|
* assigned to this display line yet. */ |
| 4416 |
|
TkWrapMode wrapMode; /* How to handle line wrapping: TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR, |
| 4417 |
|
* TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, or TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD. */ |
| 4418 |
|
register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; |
| 4419 |
|
/* Structure to fill in with information |
| 4420 |
|
* about this chunk. The x field has already |
| 4421 |
|
* been set by the caller. */ |
| 4422 |
|
{ |
| 4423 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; |
| 4424 |
|
int nextX, bytesThatFit, count; |
| 4425 |
|
CharInfo *ciPtr; |
| 4426 |
|
char *p; |
| 4427 |
|
TkTextSegment *nextPtr; |
| 4428 |
|
Tk_FontMetrics fm; |
| 4429 |
|
|
| 4430 |
|
/* |
| 4431 |
|
* Figure out how many characters will fit in the space we've got. |
| 4432 |
|
* Include the next character, even though it won't fit completely, |
| 4433 |
|
* if any of the following is true: |
| 4434 |
|
* (a) the chunk contains no characters and the display line contains |
| 4435 |
|
* no characters yet (i.e. the line isn't wide enough to hold |
| 4436 |
|
* even a single character). |
| 4437 |
|
* (b) at least one pixel of the character is visible, we haven't |
| 4438 |
|
* already exceeded the character limit, and the next character |
| 4439 |
|
* is a white space character. |
| 4440 |
|
*/ |
| 4441 |
|
|
| 4442 |
|
p = segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset; |
| 4443 |
|
tkfont = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont; |
| 4444 |
|
bytesThatFit = MeasureChars(tkfont, p, maxBytes, chunkPtr->x, maxX, 0, |
| 4445 |
|
&nextX); |
| 4446 |
|
if (bytesThatFit < maxBytes) { |
| 4447 |
|
if ((bytesThatFit == 0) && noCharsYet) { |
| 4448 |
|
Tcl_UniChar ch; |
| 4449 |
|
|
| 4450 |
|
bytesThatFit = MeasureChars(tkfont, p, Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch), |
| 4451 |
|
chunkPtr->x, -1, 0, &nextX); |
| 4452 |
|
} |
| 4453 |
|
if ((nextX < maxX) && ((p[bytesThatFit] == ' ') |
| 4454 |
|
|| (p[bytesThatFit] == '\t'))) { |
| 4455 |
|
/* |
| 4456 |
|
* Space characters are funny, in that they are considered |
| 4457 |
|
* to fit if there is at least one pixel of space left on the |
| 4458 |
|
* line. Just give the space character whatever space is left. |
| 4459 |
|
*/ |
| 4460 |
|
|
| 4461 |
|
nextX = maxX; |
| 4462 |
|
bytesThatFit++; |
| 4463 |
|
} |
| 4464 |
|
if (p[bytesThatFit] == '\n') { |
| 4465 |
|
/* |
| 4466 |
|
* A newline character takes up no space, so if the previous |
| 4467 |
|
* character fits then so does the newline. |
| 4468 |
|
*/ |
| 4469 |
|
|
| 4470 |
|
bytesThatFit++; |
| 4471 |
|
} |
| 4472 |
|
if (bytesThatFit == 0) { |
| 4473 |
|
return 0; |
| 4474 |
|
} |
| 4475 |
|
} |
| 4476 |
|
|
| 4477 |
|
Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, &fm); |
| 4478 |
|
|
| 4479 |
|
/* |
| 4480 |
|
* Fill in the chunk structure and allocate and initialize a |
| 4481 |
|
* CharInfo structure. If the last character is a newline |
| 4482 |
|
* then don't bother to display it. |
| 4483 |
|
*/ |
| 4484 |
|
|
| 4485 |
|
chunkPtr->displayProc = CharDisplayProc; |
| 4486 |
|
chunkPtr->undisplayProc = CharUndisplayProc; |
| 4487 |
|
chunkPtr->measureProc = CharMeasureProc; |
| 4488 |
|
chunkPtr->bboxProc = CharBboxProc; |
| 4489 |
|
chunkPtr->numBytes = bytesThatFit; |
| 4490 |
|
chunkPtr->minAscent = fm.ascent + chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->offset; |
| 4491 |
|
chunkPtr->minDescent = fm.descent - chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->offset; |
| 4492 |
|
chunkPtr->minHeight = 0; |
| 4493 |
|
chunkPtr->width = nextX - chunkPtr->x; |
| 4494 |
|
chunkPtr->breakIndex = -1; |
| 4495 |
|
ciPtr = (CharInfo *) ckalloc((unsigned) |
| 4496 |
|
(sizeof(CharInfo) - 3 + bytesThatFit)); |
| 4497 |
|
chunkPtr->clientData = (ClientData) ciPtr; |
| 4498 |
|
ciPtr->numBytes = bytesThatFit; |
| 4499 |
|
strncpy(ciPtr->chars, p, (size_t) bytesThatFit); |
| 4500 |
|
if (p[bytesThatFit - 1] == '\n') { |
| 4501 |
|
ciPtr->numBytes--; |
| 4502 |
|
} |
| 4503 |
|
|
| 4504 |
|
/* |
| 4505 |
|
* Compute a break location. If we're in word wrap mode, a |
| 4506 |
|
* break can occur after any space character, or at the end of |
| 4507 |
|
* the chunk if the next segment (ignoring those with zero size) |
| 4508 |
|
* is not a character segment. |
| 4509 |
|
*/ |
| 4510 |
|
|
| 4511 |
|
if (wrapMode != TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD) { |
| 4512 |
|
chunkPtr->breakIndex = chunkPtr->numBytes; |
| 4513 |
|
} else { |
| 4514 |
|
for (count = bytesThatFit, p += bytesThatFit - 1; count > 0; |
| 4515 |
|
count--, p--) { |
| 4516 |
|
if (isspace(UCHAR(*p))) { |
| 4517 |
|
chunkPtr->breakIndex = count; |
| 4518 |
|
break; |
| 4519 |
|
} |
| 4520 |
|
} |
| 4521 |
|
if ((bytesThatFit + byteOffset) == segPtr->size) { |
| 4522 |
|
for (nextPtr = segPtr->nextPtr; nextPtr != NULL; |
| 4523 |
|
nextPtr = nextPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 4524 |
|
if (nextPtr->size != 0) { |
| 4525 |
|
if (nextPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType) { |
| 4526 |
|
chunkPtr->breakIndex = chunkPtr->numBytes; |
| 4527 |
|
} |
| 4528 |
|
break; |
| 4529 |
|
} |
| 4530 |
|
} |
| 4531 |
|
} |
| 4532 |
|
} |
| 4533 |
|
return 1; |
| 4534 |
|
} |
| 4535 |
|
|
| 4536 |
|
/* |
| 4537 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4538 |
|
* |
| 4539 |
|
* CharDisplayProc -- |
| 4540 |
|
* |
| 4541 |
|
* This procedure is called to display a character chunk on |
| 4542 |
|
* the screen or in an off-screen pixmap. |
| 4543 |
|
* |
| 4544 |
|
* Results: |
| 4545 |
|
* None. |
| 4546 |
|
* |
| 4547 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 4548 |
|
* Graphics are drawn. |
| 4549 |
|
* |
| 4550 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4551 |
|
*/ |
| 4552 |
|
|
| 4553 |
|
static void |
| 4554 |
|
CharDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, height, baseline, display, dst, screenY) |
| 4555 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk that is to be drawn. */ |
| 4556 |
|
int x; /* X-position in dst at which to |
| 4557 |
|
* draw this chunk (may differ from |
| 4558 |
|
* the x-position in the chunk because |
| 4559 |
|
* of scrolling). */ |
| 4560 |
|
int y; /* Y-position at which to draw this |
| 4561 |
|
* chunk in dst. */ |
| 4562 |
|
int height; /* Total height of line. */ |
| 4563 |
|
int baseline; /* Offset of baseline from y. */ |
| 4564 |
|
Display *display; /* Display to use for drawing. */ |
| 4565 |
|
Drawable dst; /* Pixmap or window in which to draw |
| 4566 |
|
* chunk. */ |
| 4567 |
|
int screenY; /* Y-coordinate in text window that |
| 4568 |
|
* corresponds to y. */ |
| 4569 |
|
{ |
| 4570 |
|
CharInfo *ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData; |
| 4571 |
|
TextStyle *stylePtr; |
| 4572 |
|
StyleValues *sValuePtr; |
| 4573 |
|
int offsetBytes, offsetX; |
| 4574 |
|
|
| 4575 |
|
if ((x + chunkPtr->width) <= 0) { |
| 4576 |
|
/* |
| 4577 |
|
* The chunk is off-screen. |
| 4578 |
|
*/ |
| 4579 |
|
|
| 4580 |
|
return; |
| 4581 |
|
} |
| 4582 |
|
|
| 4583 |
|
stylePtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr; |
| 4584 |
|
sValuePtr = stylePtr->sValuePtr; |
| 4585 |
|
|
| 4586 |
|
/* |
| 4587 |
|
* If the text sticks out way to the left of the window, skip |
| 4588 |
|
* over the characters that aren't in the visible part of the |
| 4589 |
|
* window. This is essential if x is very negative (such as |
| 4590 |
|
* less than 32K); otherwise overflow problems will occur |
| 4591 |
|
* in servers that use 16-bit arithmetic, like X. |
| 4592 |
|
*/ |
| 4593 |
|
|
| 4594 |
|
offsetX = x; |
| 4595 |
|
offsetBytes = 0; |
| 4596 |
|
if (x < 0) { |
| 4597 |
|
offsetBytes = MeasureChars(sValuePtr->tkfont, ciPtr->chars, |
| 4598 |
|
ciPtr->numBytes, x, 0, x - chunkPtr->x, &offsetX); |
| 4599 |
|
} |
| 4600 |
|
|
| 4601 |
|
/* |
| 4602 |
|
* Draw the text, underline, and overstrike for this chunk. |
| 4603 |
|
*/ |
| 4604 |
|
|
| 4605 |
|
if (!sValuePtr->elide && (ciPtr->numBytes > offsetBytes) && (stylePtr->fgGC != None)) { |
| 4606 |
|
int numBytes = ciPtr->numBytes - offsetBytes; |
| 4607 |
|
char *string = ciPtr->chars + offsetBytes; |
| 4608 |
|
|
| 4609 |
|
if ((numBytes > 0) && (string[numBytes - 1] == '\t')) { |
| 4610 |
|
numBytes--; |
| 4611 |
|
} |
| 4612 |
|
Tk_DrawChars(display, dst, stylePtr->fgGC, sValuePtr->tkfont, string, |
| 4613 |
|
numBytes, offsetX, y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset); |
| 4614 |
|
if (sValuePtr->underline) { |
| 4615 |
|
Tk_UnderlineChars(display, dst, stylePtr->fgGC, sValuePtr->tkfont, |
| 4616 |
|
ciPtr->chars + offsetBytes, offsetX, |
| 4617 |
|
y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset, 0, numBytes); |
| 4618 |
|
|
| 4619 |
|
} |
| 4620 |
|
if (sValuePtr->overstrike) { |
| 4621 |
|
Tk_FontMetrics fm; |
| 4622 |
|
|
| 4623 |
|
Tk_GetFontMetrics(sValuePtr->tkfont, &fm); |
| 4624 |
|
Tk_UnderlineChars(display, dst, stylePtr->fgGC, sValuePtr->tkfont, |
| 4625 |
|
ciPtr->chars + offsetBytes, offsetX, |
| 4626 |
|
y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset |
| 4627 |
|
- fm.descent - (fm.ascent * 3) / 10, |
| 4628 |
|
0, numBytes); |
| 4629 |
|
} |
| 4630 |
|
} |
| 4631 |
|
} |
| 4632 |
|
|
| 4633 |
|
/* |
| 4634 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4635 |
|
* |
| 4636 |
|
* CharUndisplayProc -- |
| 4637 |
|
* |
| 4638 |
|
* This procedure is called when a character chunk is no |
| 4639 |
|
* longer going to be displayed. It frees up resources |
| 4640 |
|
* that were allocated to display the chunk. |
| 4641 |
|
* |
| 4642 |
|
* Results: |
| 4643 |
|
* None. |
| 4644 |
|
* |
| 4645 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 4646 |
|
* Memory and other resources get freed. |
| 4647 |
|
* |
| 4648 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4649 |
|
*/ |
| 4650 |
|
|
| 4651 |
|
static void |
| 4652 |
|
CharUndisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr) |
| 4653 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Overall information about text |
| 4654 |
|
* widget. */ |
| 4655 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk that is about to be freed. */ |
| 4656 |
|
{ |
| 4657 |
|
CharInfo *ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData; |
| 4658 |
|
|
| 4659 |
|
ckfree((char *) ciPtr); |
| 4660 |
|
} |
| 4661 |
|
|
| 4662 |
|
/* |
| 4663 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4664 |
|
* |
| 4665 |
|
* CharMeasureProc -- |
| 4666 |
|
* |
| 4667 |
|
* This procedure is called to determine which character in |
| 4668 |
|
* a character chunk lies over a given x-coordinate. |
| 4669 |
|
* |
| 4670 |
|
* Results: |
| 4671 |
|
* The return value is the index *within the chunk* of the |
| 4672 |
|
* character that covers the position given by "x". |
| 4673 |
|
* |
| 4674 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 4675 |
|
* None. |
| 4676 |
|
* |
| 4677 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4678 |
|
*/ |
| 4679 |
|
|
| 4680 |
|
static int |
| 4681 |
|
CharMeasureProc(chunkPtr, x) |
| 4682 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk containing desired coord. */ |
| 4683 |
|
int x; /* X-coordinate, in same coordinate |
| 4684 |
|
* system as chunkPtr->x. */ |
| 4685 |
|
{ |
| 4686 |
|
CharInfo *ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData; |
| 4687 |
|
int endX; |
| 4688 |
|
|
| 4689 |
|
return MeasureChars(chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont, ciPtr->chars, |
| 4690 |
|
chunkPtr->numBytes - 1, chunkPtr->x, x, 0, &endX); |
| 4691 |
|
/* CHAR OFFSET */ |
| 4692 |
|
} |
| 4693 |
|
|
| 4694 |
|
/* |
| 4695 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4696 |
|
* |
| 4697 |
|
* CharBboxProc -- |
| 4698 |
|
* |
| 4699 |
|
* This procedure is called to compute the bounding box of |
| 4700 |
|
* the area occupied by a single character. |
| 4701 |
|
* |
| 4702 |
|
* Results: |
| 4703 |
|
* There is no return value. *xPtr and *yPtr are filled in |
| 4704 |
|
* with the coordinates of the upper left corner of the |
| 4705 |
|
* character, and *widthPtr and *heightPtr are filled in with |
| 4706 |
|
* the dimensions of the character in pixels. Note: not all |
| 4707 |
|
* of the returned bbox is necessarily visible on the screen |
| 4708 |
|
* (the rightmost part might be off-screen to the right, |
| 4709 |
|
* and the bottommost part might be off-screen to the bottom). |
| 4710 |
|
* |
| 4711 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 4712 |
|
* None. |
| 4713 |
|
* |
| 4714 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4715 |
|
*/ |
| 4716 |
|
|
| 4717 |
|
static void |
| 4718 |
|
CharBboxProc(chunkPtr, byteIndex, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr, |
| 4719 |
|
widthPtr, heightPtr) |
| 4720 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk containing desired char. */ |
| 4721 |
|
int byteIndex; /* Byte offset of desired character |
| 4722 |
|
* within the chunk. */ |
| 4723 |
|
int y; /* Topmost pixel in area allocated |
| 4724 |
|
* for this line. */ |
| 4725 |
|
int lineHeight; /* Height of line, in pixels. */ |
| 4726 |
|
int baseline; /* Location of line's baseline, in |
| 4727 |
|
* pixels measured down from y. */ |
| 4728 |
|
int *xPtr, *yPtr; /* Gets filled in with coords of |
| 4729 |
|
* character's upper-left pixel. |
| 4730 |
|
* X-coord is in same coordinate |
| 4731 |
|
* system as chunkPtr->x. */ |
| 4732 |
|
int *widthPtr; /* Gets filled in with width of |
| 4733 |
|
* character, in pixels. */ |
| 4734 |
|
int *heightPtr; /* Gets filled in with height of |
| 4735 |
|
* character, in pixels. */ |
| 4736 |
|
{ |
| 4737 |
|
CharInfo *ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData; |
| 4738 |
|
int maxX; |
| 4739 |
|
|
| 4740 |
|
maxX = chunkPtr->width + chunkPtr->x; |
| 4741 |
|
MeasureChars(chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont, ciPtr->chars, |
| 4742 |
|
byteIndex, chunkPtr->x, -1, 0, xPtr); |
| 4743 |
|
|
| 4744 |
|
if (byteIndex == ciPtr->numBytes) { |
| 4745 |
|
/* |
| 4746 |
|
* This situation only happens if the last character in a line |
| 4747 |
|
* is a space character, in which case it absorbs all of the |
| 4748 |
|
* extra space in the line (see TkTextCharLayoutProc). |
| 4749 |
|
*/ |
| 4750 |
|
|
| 4751 |
|
*widthPtr = maxX - *xPtr; |
| 4752 |
|
} else if ((ciPtr->chars[byteIndex] == '\t') |
| 4753 |
|
&& (byteIndex == ciPtr->numBytes - 1)) { |
| 4754 |
|
/* |
| 4755 |
|
* The desired character is a tab character that terminates a |
| 4756 |
|
* chunk; give it all the space left in the chunk. |
| 4757 |
|
*/ |
| 4758 |
|
|
| 4759 |
|
*widthPtr = maxX - *xPtr; |
| 4760 |
|
} else { |
| 4761 |
|
MeasureChars(chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont, |
| 4762 |
|
ciPtr->chars + byteIndex, 1, *xPtr, -1, 0, widthPtr); |
| 4763 |
|
if (*widthPtr > maxX) { |
| 4764 |
|
*widthPtr = maxX - *xPtr; |
| 4765 |
|
} else { |
| 4766 |
|
*widthPtr -= *xPtr; |
| 4767 |
|
} |
| 4768 |
|
} |
| 4769 |
|
*yPtr = y + baseline - chunkPtr->minAscent; |
| 4770 |
|
*heightPtr = chunkPtr->minAscent + chunkPtr->minDescent; |
| 4771 |
|
} |
| 4772 |
|
|
| 4773 |
|
/* |
| 4774 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4775 |
|
* |
| 4776 |
|
* AdjustForTab -- |
| 4777 |
|
* |
| 4778 |
|
* This procedure is called to move a series of chunks right |
| 4779 |
|
* in order to align them with a tab stop. |
| 4780 |
|
* |
| 4781 |
|
* Results: |
| 4782 |
|
* None. |
| 4783 |
|
* |
| 4784 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 4785 |
|
* The width of chunkPtr gets adjusted so that it absorbs the |
| 4786 |
|
* extra space due to the tab. The x locations in all the chunks |
| 4787 |
|
* after chunkPtr are adjusted rightward to align with the tab |
| 4788 |
|
* stop given by tabArrayPtr and index. |
| 4789 |
|
* |
| 4790 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4791 |
|
*/ |
| 4792 |
|
|
| 4793 |
|
static void |
| 4794 |
|
AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, chunkPtr) |
| 4795 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about the text widget as |
| 4796 |
|
* a whole. */ |
| 4797 |
|
TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr; /* Information about the tab stops |
| 4798 |
|
* that apply to this line. May be |
| 4799 |
|
* NULL to indicate default tabbing |
| 4800 |
|
* (every 8 chars). */ |
| 4801 |
|
int index; /* Index of current tab stop. */ |
| 4802 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr; /* Chunk whose last character is |
| 4803 |
|
* the tab; the following chunks |
| 4804 |
|
* contain information to be shifted |
| 4805 |
|
* right. */ |
| 4806 |
|
|
| 4807 |
|
{ |
| 4808 |
|
int x, desired, delta, width, decimal, i, gotDigit; |
| 4809 |
|
TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr2, *decimalChunkPtr; |
| 4810 |
|
CharInfo *ciPtr; |
| 4811 |
|
int tabX, prev, spaceWidth; |
| 4812 |
|
char *p; |
| 4813 |
|
TkTextTabAlign alignment; |
| 4814 |
|
|
| 4815 |
|
if (chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) { |
| 4816 |
|
/* |
| 4817 |
|
* Nothing after the actual tab; just return. |
| 4818 |
|
*/ |
| 4819 |
|
|
| 4820 |
|
return; |
| 4821 |
|
} |
| 4822 |
|
|
| 4823 |
|
/* |
| 4824 |
|
* If no tab information has been given, do the usual thing: |
| 4825 |
|
* round up to the next boundary of 8 average-sized characters. |
| 4826 |
|
*/ |
| 4827 |
|
|
| 4828 |
|
x = chunkPtr->nextPtr->x; |
| 4829 |
|
if ((tabArrayPtr == NULL) || (tabArrayPtr->numTabs == 0)) { |
| 4830 |
|
/* |
| 4831 |
|
* No tab information has been given, so use the default |
| 4832 |
|
* interpretation of tabs. |
| 4833 |
|
*/ |
| 4834 |
|
|
| 4835 |
|
desired = NextTabStop(textPtr->tkfont, x, 0); |
| 4836 |
|
goto update; |
| 4837 |
|
} |
| 4838 |
|
|
| 4839 |
|
if (index < tabArrayPtr->numTabs) { |
| 4840 |
|
alignment = tabArrayPtr->tabs[index].alignment; |
| 4841 |
|
tabX = tabArrayPtr->tabs[index].location; |
| 4842 |
|
} else { |
| 4843 |
|
/* |
| 4844 |
|
* Ran out of tab stops; compute a tab position by extrapolating |
| 4845 |
|
* from the last two tab positions. |
| 4846 |
|
*/ |
| 4847 |
|
|
| 4848 |
|
if (tabArrayPtr->numTabs > 1) { |
| 4849 |
|
prev = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-2].location; |
| 4850 |
|
} else { |
| 4851 |
|
prev = 0; |
| 4852 |
|
} |
| 4853 |
|
alignment = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].alignment; |
| 4854 |
|
tabX = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].location |
| 4855 |
|
+ (index + 1 - tabArrayPtr->numTabs) |
| 4856 |
|
* (tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].location - prev); |
| 4857 |
|
} |
| 4858 |
|
|
| 4859 |
|
if (alignment == LEFT) { |
| 4860 |
|
desired = tabX; |
| 4861 |
|
goto update; |
| 4862 |
|
} |
| 4863 |
|
|
| 4864 |
|
if ((alignment == CENTER) || (alignment == RIGHT)) { |
| 4865 |
|
/* |
| 4866 |
|
* Compute the width of all the information in the tab group, |
| 4867 |
|
* then use it to pick a desired location. |
| 4868 |
|
*/ |
| 4869 |
|
|
| 4870 |
|
width = 0; |
| 4871 |
|
for (chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr->nextPtr; chunkPtr2 != NULL; |
| 4872 |
|
chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr) { |
| 4873 |
|
width += chunkPtr2->width; |
| 4874 |
|
} |
| 4875 |
|
if (alignment == CENTER) { |
| 4876 |
|
desired = tabX - width/2; |
| 4877 |
|
} else { |
| 4878 |
|
desired = tabX - width; |
| 4879 |
|
} |
| 4880 |
|
goto update; |
| 4881 |
|
} |
| 4882 |
|
|
| 4883 |
|
/* |
| 4884 |
|
* Must be numeric alignment. Search through the text to be |
| 4885 |
|
* tabbed, looking for the last , or . before the first character |
| 4886 |
|
* that isn't a number, comma, period, or sign. |
| 4887 |
|
*/ |
| 4888 |
|
|
| 4889 |
|
decimalChunkPtr = NULL; |
| 4890 |
|
decimal = gotDigit = 0; |
| 4891 |
|
for (chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr->nextPtr; chunkPtr2 != NULL; |
| 4892 |
|
chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr) { |
| 4893 |
|
if (chunkPtr2->displayProc != CharDisplayProc) { |
| 4894 |
|
continue; |
| 4895 |
|
} |
| 4896 |
|
ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr2->clientData; |
| 4897 |
|
for (p = ciPtr->chars, i = 0; i < ciPtr->numBytes; p++, i++) { |
| 4898 |
|
if (isdigit(UCHAR(*p))) { |
| 4899 |
|
gotDigit = 1; |
| 4900 |
|
} else if ((*p == '.') || (*p == ',')) { |
| 4901 |
|
decimal = p-ciPtr->chars; |
| 4902 |
|
decimalChunkPtr = chunkPtr2; |
| 4903 |
|
} else if (gotDigit) { |
| 4904 |
|
if (decimalChunkPtr == NULL) { |
| 4905 |
|
decimal = p-ciPtr->chars; |
| 4906 |
|
decimalChunkPtr = chunkPtr2; |
| 4907 |
|
} |
| 4908 |
|
goto endOfNumber; |
| 4909 |
|
} |
| 4910 |
|
} |
| 4911 |
|
} |
| 4912 |
|
endOfNumber: |
| 4913 |
|
if (decimalChunkPtr != NULL) { |
| 4914 |
|
int curX; |
| 4915 |
|
|
| 4916 |
|
ciPtr = (CharInfo *) decimalChunkPtr->clientData; |
| 4917 |
|
MeasureChars(decimalChunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont, |
| 4918 |
|
ciPtr->chars, decimal, decimalChunkPtr->x, -1, 0, &curX); |
| 4919 |
|
desired = tabX - (curX - x); |
| 4920 |
|
goto update; |
| 4921 |
|
} else { |
| 4922 |
|
/* |
| 4923 |
|
* There wasn't a decimal point. Right justify the text. |
| 4924 |
|
*/ |
| 4925 |
|
|
| 4926 |
|
width = 0; |
| 4927 |
|
for (chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr->nextPtr; chunkPtr2 != NULL; |
| 4928 |
|
chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr) { |
| 4929 |
|
width += chunkPtr2->width; |
| 4930 |
|
} |
| 4931 |
|
desired = tabX - width; |
| 4932 |
|
} |
| 4933 |
|
|
| 4934 |
|
/* |
| 4935 |
|
* Shift all of the chunks to the right so that the left edge is |
| 4936 |
|
* at the desired location, then expand the chunk containing the |
| 4937 |
|
* tab. Be sure that the tab occupies at least the width of a |
| 4938 |
|
* space character. |
| 4939 |
|
*/ |
| 4940 |
|
|
| 4941 |
|
update: |
| 4942 |
|
delta = desired - x; |
| 4943 |
|
MeasureChars(textPtr->tkfont, " ", 1, 0, -1, 0, &spaceWidth); |
| 4944 |
|
if (delta < spaceWidth) { |
| 4945 |
|
delta = spaceWidth; |
| 4946 |
|
} |
| 4947 |
|
for (chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr->nextPtr; chunkPtr2 != NULL; |
| 4948 |
|
chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr) { |
| 4949 |
|
chunkPtr2->x += delta; |
| 4950 |
|
} |
| 4951 |
|
chunkPtr->width += delta; |
| 4952 |
|
} |
| 4953 |
|
|
| 4954 |
|
/* |
| 4955 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4956 |
|
* |
| 4957 |
|
* SizeOfTab -- |
| 4958 |
|
* |
| 4959 |
|
* This returns an estimate of the amount of white space that will |
| 4960 |
|
* be consumed by a tab. |
| 4961 |
|
* |
| 4962 |
|
* Results: |
| 4963 |
|
* The return value is the minimum number of pixels that will |
| 4964 |
|
* be occupied by the index'th tab of tabArrayPtr, assuming that |
| 4965 |
|
* the current position on the line is x and the end of the |
| 4966 |
|
* line is maxX. For numeric tabs, this is a conservative |
| 4967 |
|
* estimate. The return value is always >= 0. |
| 4968 |
|
* |
| 4969 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 4970 |
|
* None. |
| 4971 |
|
* |
| 4972 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 4973 |
|
*/ |
| 4974 |
|
|
| 4975 |
|
static int |
| 4976 |
|
SizeOfTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, x, maxX) |
| 4977 |
|
TkText *textPtr; /* Information about the text widget as |
| 4978 |
|
* a whole. */ |
| 4979 |
|
TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr; /* Information about the tab stops |
| 4980 |
|
* that apply to this line. NULL |
| 4981 |
|
* means use default tabbing (every |
| 4982 |
|
* 8 chars.) */ |
| 4983 |
|
int index; /* Index of current tab stop. */ |
| 4984 |
|
int x; /* Current x-location in line. Only |
| 4985 |
|
* used if tabArrayPtr == NULL. */ |
| 4986 |
|
int maxX; /* X-location of pixel just past the |
| 4987 |
|
* right edge of the line. */ |
| 4988 |
|
{ |
| 4989 |
|
int tabX, prev, result, spaceWidth; |
| 4990 |
|
TkTextTabAlign alignment; |
| 4991 |
|
|
| 4992 |
|
if ((tabArrayPtr == NULL) || (tabArrayPtr->numTabs == 0)) { |
| 4993 |
|
tabX = NextTabStop(textPtr->tkfont, x, 0); |
| 4994 |
|
return tabX - x; |
| 4995 |
|
} |
| 4996 |
|
if (index < tabArrayPtr->numTabs) { |
| 4997 |
|
tabX = tabArrayPtr->tabs[index].location; |
| 4998 |
|
alignment = tabArrayPtr->tabs[index].alignment; |
| 4999 |
|
} else { |
| 5000 |
|
/* |
| 5001 |
|
* Ran out of tab stops; compute a tab position by extrapolating |
| 5002 |
|
* from the last two tab positions. |
| 5003 |
|
*/ |
| 5004 |
|
|
| 5005 |
|
if (tabArrayPtr->numTabs > 1) { |
| 5006 |
|
prev = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-2].location; |
| 5007 |
|
} else { |
| 5008 |
|
prev = 0; |
| 5009 |
|
} |
| 5010 |
|
tabX = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].location |
| 5011 |
|
+ (index + 1 - tabArrayPtr->numTabs) |
| 5012 |
|
* (tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].location - prev); |
| 5013 |
|
alignment = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].alignment; |
| 5014 |
|
} |
| 5015 |
|
if (alignment == CENTER) { |
| 5016 |
|
/* |
| 5017 |
|
* Be very careful in the arithmetic below, because maxX may |
| 5018 |
|
* be the largest positive number: watch out for integer |
| 5019 |
|
* overflow. |
| 5020 |
|
*/ |
| 5021 |
|
|
| 5022 |
|
if ((maxX-tabX) < (tabX - x)) { |
| 5023 |
|
result = (maxX - x) - 2*(maxX - tabX); |
| 5024 |
|
} else { |
| 5025 |
|
result = 0; |
| 5026 |
|
} |
| 5027 |
|
goto done; |
| 5028 |
|
} |
| 5029 |
|
if (alignment == RIGHT) { |
| 5030 |
|
result = 0; |
| 5031 |
|
goto done; |
| 5032 |
|
} |
| 5033 |
|
|
| 5034 |
|
/* |
| 5035 |
|
* Note: this treats NUMERIC alignment the same as LEFT |
| 5036 |
|
* alignment, which is somewhat conservative. However, it's |
| 5037 |
|
* pretty tricky at this point to figure out exactly where |
| 5038 |
|
* the damn decimal point will be. |
| 5039 |
|
*/ |
| 5040 |
|
|
| 5041 |
|
if (tabX > x) { |
| 5042 |
|
result = tabX - x; |
| 5043 |
|
} else { |
| 5044 |
|
result = 0; |
| 5045 |
|
} |
| 5046 |
|
|
| 5047 |
|
done: |
| 5048 |
|
MeasureChars(textPtr->tkfont, " ", 1, 0, -1, 0, &spaceWidth); |
| 5049 |
|
if (result < spaceWidth) { |
| 5050 |
|
result = spaceWidth; |
| 5051 |
|
} |
| 5052 |
|
return result; |
| 5053 |
|
} |
| 5054 |
|
|
| 5055 |
|
/* |
| 5056 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 5057 |
|
* |
| 5058 |
|
* NextTabStop -- |
| 5059 |
|
* |
| 5060 |
|
* Given the current position, determine where the next default |
| 5061 |
|
* tab stop would be located. This procedure is called when the |
| 5062 |
|
* current chunk in the text has no tabs defined and so the default |
| 5063 |
|
* tab spacing for the font should be used. |
| 5064 |
|
* |
| 5065 |
|
* Results: |
| 5066 |
|
* The location in pixels of the next tab stop. |
| 5067 |
|
* |
| 5068 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 5069 |
|
* None. |
| 5070 |
|
* |
| 5071 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 5072 |
|
*/ |
| 5073 |
|
|
| 5074 |
|
static int |
| 5075 |
|
NextTabStop(tkfont, x, tabOrigin) |
| 5076 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font in which chunk that contains tab |
| 5077 |
|
* stop will be drawn. */ |
| 5078 |
|
int x; /* X-position in pixels where last |
| 5079 |
|
* character was drawn. The next tab stop |
| 5080 |
|
* occurs somewhere after this location. */ |
| 5081 |
|
int tabOrigin; /* The origin for tab stops. May be |
| 5082 |
|
* non-zero if text has been scrolled. */ |
| 5083 |
|
{ |
| 5084 |
|
int tabWidth, rem; |
| 5085 |
|
|
| 5086 |
|
tabWidth = Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, "0", 1) * 8; |
| 5087 |
|
if (tabWidth == 0) { |
| 5088 |
|
tabWidth = 1; |
| 5089 |
|
} |
| 5090 |
|
|
| 5091 |
|
x += tabWidth; |
| 5092 |
|
rem = (x - tabOrigin) % tabWidth; |
| 5093 |
|
if (rem < 0) { |
| 5094 |
|
rem += tabWidth; |
| 5095 |
|
} |
| 5096 |
|
x -= rem; |
| 5097 |
|
return x; |
| 5098 |
|
} |
| 5099 |
|
|
| 5100 |
|
/* |
| 5101 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 5102 |
|
* |
| 5103 |
|
* MeasureChars -- |
| 5104 |
|
* |
| 5105 |
|
* Determine the number of characters from the string that will fit |
| 5106 |
|
* in the given horizontal span. The measurement is done under the |
| 5107 |
|
* assumption that Tk_DrawTextLayout will be used to actually display |
| 5108 |
|
* the characters. |
| 5109 |
|
* |
| 5110 |
|
* If tabs are encountered in the string, they will be expanded |
| 5111 |
|
* to the next tab stop, unless the TK_IGNORE_TABS flag is specified. |
| 5112 |
|
* |
| 5113 |
|
* If a newline is encountered in the string, the line will be |
| 5114 |
|
* broken at that point, unless the TK_NEWSLINES_NOT_SPECIAL flag |
| 5115 |
|
* is specified. |
| 5116 |
|
* |
| 5117 |
|
* Results: |
| 5118 |
|
* The return value is the number of bytes from source |
| 5119 |
|
* that fit in the span given by startX and maxX. *nextXPtr |
| 5120 |
|
* is filled in with the x-coordinate at which the first |
| 5121 |
|
* character that didn't fit would be drawn, if it were to |
| 5122 |
|
* be drawn. |
| 5123 |
|
* |
| 5124 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 5125 |
|
* None. |
| 5126 |
|
* |
| 5127 |
|
*-------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 5128 |
|
*/ |
| 5129 |
|
|
| 5130 |
|
static int |
| 5131 |
|
MeasureChars(tkfont, source, maxBytes, startX, maxX, tabOrigin, nextXPtr) |
| 5132 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font in which to draw characters. */ |
| 5133 |
|
CONST char *source; /* Characters to be displayed. Need not |
| 5134 |
|
* be NULL-terminated. */ |
| 5135 |
|
int maxBytes; /* Maximum # of bytes to consider from |
| 5136 |
|
* source. */ |
| 5137 |
|
int startX; /* X-position at which first character will |
| 5138 |
|
* be drawn. */ |
| 5139 |
|
int maxX; /* Don't consider any character that would |
| 5140 |
|
* cross this x-position. */ |
| 5141 |
|
int tabOrigin; /* X-location that serves as "origin" for |
| 5142 |
|
* tab stops. */ |
| 5143 |
|
int *nextXPtr; /* Return x-position of terminating |
| 5144 |
|
* character here. */ |
| 5145 |
|
{ |
| 5146 |
|
int curX, width, ch; |
| 5147 |
|
CONST char *special, *end, *start; |
| 5148 |
|
|
| 5149 |
|
ch = 0; /* lint. */ |
| 5150 |
|
curX = startX; |
| 5151 |
|
special = source; |
| 5152 |
|
end = source + maxBytes; |
| 5153 |
|
for (start = source; start < end; ) { |
| 5154 |
|
if (start >= special) { |
| 5155 |
|
/* |
| 5156 |
|
* Find the next special character in the string. |
| 5157 |
|
*/ |
| 5158 |
|
|
| 5159 |
|
for (special = start; special < end; special++) { |
| 5160 |
|
ch = *special; |
| 5161 |
|
if ((ch == '\t') || (ch == '\n')) { |
| 5162 |
|
break; |
| 5163 |
|
} |
| 5164 |
|
} |
| 5165 |
|
} |
| 5166 |
|
|
| 5167 |
|
/* |
| 5168 |
|
* Special points at the next special character (or the end of the |
| 5169 |
|
* string). Process characters between start and special. |
| 5170 |
|
*/ |
| 5171 |
|
|
| 5172 |
|
if ((maxX >= 0) && (curX >= maxX)) { |
| 5173 |
|
break; |
| 5174 |
|
} |
| 5175 |
|
start += Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, start, special - start, maxX - curX, |
| 5176 |
|
0, &width); |
| 5177 |
|
curX += width; |
| 5178 |
|
if (start < special) { |
| 5179 |
|
/* |
| 5180 |
|
* No more chars fit in line. |
| 5181 |
|
*/ |
| 5182 |
|
|
| 5183 |
|
break; |
| 5184 |
|
} |
| 5185 |
|
if (special < end) { |
| 5186 |
|
if (ch == '\t') { |
| 5187 |
|
start++; |
| 5188 |
|
} else { |
| 5189 |
|
break; |
| 5190 |
|
} |
| 5191 |
|
} |
| 5192 |
|
} |
| 5193 |
|
|
| 5194 |
|
*nextXPtr = curX; |
| 5195 |
|
return start - source; |
| 5196 |
|
} |
| 5197 |
|
|
| 5198 |
|
/* End of tktextdisp.c */ |
Parent Directory
| 
Revision Log
| 
Patch